Nokia N-Gage QD User Manual
1 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. USER GUIDE Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved.
2 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. The wireless device described in this guide is approved for the use in GSM 850 and GSM 1900 networks. LEGAL INFORMATION P art No. 93 1 0 037, Issue No. 1 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Nokia, N-Gage, N-Gage QD, Nokia Connecting P eople, and the Nokia Original Enhancements logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Nokia Corporation. Other company and product names mentioned herein may be trademarks or trade names of their respective owners. Electronic file created March 12, 200 4. US P atent No 5818437, 595354 1, 60 1 1554 and other pending paten ts. T9 text input software Copyright é 1999-2004. Tegic Communications, In c. All rights reserved. Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc. Includes RSA BSAFE cryptographic or security protocol softwar e from RSA Se curity . Java is a trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc. is a trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc. The information contained in this user guide was written for the Nokia N-Gage QD product. Nokia operates a policy of ongoing development. Nokia rese rves the right to make changes to any of the products described in this document without prior notice. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL NOKIA BE RE SPONSIBLE FOR ANY LOSS OF DATA OR INCOME OR ANY SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, AND CONSEQUE NTIAL OR INDIRECT DAMAG ES HOWSOEVER CAUSED. THE CONTENTS OF THIS DOC UMENT ARE PROVIDED "AS IS." EXCEPT AS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW , NO W ARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPR ESS OR IMPLIED, INCLU DING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO , THE IMPLIED W ARRANTIES OF MERCHANTA BIL ITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE MADE IN RELATION TO THE ACCURACY AN D RELIABIL ITY OR CONT ENTS OF THIS DOCUM ENT . NOKIA RESERVES THE RIGHT TO REVISE THIS DOCUMENT OR WITHDRAW IT AT ANY TIME WITHO UT PRIOR NOTICE.
3 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. EXPORT CONTROLS This device may contain commodities, technology , or software subject to US export laws. Diversion contrary to law is prohibited. FCC/INDUSTRY CANADA NOTICE Y our device may cause TV or radio interference (for example, when using a telephone in close proximity to receiving equipment). The FCC or Industry Canada can require you to stop using your telephone if such interference cannot be eliminated. If you require assistance, contact your local service facility . This de vice complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the condition that this device does not cause harmfu l interference.
4 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. P atents Manufactured or sold under one or more of the following US Patents. Asterisk (*) indicates design patents pending. 4868846 4945633 500 1372 5053928 5083240 5101 17 5 5 124672 5 15 1946 5152004 5173927 5212834 5230091 524 1583 5266782 527 1 056 5 3 111 5 1 53 17283 533 1638 5335362 5341 149 5353328 537 148 1 5378935 5378935 5384782 5390223 5392460 5396657 5400949 5408504 54 16435 5430 740 544252 1 5444816 5446364 5446422 5477422 5479476 5487 084 5526366 5534878 55486 16 555 106 7 5553 125 5557639 556582 1 5566201 557 0369 558 1244 5594797 5600 7 08 5606548 5613235 5625274 5640395 5664053 56756 1 1 5677620 5692032 56970 74 5699482 57 0 1392 57220 74 572954 1 5754976 5760568 578734 1 5794 142 5797 10 2 5802465 5805301 58094 13 58 1916 5 582189 1 5822366 5827 082 5835858 5835889 5839 1 01 5842 14 1 5844884 5845219 585060 7 5857 15 1 5859843 5862178 587 0683 5884 103 5884 190 588977 0 5898775 5898925 5903832 5903839 590 7823 59 1257 0 59 14690 59 14796 59 17868 5920826 5926147 5926769 59298 13 5930233 594665 1 5953665 5956332 5956625
5 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 5956625 5956633 5960354 5960389 596390 1 5966378 5977887 5983081 5987 137 5987 137 5987639 5991857 6005857 60061 14 6009328 601 1853 60 1 197 1 60 14 1 13 60 1455 1 60 14573 602580 2 6026 16 1 6028567 6031827 6035 189 6035 194 6038238 6043760 6047 196 6049796 60504 15 6054954 6054966 6055439 6060 193 6069923 60 72787 60 7300 1 60 79993 6081732 608447 1 6084855 6084920 6084962 6088746 6094587 6097964 61 05784 6 1 12099 6 1 12099 6 1 156 17 6 1 18775 6 1 19002 6 1 19 180 6 12184 6 6 122498 6 128322 6128509 6130650 6 133884 6 137789 6 13809 1 6140966 6144243 6144676 6148209 6 15148 5 6 15 150 7 6 163609 6164547 6 167 038 6167248 6 167273 61 70 07 3 6 17 1 127 617 8535 618 2101 6 184592 6 185295 618530 2 6 185422 6188909 6195338 6 199035 620 17 12 6201876 6202 1 09 6219560 6223037 6223059 6230020 62400 76 6249584 62593 12 6262735 626632 1 6266330 6269126 627 1794 6272361 6282436 6285888 6292668 6295286 630 75 12 6308084 63 1 1054 63 14 166 63 1708 3 6324389 6324412 63337 16 63472 18 6356759 6359865 6359904 6363259 637 0362 6370389 6377803 6377820 6381468 6385254 638545 1 6392605 6392660 6400958 64 178 17 6430 163 6434 133 64377 1 1 643837 0 6445932 6453179 6456237 6456826 6463278 647047 0
6 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 6487397 651 0 148 652267 0 6591 1 16 6606508 48 1674 29 177 166* 29 180899* 29 180898* 29 180900* 29 180901 *
7 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Contents 1. For your safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 About your device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Network services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Register your device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 E-newsletters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Chargers, batteries, and en hancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Shared memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 2. Getting started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Installing th e SIM card and battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Charging the ba ttery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Switch the gam e deck on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Keys and parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 About the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Accessing applicatio ns in the menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 8 Keypad lock (Keyguard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Inserting a game or memory card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Ejecting a me mory card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Playing a ga me . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Saving power when playing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Starting a multiplayer game . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Tips fo r efficient use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
8 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 3. Your game deck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Personalizing you r game de ck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Shortcuts in th e standby mo de . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Volume control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Loudspeaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Installing so ftware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Removing software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 4. Your phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Making a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Making a confe rence call (network servi ce) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Answering or d eclining a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Call waiting (network servi ce) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Options duri ng a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 5. N-Gage QD Arena launcher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Connect to N-Gage Arena . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Getting started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Connection settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Updating Arena launcher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Registration and login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Registering from you r game deck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Registering from your PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 6. Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Saving names an d numbersâ Creating and editin g contact card s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Copying contacts between the SIM card and device m emory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Adding a rin ging tone fo r a contact card or group . . . . . . . . 53
9 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Voice dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Adding a voice tag to a phone number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Creating contact groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Removing members from a group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 7. Calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Creating calendar entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Calendar view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 8. Instant messaging (IM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Getting started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 User ID and password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 First login and service settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Chat sessions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Chat history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 IM contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Group chat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Log off service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 9. Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Writing text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Traditional text input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Predictive text input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Copying text to clipboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Writing and sending messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Settings needed for mul timedia messagin g. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Settings ne eded for e-mai l. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Inbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
10 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Viewing multimedia objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Receiving smart messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Receiving web messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 My folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Mailbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Opening the mailbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Retrieving e-mail m essages from the mailbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Disconnecting from mailbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Outbox â messages waiting to be sent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Viewing messages on a SIM card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Cell broadcast (network service) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Service com mand editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Messaging settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Settings for text messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Settings for multimedia messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 10. Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Basic steps for accessing Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Receiving set tings in a smart message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Keying in the settings manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Bookmarks view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Making a connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Connection security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Browsing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Ending a connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Emptying the cache . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Settings for Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
11 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 11. Extras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 ImagesâÂÂViewing imag es . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Screen cap ture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Changing Screen capture settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Video player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Receive a video clip in a message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Setting an alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Turning off the alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Applications (Javaâ¢) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Applications main view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Applications settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 To-doâÂÂtask list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 ConverterâÂÂConverting me asures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Setting a base currency and exchange rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Composer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Go to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Adding shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 12. Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Game manag er . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Grouping and sorting files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Check memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
12 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Game file types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Backing up and restoring game data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Installing and removing Symbian software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Call forwarding (network service) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Changing the profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Customizing profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Changing settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Device settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Call settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Connection settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Date and time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Enhancement settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Call log and general log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Voice mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Calling your voice mailbox (network service) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Bluetooth co nnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Bluetooth settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Sending data using Bluetooth connectivi ty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Pairing devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
13 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Receiving data using Bluetooth connecti vity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Disconnecting Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Connecting your game deck to a computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Using the CD-ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 View memory consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Free memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Memory card tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Format a memory card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Back up and restore information on a memory card . . . . . . . . . . 169 Lock the memory card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 1-touch dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 SIM directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Fixed dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Call restrictions (network servi ce) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Battery information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Nokia 90-Day Limited W arranty . . . . . . . . . . 187 Appendix A Message from the CTIA . . . . . . . 194 Appendix B Message from the FDA . . . . . . . . 198 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
14 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 1. For your safety Read these simple guidelines. Not following them may be dangerous or il legal. Read the complete user guide for further information. SWITC H ON SAFEL Y Do not switch the device o n when wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger . ROAD SAFETY COMES FIRST Obey all local laws. Always keep yo ur hands free to operate the vehicle while driving. Your first consideratio n while driving should b e road safety . INTERFERENCE All wireless devices may be susceptible to interference , which could affect performance. SWIT CH OFF IN HOSPIT ALS Follow any restrictions. Switch the device off near medical equipment. SWIT CH OFF IN AIRCRAFT Follow any restrictions. Wireless device s can cause interference in ai rcraft.
15 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. SWITCH OFF WHEN REFUELING Don't use the device at a refueling point. Don't use near fuel or chemicals. SWIT CH OFF NEAR BLASTING Follow any restrict ions. Don' t use the device where blasting is in progress. USE SENSIBL Y Use only in the normal position as ex plained in the product documentation. Don't touch t he antenna unnecessarily . QUALIFIED SERVICE Only qualified personnel may in stall or repair this product. ENHANCEMENTS AND BATTERIES Use only approved enhanc ements and batteries. Do not connect incompatible products. BACKUP COPIES Remember to make backup copies or keep a written record of all important information. CONNECTING T O O THER DEVICES When connecting to any other device, read its user guide for detailed safety instructions. Do not connect incompatible products.
16 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. EMERGENCY CALLS Ensure the device is switched on and in service. Press as many times as needed to clear the displa y and return to the main screen. Enter the emergency number , then press . Give your location. Do not end the call until given permission to do so. Emergency calls cannot be made in Offline mode. About your device The wireless device described in this guide is approved for u se on GSM 850 and GSM 1900 networks. Contact your service provider for more i nformation about networks. When using this features in this device, obey all laws and respect privacy and legitimate rights of others. W arning: T o use any features in this device, other than the alarm clock, the device must be switched on. Do not switch the device on when wireless phone use may cause interference or danger .
17 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Network services T o use the phone you must have service from a wireless serv ice provider . Many of the features in this device depend on features in the wireless net work to function. These network services may no t be available on all networks or you may have to make specific arrangemen ts with your service provider before you can utilize network services. Y our service provider may need to give you additional instructions for their use and explain what charges will apply . Some networks may have limitations that affect how you can use network services. For instance, some networks may not support all language-dependent char acters and services. Y our service provider may have requested that certain features be disabled or not activated in your device. If so , they will not appe ar on your device menu. Contact your service provider for more information. Register your device Make sure to register your device at www .warranty .nokiausa.com or 1-888-NOKIA-2U (1-888-665-4228) so that we can serve your needs better if you should need to call the cent er or have your device repaired. E-newsletters When you register your device, you can sign up for Nokia's e-newsletter Nokia Connections if you would like. Y ou wi ll receiv e tips and tricks on using your device, accessory information, and special offers.
18 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Chargers , batteries , and enhancements Check the model number of any charger be fore use with this device. This device is intended for use when su pplied with power from the ACP-12 and LCH-12. W arning: Use only batteries, chargers and enhancemen ts approved by Nokia for use with the particular model. The use of any other types may invalidate any approval or warranty , and may be dangerous. The BL-6C battery is the only battery approved by Nokia for use with this device. For availability of approved enhancemen ts, please check with your dealer . When you disconnect the power cord of any enhancement, grasp and pull the plug, not the cord.
19 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Shared memory The following features in this device ma y share memory: games, contacts, text messages, multimedia messages, image s and ringing tones, RealPlayerâ¢, calendar and to-do notes, and downloaded app lications. Use of one or m ore of the se features may reduce the memory available for th e remaining features sha rin g memory . For example, saving man y multimedi a messages may use all of th e a vai la bl e memory . You r phone may display a message that the memory is full when you try to use a shared memory fe ature. In this case, delete some of the information or entries stored in shared memory features before continuing. Some of the features, such as contacts, may have a certain amount of memory specifically allotted to them in addition to the amount of memory shared with other features.
20 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 2. Getting started Installing the SIM card and battery Ke ep all SIM cards out of the reach of small children. For availability and information on using SIM card services , contact your SIM card vendor . This may be the service p rovider , netw ork operator , or other vendor . Note: Before removing the covers, al ways switch off the power and disconnect the Nokia N-Gage QD⢠mobile game deck from the charger or any other device. Avoid touching electronic components while changing the covers. Always store and use the game deck with the covers attached. 1 With the back of the game deck facing you, press the release button ( 1) and slide the cover in the direction of the arrow .
21 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 2 T o release the SIM card holder , slide the holder in the direction of the arrow ( 2 ). 3 Open it (3). 4 Insert the SIM card into the holder ( 4 ). Make su re that the bevelled corner on the SIM card is facing outward from the holder and that the golden contact area on the card is facing downwards.
22 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 5 Close the SIM card holder ( 5 ). 6 Lock it into place ( 6 ). 7 Insert the battery ( 7 ). Replace the back cover .
23 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Charging the battery 1 Connect the charger to a wall outlet. 2 Open the latch marked with . Connect the charger plug into the jack in the game deck ( 1 ). The battery indicator bar starts scrolling. The game deck can be used while charging. If the battery is completely discharged, it may take up to a few minutes before the charging indicator is shown. 3 When the battery is fully charged, the bar stops scrolling. Disconnect the charger from the game deck, then from the outlet.
24 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Switch the game deck on W arning: Do not switch on the game deck when wireless phone use is prohibited or when it ma y cause interference or danger . 1 Press and hold the power key . 2 If the game deck requests a PIN code, key in the code (displayed as ****) and press OK . The PIN code is usually supplied with the SIM card 3 If the game deck requests a lock code, key in the lock code (displayed as *****) and press OK . The factory setting for the lock code is 12345 . See Device and SIM .
25 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. TIPS ON EFFICIENT OPERA TION : Y our game deck has a built-in antenna (grey area shown in the picture). As with any other radio transmitting device, do not touch the antenna unnecessarily when t he game deck is switched on. Contact with the antenna affects call quality and may cause the game deck to operate at a higher power level than otherwise needed. Avoiding contact with the antenna area when operating the phone optimizes the antenna performance and the battery life. NORMAL POSITION : Hold the game deck (as shown in the picture) with the antenna pointed up and over your shoulder .
26 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. K eys and parts
27 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 1 Microphone is on the back. 2 Controller key for playing games and menu navigation. 3 OK key selects, accepts, or activa tes. In standby mode, press this key to start a game. 4 Menu key opens the main menu. 5 Loudspeaker is on the back. 6 Slot for memory or game cards. 7 and are the main game keys. 8 P ower key is at the side. 9 Earpiece. 10 Edit key opens a list of commands for text editing such as Copy , Cut , and Pa s t e . 11 Clear key for deleting text and items. 12 Charger connector . 13 Headset connector . W arning: Using a dual-bud headset may affect your ability to hear sounds around you. Do not use headsets in situations th at many endanger your safety .
28 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. About the display A small number of missing, discolored, or bright dots may appear on the screen. This is a char acteristic of th is type of display . Some displays may contain pixels or dots that remain on or off. This is normal, not a fault. Accessing applications in the menu In standby mode, press the Menu ke y to open the main menu. Use the Controller key to navigate to diffe rent menu applications. To select and open a menu, press the OK key . Use the same method to sel ect and open other menus and folders. T o quickly return to standby mode and make a phone call, press . K eypad lock (K eyguard) Use the keypad lock to prevent the ke ys from being acc identally pressed. ⢠To l o c k : In standby mode, first press and then press . When the keys are locked, appears on the display . Or , press once, select Lock keyp ad and press OK . ⢠T o unlock : Press , and then press . When the keyguard is on, to answer a call, press . During a call, the phone can be operated in the normal way .
29 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Note: When Keyguard is on, calls may be possible to the emergency number programed into your phone (for example, 9 1 1 ). Just key in the emergency number and press . The number is displayed only after you have keyed in its last digit. If you choose to start games automatically when you insert a game card, the keypad is unlocked when a game st arts. Select T ools > Settings > Device > Ge neral > Game auto- start > On to set the auto-start. Inserting a game or memory card Important: K eep all game and memory cards out of the reach of small children. Important: Before inserting or remov ing a memory card, save all unsaved data. Inserting a memory card causes all open applications to close. Unsaved data is los t when applicat ions are closed. Important: Use only MMC cards with this device. Other memory cards, such as secure digital (SD) cards, do not fit in the MMC card slot and are not compatible with this device. Y our game deck supports co mpatible MMC cards with memory from 16 MB up to 1 GB .
30 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. It is important not to add stickers or any type of adhesive to the MMC card. This may cause the MMC card not to fit the card slot and can corrupt the card or cause loss of data. See Memory card tool . If you do not want to b e interrupted while playing, press in standby mode and switch to Offline profile. When Off line profile is active, all GSM wireless phone signals to and from the device are prevented. See Profiles and Call forwarding (network service) . 1 Open the card slot ( 1 ). 2 Insert a game or a memory card ( 2 ). 3 Close the card slot. If you inserted a game card, the game starts automatically . Also, the game icon is automatically added as the last item of the main menu. Information stored on a memory card is indicated with in different applications.
31 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Ejecting a memory card Important: Do not remove the car d in the middle of an operation when the indicator is blinking. Before inserting or removing a memory card, close al l applications by pressing Exit and save all unsaved data. All applications are c losed when inserting or removing the card. Removing the card in the middle of an operation may cause data loss, or the card may become corrupted. Pressing the key does not close applications, but allows them to run in the background. Press the power key and select Remove mem. card (availa ble only if a memory card is inserted). W ait until Memory card can be removed n ow text appears and remove t he card. Visit www .n-gage.com for more information on available games and to get game service settings. Playing a game Insert a game card, see Inserting a game or memory card . When the device is switched on, the game st arts automatically . Exit a game before removing a game card from the game deck.
32 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. T o start a game when a game card is inserted, press in standby mode. Y ou can also start games by selectin g the gameâÂÂs icon in the menu. Y ou can use the primary game keys and for playing games. Other keys may be used depending on th e game. Follow the instructions supplied with the game. Games can usually be paused and unpaused w ith . Check the game manual for details. Playing games consumes power and th e game deckâ s operating time is reduced. Y ou can purchase a variety of N-Gage QD games for your game deck. Each N-Gage QD game is supplied on a separa te read-only game card (MMC). The game data, such as high scores, is sa ved to the game deckâÂÂs memory , not on the N-Gage QD game card. For availa bility of d ifferent games contact your Nokia approved Games supplier or visit www .n-ga ge.com . Saving power when playing ⢠Reduce display brightness: Select Too ls > Settings > Device > Display > Brightness . Select Options > Change . ⢠Use the headset to listen to the game tones while playing. ⢠Switch off the Bluetooth connection when you are not using it. ⢠T o save battery power , do not leave games running in the background while you are not playing.
33 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Starting a multiplayer game Y ou can play some games with two or more players who have the same game on a compatible device. Playing i s done using a Bluetooth connection. Before starting a multiplayer game, en sure that the Bluetooth settings of the devices are compatible. See Bluetooth connection . Refer to the instructions supplied with the game for details of how to st art the game, different levels, additional features, et c. Tips for efficient use ⢠T o change the profile , press , and select the profile you want. All profiles are included in the power key menu. ⢠T o open a list of last dialed numbers , press . ⢠T o see which applications are open and to switch between applications that are open , press and hold . ⢠T o select an item , scroll to it and press . ⢠T o connect t o W eb services , press and hold . ⢠T o return to standby mode , press . The applications you are using are not closed, but are running in the background.
34 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. ⢠T o select multiple items , press and hold and at the same time press or . A check mark is placed next to the selected items. T o end the selection, stop the scrolling with the controller key and then r elease . After you have selected all the items you want, you can move or delete them. ⢠In some situations, when you press the controller key , a shorter options list appears listing the main c ommands available in the view . Note : If memory is getting low , the game deck may close some applications. The game deck save s any unsaved data before an application is closed, unless power is lost abruptly .
35 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 3. Y our game deck P ersonalizing your game deck ⢠T o change the ringing tones, select T ools > Profiles . Y ou can define different ringing tones for each profile. The standard profile is Normal , and the current date is displayed in stead of the profile name in the navigation bar . See Profiles . ⢠T o change the image shown as the the standby mode background, select Too l s > Settings > Device > Standby mode > W allpap er . ⢠T o change the color palette in your phone, select Tools > Settings > Device > Display > Color palette . ⢠T o change shortcuts assigned for the selection keys in the standby mode, select T ools > Settings > Device > Standby mode > Left select ion key or Right selection key . ⢠T o change the clock shown in the standby mode, select Tools > Settings > Date and time se ttings > Clock type > Analog or Digital .
36 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. ⢠T o change the welcome note , image, or animat ion, select T ools > Settings > Device > General > W elcome note or logo . ⢠T o change what is shown in the screen saver , select Tools > S ettings > Device > Display > Screen saver . ⢠T o adjust the volume of the ringing tone, select Audio volume in the profile. ⢠T o give an individual ringing tone to a frien d, select Contacts > Options > Open > Options > Ringing tone . ⢠T o rearrange the main menu, in the main menu, select Options > Mov e, New folder , or Mov e to fold e r . You can move more rarely used applications in folders and place applications that you use more often to the main menu. Shortcuts in the standby mode ⢠T o switch between applications th at are open, press and hold . ⢠T o change the profile, press and select a profile. ⢠T o lock the keypad, first press and then press . ⢠T o start a game when a game card is insert ed, press . ⢠T o open the last dialed nu mbers list, press once. ⢠T o start a conn ection t o the W eb , press and hold . See B asic steps for accessing Web
37 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Essential indicators in the standby mode Offline profile Y ou have received one or seve ral messages to the Inbox in Messa ging. Y ou have received one or several voice messages. See Calling your voice mailbox (network service) There are messages waiting to be sent in Outbox. Shown if Ringing options is set to Silent and Messag e alert tone to Off . Se e Profiles . The game deckâÂÂs keypad is locked. See Keypad lock (K eyguard) . Y ou have an active ala rm. See Setting an alarm . Y ou can make calls using phone line 2 only (network service).
38 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. All calls to the g ame deck are forwarded to another number . If you have two phone lines, the forward indicator for the first line is and for the second line . A memory card is being read or written to. or A headset or loopset is connected to the phone. A data call is active. Shown instead of the signal strength indicator (shown in the top left corner in the standby mode) when there is an active GPRS connection. See GPRS . Shown when the GPRS connection is on hold, for example, during voice calls. A fax call is active. Bluetooth is active. Note that, when data is transmitted using Bluetooth, is shown. Essential indicators in the standby mode
39 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. V olume control When you have an active call or are listening to a sound, press or to increase or decrease the v olume level, respectively . Loudspeaker The loudspeaker allows you to speak and listen to the game deck from a short distance without having to hold the game deck to your ear , for example, having it on a table nearby . The navigation bar shows wh ich speaker is in use. To locate the loudspeaker , see Keys and parts . T o start using the loudspeaker during an already active call , select Options > Activate loudsp. . Sound applications such as Composer and Recorder use the loudspeaker by default. Important: Do not hold the game deck near to your ear while using the loudspeaker because the v olume may be extremely loud. T o turn off the loudspeaker , when you have an active call or audio application playing, select Options > Activate handset .
40 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Installing software Select Options > View log to see what software packages have been installed or removed and when. See Manager and Applications (Java â¢) . Important: If you install a file that contains an update or repair to an existing application, you can only restore the original application if you have the original install ation file or a full back-up copy of the removed software package. To rest ore the original application, first remove the application and then in st all the application again from the original installation file or the back-up copy . 1 Open Manager , scroll to an installation package, and select: ⢠Options > View detail s to view information su ch as the type, version number and the supplier or manufacturer of th e application. ⢠Options > View certificate to display the security certificate details of the application. See Certificate management . 2 Select Options > Install to start installation. T o send your installation log to a help d e s k s o t h a t t h e y c a n s e e w h a t h a s been installed or removed, select Options > Send log > Via text message or Via e-ma il (available only if the correct e-mail settings are in place).
41 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 3 When the game deck asks whether to install or update the application or soft wa re , press Ye s to proceed with installation. If the game deck displays a security warning and you choose to cont inue installation, you are given the option to view the details and the security certificate of the software package. During installation, you may b e able to choose the installation language and select which components of the software package you want t o install. 4 The game deck informs you when installation is complete. Removing software Scroll to a software package and select Options > Remove . Press Ye s to confirm. If you remove software, you can only re-install it if you have the original software package or a full back-up of the removed software package. If you remove a software package, you may no longer be able to open document s created with that software. If another software package depends on the software package that you removed, the other software package may stop working. Refer to the documentation of the installed software package for details.
42 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 4. Y our phone Making a call To adjust the volume during a call, press to increase and to decrease the volume level. 1 In standby mode, key in the phone number , including the area code. Press to remove a number . For international calls, press twice for the international prefix (the chara cter rep laces the international access code) and then key in the country code, the area code without 0 , and the phone number . Note : Calls described here as inte rnational may in some cases be made between regions of the same nation. 2 Press to call the number . 3 Press to end the call (or to cancel the call attempt). Pressing will always end a call, ev en if another application is active. In standby mode, press once, to acce ss a list of the 20 last numbers you called or attempted to call. Scroll to the number you want and press to call the number . T o change the phone number of your voice mailbox, press and select T ools > V oice mailbox and select Options > Change number . Key in t he number (obtained from your service provider) and press OK .
43 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Making a call using Co ntacts Press and select Co ntacts . Scroll to the desired name. Or , key in the first letters of the name to the Search fie ld. Matching contacts are listed. Press to call. See 1-touch dialing . Making a conference ca ll (network service) 1 Make a call to the first participant. 2 Make a call to a nothe r participant, select Options > New call . Key in or search for the phone number and press OK . The first call is automatically put on hold. 3 When the new call has been answered, join the first participant in the conference call. Select Op tion s > Confer ence . ⢠T o add a new person to the call, repeat step 2 and then select Options > Conference > Add to conference . Y ou can make a confer ence call with a maximum of six participants, including yourself.
44 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. ⢠T o have a private conversation with one of the participants: Select Options > Conference > Private . Scroll to t he desired participant and press Private . The con ference call is put on hold on your game deck. The other participants can still continue the conference call. Once you have finished th e private conversation, s elect Options > Add to conference to return to the conference call. ⢠T o drop a participant, select Options > Conference > Drop participant , then scroll to the participant and press Drop . 4 T o end the active conf erence call, press . Answering or declining a call T o answer an incoming call, press and press to end the call. If you do not want to answer a call, press . The caller will hear a âÂÂline busyâ tone. If a compatible headset is connected to the phone, you can answer and end a call by pressing the headset key . If you press S ilence , only the ringing tone is muted. Then either answer or decline the call. If you have activated the Call for ward > If busy function to forward calls, for example, to your voice mailbox, declinin g an incoming call will also forward the call. See Call forwarding (network service) .
45 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Call waiting (network service) If you have activated the Call waiting se rvice, the network will notify you of a new incoming call while you have a call in p rogress. T o change the settings, Press and select T ools > Settings > Call > Call waiting . T o adjust the game deck tones for di fferent environments and events, for example, when you want your game deck to be silent, see Prof iles . 1 During a call, press to answer th e waiting call. The first call is put on hold. T o switch between the two calls, press Swap . 2 T o end the active call, press . Options during a call Many of the options that you can use du ring a call are network services. Press Options during a call for some of the following options: Mute or Unmute , End active call , End all calls , Hold or Unhold , New call , C onference , Private , Drop participant , Send touch tones , Answer , and Decline . Swap to switch between the active call and th e call on hold, Tra n s fe r to connect an incoming call or a call on hold with an active call and to disconnect yourself from the calls.
46 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Y ou can add touch tones to the Phone number or T ouch tones fields in a contact card. Send touch tones to send touch tone strings, for example, passwords or bank account numbers. K ey in the touch tone st ring or search for it in Conta cts . Press repeatedly to produce: * , p (pause ), or w (wait). Press to produce # . Press OK to send the tone.
47 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 5. N-Gage QD Arena launcher Arena launcher is an application on your game deck that allows you to connect to N-Gage Arena, an online, world-wide community for gaming. In N-Gage Arena, you can compete with other gamers in global rankings and tournaments, and communicate with gamers across the globe. N-Gage Arena also has additional content for your ga mes such as background images, game movies, and news about events and new games. Connect to N-Gage Arena Before you can start the N-Gage Aren a, you must choose a service provider and make sure that your game deck can establish a mobile In ternet connection. Check the availability of services, pric ing, and tari ffs with your network operator and service provider . Service providers will also give you instructions on how to use their network serv ices. Y ou must also regi ster with the N- Gage Arena to set up your account. There are th ree ways to connect to N-Gage Arena: ⢠Use the Arena launcher on your game deck. Press and select Arena . ⢠Select the N-Gage Arena website from you r PC. http://arena .n-gage.com
48 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. ⢠While you are playing a game, select N-Gage Arena from the game menu. The in-game menus provide access to sele ct features and content specific to the game you are playing. Getting started Note : To connect to N-Gage Arena wi th your game deck, you must subscribe to GPRS service. Che ck with your service provider for availability of service. Connection settings Y our Internet access point must be co nfigured to connect to N-Gage Arena. Y our service provider may have preconfigured the access point. 1 Y ou can check the settings by select ing T ools > Settings > Conne ction > Access points . If there is no predefined Internet ac cess point, you can order the Internet settings on the N-Gage website. 2 Select http://support.n-gage.com and use the Settings Configurat or . 3 Choose the Internet settings for your service provider . The settings are sent to your game deck in a text message. Note : Accessing N-Gage Arena from your game deck uses GPRS service. Check w ith yo ur service provider about costs for service.
49 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Updating Arena launcher N-Gage Arena launcher is pre-installed on your game deck, but updates to the application are released reg ularly . Ea ch time you open Arena launcher , the application version is checke d. If there is a optional update available, you will be asked if you want to download the update. Some updates to Arena launcher are not optional, but must be downloaded to continue using Arena launcher . Y ou are notified when the update is required. If you do not download the new version, Arena launcher still operates, but you are not able to use t he latest functions. When you choose to update, only the f iles necessary to update the application are downloaded on your game deck. Registration and login To u se the Arena launcher application on your game deck, you must choose a service provider and make sure that your game deck can establish a mobile Internet connection before you create an account. Y ou can register as a member of the N-Gage Arena community by creating an account on your game deck, or on your PC. Registering from your game deck 1 T o use your game deck for re gistration, press and select Arena . If you are already a member of the N-Gage Arena community , login by entering your username and password .
50 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 2 If you are not a member , login and register by entering your date of birth , a username , passwor d, e-mail address , and other personal date in the appropriate fields. Y ou cannot create an account without an e-mail address. The username you choose is the name t hat appears in your rankings and other N-Gage Arena community listings. Registering from your PC 1 Connect to http://a rena.n-gage.com from your PC. 2 Select Register and enter your date of birth , a username , password , e-mail address , and other personal date in the appropriate fields. Y ou cannot create an account without an e-mail address. The username you choose is the name t hat appears in your rankings and other N-Gage Arena community listings. Tip: When you login to N-Gage Arena, you can save your password. High light the Save password? button. Y ou can toggle between Ye s and No by pressing the OK key .
51 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 6. Contacts Options in the Con tacts direct ory: Open , Call , Create message , New contact , Edit , Delete , Duplicate , Add to group , Belongs to groups , Mark/ Unmark , Send, Contacts info , Help , and Exit . Y ou can add a personal ringing tone, v oice tag, or a thumbnail image to a contact card. Y ou can also create contact groups, which allow you to send text messages or e-mail to many rec ipients at the same time. Y ou can add received contact information (business cards) to your Contact s directory . See Receiving smart messages . Contact information can only be sent to or received from compatible devices. Y ou can move contacts from many different Nokia phones to your game deck using the Data Import application of the PC Suite for Nokia N-Gage. T o use PC Suite, your PC must support Bluetoot h. Refer to the PC Suite help function for instructions.
52 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Saving names and numbersâÂÂCreating and editing contact cards Options when editing a contact card: Add thumbnail / Remove thumbnail , Add detail , Delete detail , Edit label , Help , and Ex it . 1 Press and select Contacts > Options > New contact . 2 Fill in the fields that you want and press Done . ⢠T o edit cont act cards , in the Contacts directory , scroll to the contact card and press . ⢠T o change the information on the card , select Options > Edit . T o delete contact cards , in the Contacts directory , scroll to the contact card and select Options > De le te . See ImagesâÂÂViewing images for more information on how to store pictures. ⢠T o attach a small thumbna il image to a contact card , open the contact card, select Options > Edit and then select Options > Add thumbnail . The thumbnail image is shown when the contact calls. ⢠T o add an image to a contact card , open a contact card, and press to open the Image view . T o attach an image, sele ct Options > Add image .
53 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Copying contacts between the SIM card and device memory ⢠T o copy names and numbers from a SI M card to your game deck, press and select To o ls > SIM directory . Select the names you want to copy and select Options > Copy to Contacts . ⢠T o copy a telephone, fax, or pager number from Contacts to your SIM card, select Contacts and open a cont act card. Scroll to the number , and select Options > Copy to SIM direct . Tip: T o send contact information, in the Contacts directory , scroll to the card you want to send. Select Options > Send > Via te xt message, Via e-mail (available only if the correc t e-mail settings are in place) or Via Bluetooth . See the Messaging chapter , and Sending data using Bluetooth connectivity . Adding a ringing tone for a contact card or group When a contact or group member calls you, the game deck plays the chosen ringing tone (if the callerâÂÂs telephone number is sent with th e call and your game deck recognizes it). 1 Press to open a contact card or se lect the Groups list and select a contact group. 2 Select Options > Ringing tone . A list of ringing tones opens.
54 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 3 Scroll to the ringing tone you wish to use for the contact or group and press Select . T o remove the ringing tone, select Default tone from the list of ringing tones. For an individual contact, the game deck uses the ringing tone that was assigned last. So, if you first change a group ringing tone and then the ringing tone of a single contact that belongs to that group, the ringing tone of the single contact is used. V oice dialing Y ou can make a phone call by saying a voice tag that has been added to a contact card. Any spoken word(s) can be a voice tag. Before using voice dialing, note that: ⢠V oice tags are not language depend ent. They are dependent on the speaker' s voice. ⢠V oice tag s are sensitive to background noise. Record them and make calls in a quiet environment. ⢠V ery short names are not accepted. Use long names and avoid similar names for different numbers. Note: Y ou must say the name exactly as you said it when you recor ded it. This may be difficult in, for ex ample, a noisy environment or during an emergency , so you should not rely solely upon voice dialing in all circumstances.
55 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Adding a voice tag to a phone number 1 In the Contacts directory , open the contact card to which you want to add a voice tag. Y ou can have only one voice tag per contact card. 2 Scroll to the number to which you want to add the voice tag and select Options > Add voice tag . Example: Y ou can use a personâ s name for a voice tag, for example, âÂÂJohnâÂÂs cell. â 3 Press Start to record a voice tag. After th e starting tone, say clearly the word(s) you want to record as a voic e tag. W ait until the game deck plays the recorded tag and saves it. A symbol can be seen next to the number in the contact card indicating that a voice tag has been added to it. T o view a list of voice tags you have defined, select Option s > Contacts info > V oice tags in the Contacts directory . Y ou can add a voice tag to up to 25 phone numbers.
56 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Making a call by saying a vo ice tag Y ou must say the voice tag exactly as you said it when you recorded it. T o listen to, change, or delete a voice tag, open a contact card and scroll to the number that has a voice tag (indicated by ) and select Options > V oice tags . Then select either Playback , Change , or Delete . 1 In the standby mode, press and hold . A short tone is played and the note Speak now i s displayed. 2 When you are making a call by saying a voice tag, t he loudspeaker is in use. Hold the game deck at a short distance away and say the voice tag clearly . 3 The game deck plays the original v oice tag, displays the name and number , and dials the number of the recognized voice tag. If the game deck plays the wrong voice tag, or to retry voice dialing, press Retry . V oice dialing cannot be used when a data call or a GPRS connection is active.
57 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Creating contact groups 1 In the Contacts directory , press to open the Groups list. 2 Select Options > New group . 3 Write a name for the group or use the default name Group and pre ss OK . 4 Open the group and select Options > Add me mb e rs . 5 Scroll to a contact and press to mark it. T o add multiple members at a time, repeat this action on all the contacts you want to add. 6 Press OK to add the contacts to the group. Removing members from a group 1 In the Groups list, open the group you want to modify . 2 Scroll to the contact and select Options > Remove from group . 3 Press Ye s to remove the contact from the group.
58 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 7. Calendar Creating calendar entries 1 Press and select Calendar . 2 Select Options > New entry and select: ⢠Meeting to remind you of an appointment that has a specific date and time. ⢠Memo to wr ite a general entry for a day . ⢠Anniversary to remind you of birthdays or special dates. Anniversary entries are repea ted every year . 3 Fill in the fields. Use the Con tr oller key to move between fields. Y ou can move calendar and to-do data from many different Nokia phones to your game deck or synchronize your calendar to a PC using the PC Suite for Nokia N-Gage. To use PC Suite, your PC must support Bluetooth. See the PC Suite online help. Shortcut: Press any key ( â ) in any calendar view . A Meeting entry is opened and the characters you keyed in are added to the Subject field. Alarm âÂÂSel ect On and press to fill in the Alarm time and Al arm date fields. Alarm is shown with in the Day view .
59 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Stopping a calendar alarm â Press Stop to end the calendar alarm. If you press any other key , the alarm is set to snooze. Repeat âÂÂPress to change the entry to be repeating ( is shown in the Day view). Repeat unt il âÂÂY ou can set an ending date for the repeated entry . SynchronizationâÂÂPrivate âÂÂafter synchronization the calendar entry can be seen only by you and it will not be show n to others with online access to view the calendar . Public âÂÂthe calendar entry is shown to others who have access to view your calendar online. None âÂÂthe calendar entry will not be copied to your PC when you sy nchronize. Y ou can send calendar entries to a compatible phone. See the Messaging and Sending data using Bluetooth connectivity . 4 To save the entry , press Don e . If you are editing or deleting a repeated entry , choose how you want the change to take effect: All occurrences âÂÂall repeated entries are deleted / This entry only âÂÂonly the current entry will be deleted. Example: Y our weekly class has been cancel ed. Y ou have set the calendar to remind you every week. Choose This entry only and the calendar will remind you again next week. Calendar views Select Options > Settings t o change the view t hat is shown when you open the calendar or the starting day of the week.
60 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. In the Month view , dates that have cale ndar en tries are marked with a small triangle at the right bottom corner . Memos and Anniversaries are placed before 8 a.m. In the Month view , the number of the we ek shows in the far left column if Monday is selected as the day the week starts on. Select Options > Settings > W eek starts on > Monday to see the week number displayed. ⢠T o select a certain date, select Options > Go to dat e . Write the date and press OK . ⢠Icons in Day and W eek views: â Meeting , â Memo , and â Anniversary . ⢠Press to jump to today .
61 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 8. Instant messaging (IM) Y ou can now take text messaging to the next level by expe r i e n c i n g I M i n a wireless environment. Y ou can engage in IM with friends and family , even if they are on different mobile systems (compa tible with your phone) or on the Internet, as long as you all use the same IM service. Check with your wireless service provider for availability . IM is different f rom using SMS or e-ma il because you can have a two-way or group conversation where all messages within the conversation are displayed in one screen as an ongoing dialogue. The contact list feature shows you when your friends, family members, an d col leagues are online and available to exchange instant messages. Simply se lect the name, wr ite the message, and send it. Y our message stays on the screen. The reply appears on the screen below your original message so that yo u can track the conversation. As new messages appear and the screen f ills up, the older messages disappear . Note: If IM is not available from your wireless service provider , it may not appear in your phone menu. Contact your service provider for more information about signing up for IM services and costs for services. Note: Due to variations in IM and wi reless service providers, you may not have access to all of t he fe atures described in this guide.
62 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Getting started Before you can start using IM, you must obtain a user ID and password. See User ID and password and ensure that your default GPRS connection is set up. User ID and password Before you can use IM, you must get a user ID and password by registering over the Internet (through your computer) with the IM service provider you selected. During the registration proces s you can create your user ID and password. First login and service settings The first time you log in to IM, you must enter the server settings. Contact your service provider for the settings. 1 From the main phone menu, select Instant messaging . A message displays asking you to de fine an instant messaging server . 2 Select Ye s . 3 In the New IM Server screen, scroll to each of the options and enter the information supplied by your service provider server na me, access point in use, URL address, user ID, and password . 4 Select Back . The login screen displays your user ID and password.
63 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 5 Select OK . Connecting appears; then Login completed and the Instant messaging menu follow . Set manual or automatic log in After you first log in, you can use either a manu al or an automatic login. If you log in manually , you will receive a screen prompt for your user ID and password each time. The user ID and pa ssword you entered previo usly appear on the login screen (the password is re presented by asterisks). From the Instant mess aging menu, sel ect Options > Settings > IM Settings > Open > Login type > Change and on e of the following options: Automa tic â When you select the IM application, you are automatically connected to the IM service without en tering your user ID and password. Manual â When you select the IM application, you are prompted f or your user ID and password before be ing connected to the IM service. Set Availabili ty Y ou can determine whether other users ca n know if you are online or not. To set your IM presence, perform the following steps: From the Instant mess aging menu, sel ect Options > Settings > IM Settings > Availability and one of the following options: Available â Others see your status as on l ine, and you receive availability information and messages from others.
64 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Not active â Even though others see your status as offline, you receive availability information and messages from others. Display and ic ons Note: Since each IM service has its own display text and icons, the display on your phone may appear different from this user guide. If you have questions about the various display texts and icons, contact your IM service provider . The following list shows the IM icons and their descriptions. The icons and display text may appear different for your IM service. Contact online Contact offline T racking set for contact New unread message IM connected IM disconnected
65 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Chat sessions When you send an instant message to another person you initiate a chat session. Y ou can send i nstant messag es to anyone if you have their user ID. Y ou can also add that person to your contact list during an IM session. See Add a new contact during a chat session . Start a chat session 1 In the Instant messaging menu, select Conversations > Options > New conversation > Select recipient . 2 Scroll to the desired contact, and select OK . OR Select Enter u ser ID ; then enter the recipient user ID, and select OK . The conversation view appears with the contact nickname (if available) or user ID at the top. For the first message in the IM session, the conversation view will be empty . 3 Enter your message in the text entry area; then se lect Option s > Send , or press OK . The message is sent and displayed at the top of the conversation view. 4 After your contact replies, repeat step 3 to continue your chat session.
66 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Start a Chat session from IM contacts 1 In the Instant messaging menu, select IM contacts . 2 Scroll to the desired contact, and select Option s > View conversation . The conversation view appear s with th e contact name at the top. For the first message in the IM session, th e conversation view will be empty . 3 Enter a messa ge in the text entry area; then select Options > Send , or press OK . The message is sent and displaye d in the conversation view. 4 After your contact replies, repeat step 3 to continue your chat session. Receive and reply to instant messages When you receive an instant message, a tiny balloon icon appears in the upper right corner of the screen. P erform the following steps to access and reply to the message: 1 In the Instant messaging menu, select Conve rsations. 2 Scroll to the sender name, and select Options > Open . The conversation view appears with th e contact name or user ID at the top. 3 Enter a reply to the message, and select Options > Se nd . The reply is sent and displaye d in the conversation view.
67 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Quit chat session T o end your chat session, perform the following steps: 1 In the conversation view, select Options > End convers. 2 At the confirmation message, select Ye s . Chat history Y ou can keep a record of your conversation or group chat session. Save chat history T o save your conversation or gr oup chat, perform the following steps: 1 From the conversation view or gr oup conversation view, select Options > Record conver s. 2 In the Conversation nam e screen, enter a name for the conversa tion, and select OK. The conversation is saved as a note under the Extras phone menu. 3 T o stop recording the conversation, select Options > Stop recording . View or delete chat history 1 In the phone main menu, select Extras > Notes ; then scroll to the desired conversation. 2 To view the conversation, select Options > Open , and scroll to vi ew the entire conversation. 3 T o delete the conversation, select Options > Delete .
68 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 4 At the confirmation message, select Ye s . IM contacts Y ou can add to your contact list the names of other IM users with whom you will be chatting frequently . Add a new contact 1 In the Instant messaging menu, select IM contac ts > Options > New IM contact . 2 Enter the contac t nickname in the Nickname entry are a. 3 Scroll to the Name entry area, and enter the contact name. 4 Scroll to the User ID entry area, and enter the contact user ID. 5 Select Done . The new contact is added to the contact list. Add a new contact during a chat session 1 In the conversation view, select Options > Add to IM contacts . The New IM contact screen opens, with the us er ID already filled in. 2 Enter the contac t nickname in the Nickname entry are a 3 Scroll to the Name entry area, and enter the contact name. 4 Select Done . The new contact is added to the contact list.
69 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Search for a user 1 In the Instant messaging menu, select IM contac ts > Options > Search > Users . 2 Select one of the following: UserâÂÂs name â Enter the first few characters of the contact first and l ast name, and select OK . User ID â Enter the first few characters of the contact user ID, and select OK . Phone number â Ent er th e first few numbers of contact phone number , then select OK . E-mail â Enter the first few characters of the contact e-mail address, then select OK . Search fo r a group 1 In the Instant messaging menu, select IM contac ts > Options > Search > Groups . 2 Select one of the following: Group name â Enter the first few characters of a group name, and select OK . T opic â Enter the first few characters of the group topic, and select OK . Members â Enter the first few characters of the user ID of a group member , and select OK .
70 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Remove a contact from the co ntact list 1 In the Instant messaging menu, select IM contacts . 2 Scroll to the contact name you want to remove and select Options > Delete . 3 At the confirmation message, select Ye s . Block messages from a contact 1 In the Instant messaging menu, select IM contacts . 2 Scroll to the contact you want to block. 3 Select Options > Blocking options > Add to blocked list . Unblock messages from a contact 1 In the Instant messaging menu, select IM contac ts > Options > Blocking options > Unblock . A list of blo cked contacts is displ ayed. 2 Scroll to the contact that you want to unblock, and select OK . Set and release tracking for a contact Y ou can keep trac k of whether a contact is online or offline. If the IM setting Reload user status is set to Automatica lly , and you have tracking set on for a contact, you will receive a notification whenever that contactâ s availability changes. See IM settings for more information. 1 In the Instant messaging menu, select IM contacts .
71 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 2 Scroll to the desired contact, and select Options . 3 Select Switch tracking on to set tracking or Sw itch tr acking off to release track ing. Group chat The group chat feature allows you to chat with multiple participants simultaneously . Y ou can create your own private chat groups or be invited to join a live chat in progress. During a group chat, all messages are displayed in one group conversation view screen. Y ou can also save a group chat history . See Chat history . Create chat group 1 In the Instant messaging menu, select IM groups > Options > Create new group . 2 Select from the following options, and follow the prompts: Group name â Enter a name for the new group, and select OK . Group topic â Enter a conversation topic for the group, and select OK . The default topic is Gener al . W e lcome note â Enter a welcome note of up to 1 00 characters, and select OK . The welcome note is displayed to any group member who logs in to the group. Group size â Enter the maximum group size, and select OK . The default size is 1 00 members.
72 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Allow search â Det ermine whether search en gines are allowed to show the chat group as a search result. Select either Ye s or No . Editing rights â Determine which group members should have editing rights to the group list. T o give a member editing rights, scroll to that member name and press the OK key in the middle to mark the name. When you are finished, select OK . The Group creator always has editing rights and cannot be unmarked. Group members â Determine whether to restrict the chat group to a list of members or to allow anyone to participate. S elect either Selected only (chat group is restricted to a list of members) or All (anyone can join the chat group). See Add and remove group members for more information. Allow private msgs. â Determine whether participants in the chat group are allowed to send private messages during a group chat. Select eith er Ye s or No . 3 Select Done . 4 Enter your screen name, and select OK . Y ou are connected to the new group conversation in the group conversation view. Join an existing chat group 1 In the Instant messaging menu, select IM groups , scroll to the group you want to join, and select Options > Open . 2 Enter your screen name and select OK .
73 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Y ou are connected to the group conversation in the group conversation view. The name of the chat group is displayed at t he top of the screen. Add and remove group members For a chat group that is restricted to a list of selected members, you can add members to the group and re move members from the group. 1 In the group conversation view, select Options > IM group > IM group settings > Group members . 2 Scroll to Selected only , and select OK . Add member 3 In the Group mem bers screen, select Opt ions > A d d me mbe r . 4 Select IM Contact ; then scro ll to the desired name in the contact list, and select OK . OR Select Enter u ser ID ; then enter the us er ID and select OK . 5 Repeat steps 3 âÂÂ4 to add more members to the group. Remove member 6 In the Group members screen, scroll to the member you want to remove and select Options > Remove. 7 At the confirmation message, select Ye s . 8 Repeat steps 6 âÂÂ7 to remove more members from the group.
74 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 9 T o remove all group members at the Group members screen, select Options > Remove all . Send an invitation to a group chat Members must be online before you can invite them to a group chat. 1 From the group conversation view, select Options > Send invitation . 2 Scroll to the contact whom you want to invite to the group chat, and select OK . 3 Enter an invitation message, and select Done . The invitation is sent. 4 T o add other members to the group, repeat steps 2âÂÂ3. When a member accepts an invitat ion, a message is displayed in the group conversation view announcing that the member has joined. Accept or reject invitations to g roup chat When you receive an invitation to a group chat, the New invitation received screen appears with the user ID (or nickname , if available in contacts) and message of the sender displayed. T o accept 1 Select Accept . The Screen name screen appears. 2 Enter your screen name, and Select OK .
75 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. The group conversation view appears wi th the name of the chat group at the top. To r e j e c t Select Cancel . Chat with group members All group chat messages are displayed in the group conversation view. The sender name is displayed in front of each message. Enter a message in the te xt entry area; the n select Options > Send , or pre ss the OK key in the middle. Y our message is displayed in the grou p conversation view under the last message received. If you exit from the group conversation view while the group chat is still active, you can return to the chat. In the Instant messaging menu, select IM groups ; then select the name of the chat group. Send a private message While you are in a group chat, you can sen d a private message to one member of the group. The message cannot be seen by other group members. 1 From the group conversation view, select Options > Send private msg. 2 Select the contact to whom you want to send the private message. 3 Enter the me ssage; then select Op tion s > Send , or press the OK key in the middle.
76 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Leave a group chat From the group conversation view, select Options > Leave IM group. Settings Y ou can customize your IM and server se ttings, depending upon the IM service you have selected. IM settings 1 From the Instant messaging menu, select Options > Settings > IM settings > Open . 2 Select from the following options, and follow the prompts: Use screen name â Select either Ye s or No . If you select Ye s , enter your screen name (up to 1 0 characters) and select OK . IM presence â Select either Active for all or Not active . See Set Availability for more information. Message speed â Use the left and right selection keys to move the indicator between Slow and Fas t on the speed bar; then select OK . Reload us er statu s â Select either Automati cally or Manually . If you select Automatically , the online/offline status of your contacts is updated automatically whenever a status changes. If y ou select Manually , you must update the status by selecting IM Contacts > Options > Reload user st atus from the Instant messaging menu. Block invitations â Select Ye s to prevent invitations to group chat from
77 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. appearing or No to allow invitations to appear . Login type â Select either Automatic or Manual . If you select Automa tic , IM will log you in aut omatically each time you start the application. 3 When you are finished, select Back to save your changes. Server settings 1 From the Instant messaging menu, select Options > Settings > S erver settings > Open . 2 Select from the following options, and follow the prompts: IM server â Edit the settings for an existing s erver , create a new serve r , or delete a server . Contact your service provider for more information. Serve r in use â Select the server you want to use. Log off service When you log out of the IM service, you can exit the Instant messaging menu and return to the phone main menu, or you can remain in the Instant messaging menu without an active connect ion. Y ou can also remain logged in, but return to the phone main menu. This enables you to receive in stant messages and chat invitations from yo ur c ontacts even when using your phone for other purposes, such as making a call or playing a game.
78 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Once you are logged in to the IM servic e, your phone will keep you logged in even if you have not used yo ur IM applic ation for some time. However , if your GPRS connection is put on hold for more than a few minutes (for example, during a phone call), GPRS is disconnec ted and your IM connection is lost. The next time you open th e IM application, you will need to log in again. Log out and retu rn to main menu In the Instant messaging menu, select Options > Exit . Logging out appears, followed by a confirmation note. The phone main menu appears in the display . Log out and remain in instant messag ing menu From the Instant mess aging menu, sel ect Options > Logout . Logging out appears, followed by a confirmation note. The Instant messaging menu remains in the display , and the IM logo changes to disconnected mode. Return to main menu while remaining connected Press the key .
79 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 9. Messaging In Messaging , you can create, send, receive, view , edit, and organize text messages, multimedia messages, e-ma il messages, smar t messages, and special text messages containing data. Y ou can also receive Bluetooth messages and data, WAP service messages , cell broadcast messages as well as send service commands. Options in the Messaging main view are Create me ssage , Connect (shown if you have defined mailbox settings)/ Disconnect (shown if a connection to mailbox is active), SIM messages , Cell broadcast , Service command , Settings , Help , and Exit . When you open Messaging, you can see the New message function and a list of folders: Inbox â contains received messages except e-mail and cell broadcast messages. e-mail messages are stored in the Mailbox . M y f o l d e r s â f or organizing your messages into f olders. Organize your messages by addin g new folders under My folders . Mailbox â When you open this folder , you can e-mail connect to your remote mailbox to retrieve your new e-mail messages or view your previously retrie ved e-mail messages offline. See Settings for e-mail . Drafts â stores draft messages that have not been sen t.
80 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Sent â stores the last 20 messages that ha ve be en se n t. To ch an g e t he number of messages to be saved, see Settings for the Other folder . Messages or data that have been sent using Bluetooth connection are not saved. Outbox â is a temporary storage place fo r messages waiting to be sent. Reports â you can request the network to se nd you a delivery report of the text messa ges, smart mes sages, and multimedia messages you have sent. Receiving a delivery report of a mult imedia message that has been sent to an e-mail address might not be possible. When you have opened any of the defa ult folders, you can switch between the folders by pressing or . Writing text T raditional text input is shown on the top right of the display when you are writing text using traditional text input. and indicate the selected case. means that the first letter of the word, is written in u pper case, and all th e other let ters will automatically be written in lower case. indicates number mode.
81 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. ⢠Press a number key ( â ) repeat edly until the desired character appears. Note, that there are more ch aracters available for a number key than are printed on the key . ⢠T o insert a number , pres s and hold the number key . ⢠T o switch between letter and number mode, press and hold . ⢠If the next letter is located on th e sa me key as the present one, wait until the cursor appears (or press to end the time-out period), and key in the letter . ⢠If you make a mistake, press to remove a character . Press and hold to clear more than one character . ⢠The most common punctuation mark s are available under . Press repeatedly to reach the desired punctuation mark. ⢠Press to open a list of special characters. Use the controller key to move through the list and press Select to select a character . ⢠T o insert a space, press . To move the cursor to the next line, press three times. ⢠T o switch between the different character cases Abc , abc , and ABC , press .
82 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Predictive text input Tip: T o set predictive text input on or off, press twice quickly when writing text. Y ou can key in any letter with a single keypress. The predicti ve text input is based on a built-in dictionary to which you can also add new words. When the dictionary becomes full, a new wo rd replaces the oldest added one. 1 T o activate predictive text input, press and select Predictive text > On . This will activat e predictive text input for all editors in the game deck. is shown on the top right of the display when you are writing text u sing predictive text input. 2 Write the desired word by pressing the keys â . Press each key only once for one letter . For example, to write âÂÂNokiaâ when English dictionary is selected, press for N for o for k for i for a. The word match is evolving. W ait to ke y in the whole word before you check for results. The word suggestion changes after each key press.
83 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 1 When you have finished writing the correct word, confirm it by pressi ng or adding a space by pressing . ⢠If the word is not correct, press repeatedly to view the matching words the dictionary has found one by one, or press and select Predictive text > Matches . â¢I f ? is shown after the word, the word you intended to write is not in the dictionary . To add a word to the dictionary , press Spell , key in the word (up to 32 letters) using traditional text input, and press OK . The word is added to the dictionary . When the dictionary becomes full, a new word replaces the oldest added word. 2 Start writing the next word. When you press , the following options appear (depending on the editing mode selected ): Predictive text , Alpha m ode â traditional text input Numbe r mode , Cut â if text has been selected Copy â if text has been selected Pa s t e â when text has been cut or copied first Insert number , Insert symbol , and Writing language â change s the input language for all editors in the game deck
84 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Writing compound w ord s Write the first half of a compound word, and confirm it by pressing . Write the last part of the compound word, and complete the compound word by pressing to add a space. T urning predictive text in put off Press , and select Predictive text > Off to turn predictive text input off for all editors in the game deck. Copying text to clipboard 1 T o select letters and words, press and hold . At the same time, press or . As the selection moves, text is highlighted. 2 T o end the selection, stop pressing the controller key . 3 T o copy the text to clipboard while still holding , press Copy . 4 T o insert the text into a document, press and hold , and press Pas t e ; press once, and select P aste . ⢠T o select lines of text, press and hold . At the same time press or . ⢠If you want to remove the selected text from the document, press .
85 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Writing and sending messages Note: This function can be used only if it is supported by your network operator or service provid er . Only de vices that offer compatible picture message, multimedia message, or e-mail features can receive and display these messages. Devices that do not have multimedia features may receive details of a link to a web page. Before you can create a multimedia message, or write an e-mail, or connect to your r emote mailbox, you must have the correct connection settings in place. See Settings for e-mail and Settings for multimedia messages . Y ou can start to create a message fr om any application that has the option Send . Choose a file (an image, text) to be added to the message, and select Options > Send . 1 Select New message . A list of message options opens. 2 Select Create: Text message if you want to create a text message. Sending a mu ltimedia message 1 T o send a picture message, select Options > Inser t > Pictur e . 2 Select Create: Multimedia message if you want to send a multimedia message (MMS). Note: Each picture message is made up of several text messages. Therefore, sending one picture me ssage may cost more than sending one text message.
86 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Options in the message editor are: Send , Add recipient , In ser t , Attac hment s (e-mail), Preview message (MMS), Objects (MMS), Remove (M MS), Delete , Message details , Sending options , He lp , and Exit . When you are sending a multimedia message to any compatible device other than a Nokia N-Gage game deck, it is recommended to use a smaller image size and a sound clip that is no longer than 15 seconds. The default setting is Image size: Small . When you are sending a multimedia message to an e-mail address or another Nokia N-Gage game deck, if possible, use the larger ( Large ) image size (network depen dent). To ch ange the image size setting, select Options > Sending options > Image size when you are creating a multimedia message. Important: Copy protections may prevent some images, ringing tones, and other content from being copie d, modified, transferred, or forwarded. Sending e- mail 1 Select Cr eate: e-mail to send e-mail. If you ha ve not set up your e-mail account, you will be prompted to do so. Scroll to a contact, and press to mark it. Y ou can mark several recipients at a time. 2 Press to select recipients from the contacts directory or write the recipientâÂÂs phone number or e-mail addr ess if you are sending an MMS or e-mail.
87 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 3 If you want to send a copy of your e-mail to someone, write the address in the Cc field. Press to add a semicolon ( ; ) to separate each recipient. 4 Press to move to the message field. 5 Write the message. Y ou can send multiple text messages at the same time. Therefore, the normal 160 characters limit for one text messag e can be exceeded. If your text exceeds 160 characters, it will be sent in two or more mess ages, and message sending may cost you more. 6 T o add a media object to a multimedia message, select Opti ons > Insert > Image, Sound clip , Video clip , or Te mplate . Select the item you wish to add. When sound has been added, is shown in the navigation bar . If you select Ins ert > Ne w sound clip , the recorder opens and you can record a new sound. The new sound is automatically saved and a copy is inserted in the message. A multimedia message can contain only one image and one sound clip. 7 T o preview the multimedia message, select Options > Preview message . 8 T o remove a multimedia object, select Options > Remove > Image , Video clip , or Sound clip ; press to remove text.
88 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 9 If you want to add an attachment to the e-mail, select Options > Insert > Image , Sound clip , Video clip or Note. will appear in the navigation bar to indicate that the e-mail has an attachment. Tem p l a t e adds prewritten text to the e-mail. 10 T o send the messa ge, select Optio ns > Send , or press . E-mail messages are automatically placed in the outbox before being sent. If something goes wrong while the game de ck is sending the e-mail, the e-mail is left in the outbox with the F ailed status displayed. Settings needed for mu ltimedia messaging Y ou may receive the settings as a s mar t message from your network operator or service provider . See Receiving smart messages . For availability of and subscription to data servic es, please contact your ne twork operator or service provider . 1 Select T ools > Settings > Conne ction > Access point s , and define the settings for a multimedia messaging access point: Connection name â Give a descriptive name for the connection. Data bearer â Select a data connection type: GPRS or Data c all . Gateway IP address â Enter the add ress. Example: Domain names such as www .nokia.com can be translated into IP addresses like 192.1 00.124.19 5 .
89 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Homepage â Enter the address of th e multimedia messaging center . ⢠If you selected Data call , fill in Dial-u p number , a phone number for the data call. ⢠If you selected GPRS , fill in Access point nam e, the name given to you by your service provider . See Connection settings . 2 Select Messaging > Options > Se ttings > Mult imedia message . Open Access point in use , and select the access point you created to be used as the connect ion. See Settings for multimedia messages . Settings needed for e-mail T o send files other than sounds an d notes as attachments, open the appropriate application and select Send > Via e-mail , if available. Before you can send, receiv e, retrieve, reply to, and forward e-mail, you must do the following: ⢠Configure an Internet access point (IAP) correctly . See Connection settings . ⢠Define your e-mail settings correctly . See Settings needed for e-mail . Follow the instructions given by your remote mailbox and Internet service provider .
90 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Inbox T o determine the status of your inbox refer to these icons: Unread text message Unread multimedia message Data received using Bluetooth technology When there are unread messages in the inbox, the icon changes to . When you receive a message, and the note 1 new message is shown in the standby mode. Press Show to open the message. T o open a message in the inbox, scroll to it, and press . When you open a multimedia message ( ) , you can see an image, read a message, and hear a sound through th e loudspeaker simultaneously . is shown if the sound is included). If th ere is sound, p ress or to increase or decrease the sound volume. To mute the soun d, press Stop . To listen to a sound again, select Options > Play sound clip . Viewing multimedia objects Options in the objects view are Open , Save, Send, Help , and Exit . To see what kinds of media objects ha ve been included in the multimedia message, open the message, and select Options > Objec ts . Y ou can choose to save a multimedia object file in your ga me deck or send it, for example, using Bluetooth connectivity technology to another compatible device.
91 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Important: Multimedia message objects may con tain viruses or otherwise be harmful to your game deck or PC. Do not open any attachment if you are not sure of the trustworthiness of the sender . See Certificate management . Receiving smart messages If you receive a vCard file that has a pi cture attached, the picture will be saved to Contacts as well. Y our game deck can receive many kinds of smart messages ( ), that is, text messages that contain data, also called over-the-air (O TA) messages : Pictur e me ssage â To save the picture for later use in Extras > Images > Picture msgs. , select Option s > Save picture . Business card â T o save the contact information, select Options > Save business card . If certificates or sound files ar e attached, they will not be saved. Ringin g to ne â To save the ringing tone to Composer , select Options > Save . Operator logo â For the logo to be shown in the standby mode instead of the network operatorâÂÂs own identification, select Options > Save . T o change the default access point settin gs for multimedia messagi ng, select Messaging > Options > Settings > M ultimedia message > Access point in use . Calendar entry â To save the invitation, select Options > Save to Calendar .
92 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. W AP message â T o save the bookmark to the Bookmarks list in Web , selec t Options > Save to bookmarks . If the message contains both access point settings and bookmarks, to save the data select Options > Sav e all . E-mail notification â T ells you how many new e-mail messages you have in your remote mailbox. An extended no tification may list more detailed information. In addition, you can receive a text message service number , voice mailbox number , profile settings for remote sync hronization, access point settings for We b , multimedia messaging or e-mail, access point login script settings, or e-mail settings. Receiving web messages We b messages ( ) are notifications of, for example, news headlines, and may contain a text message or a link. For availability and subscription, contact your service provider . My folders Y ou can use texts in the templates folder to avoid rewriting messages that you send often. In My folders , you can organize yo ur messages into folders, create new folders, and rename and delete folders. Select Options > Move to folder , New folder , or Rename folder .
93 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Mailbox If you select Mailb ox and have not set up y our e-mail account, you will be prompted to do so. See Settings for e-mail . When you create a n ew mailbox, the na me you give to the mailbox replaces Mailbox in Messaging . Y ou can have several mailboxes (up to six). Opening the mailbox When you open the mailbox, you can ch oose whether you want to view the previously retrieved e-mail messages an d e-mail headings offline or connect to the e-mail server . When you scroll to your mailbox and pr ess , the game deck asks you if you want to Connect to mailbox? ⢠Select Ye s to connect to your mailbox an d retrieve new e-mail headings or messages. When you view messag es online, you are continuously connected to a remote mailbox using a data call or a GPRS connection. See also Essential indicators in the standby mode and Connection settings . ⢠Select No to view previously retrieved e- mail messages offline. When you view e-mail messages offline, your game deck is not connected to the remote mailbox.
94 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Retrieving e-mail messa ges from the mailbox If you are offline, select Options > Connect to start a connection to a remote mailbox. Y ou can use the PC Suite for Nokia N-Gage to configure access point and mailbox settings. See the CD-ROM supplied in the sales package. 1 When you have an open connection to a remote mailbox, select Options > Retrieve e-mail and one of the fol lowing options: New â to retrieve all new e-mail messages to your game deck. Selected â to retrieve only the e-mail me ssages that have be en marked. All â to retrieve all messages from the mailbox. T o cancel retrieving, press Cancel . 2 After you have retrieved the e-mail messages, you can continue viewing them online, or select Options > Disconnec t to close the connection and view the e-mail messages offline. View the E-mail status using these icons: new e-mail (offline or online mode), the content has not been retrieved to your game deck (arrow outwards). new e-mail, the content h as been retrieved to your game deck (arrow inwards). e-mail message has been read. e-mail heading that has been read and the message content h as been deleted from the game deck.
95 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 3 T o open an e-mail message, press . If the e-mail message has not been retrieved (arrow in the icon is pointing outwards) and you are offline, you will be asked if you want to retrieve this message from the mailbox. 4 T o view e-mail attachments, open a message that has the attachment indicator , and select Options > Attachments . If the attachment has a dimmed indicator , it has not been re trieved to the game deck, select Options > Retrieve . In the attachments view , you can retrieve, open, or save attachments. Y ou can also send attachments using Bluetooth connectivity . Important: E-mail attachments may contai n viruses or otherwise be harmful to your game deck or PC. Do not open any attachment if you are not sure of the trustworthiness of the sender . See Certificate management . Y our mailbox uses the IMAP4 protocol, you can decide whether to retrieve e-mail headings only , messages only , or messages and attachments. With the POP3 protocol, the options are e-mail headings only or messages and attachments. See Settings for e-mail . Deleting e-mail messag es T o delete an e-mail from the game deck while still retaining it in the remote mailbox. ⢠Select Options > Delete > Device only .
96 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. ⢠T o delete an e-mail from both the game deck as well as from the remote mailbox. ⢠T o cancel deleting an e-mail from both the game deck and server , scroll to an e-mail that has been marked to be deleted during the next connection ( ), and select Options > Undelete . The game deck mirrors the e-mail headings in t he remote mailbox. So, although you delete the message content, the e-mail heading stays in your game deck. If you want to remove the heading as well, you have to delete the e-mail message from your remote mailbox and make a connection from your game deck to the remote mailbox again to update the status. ⢠T o copy an e-mail from the remote mailbox to a folder under My folders , select Options > Copy to folder . Select a folder from the list, and press OK . Select Options > Delete > Device and server to delete the e-mail. If you are offline, the e-mail will be deleted from your game deck. During the next connection to the remote mailbox, it will be aut omatically deleted from the remote mailbox. If you are using the POP3 protocol, messages marked to be deleted are removed only after you have closed the conn ection to the remote mailbox. Disconnecting from mailbox When you are online, select Options > Disconnect to end the data call or GPRS connection to the remote mailbox. See also Essential indicators in the standby mode .
97 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Viewing e-mail messag es when offline When you open M ailbox the next time and y ou want to view and read the e-mail messages offline, answer No to the Connect to mailbox? query . Y ou can read the previously re trieved e-mail headings and the retrieved e-mail messages. Y ou can also write new , reply to, or forward e-mail to be sent the next time you connect to the mailbox. Outbox â messages waiting to be sent Status of the messages in the outbox: Sendin g , Waiting/Queued , Resend at , Deferred , and Failed . Resend at (time) â The game deck will try to send the message again after a time-out period. Press Send to restar t the sending immediately . Deferred â Y o u can set documents to be on hold while they are in the outbox. Scroll to a message that is being sent, and select Options > Defer sending. F ailed â The maximum number of sending attempts has been reached. Sending has failed. If you are trying to send a text message, open the message, and check that the sending options are correct. Example: Messages are placed to th e out box, for example, when your game deck is outside network coverage. Y ou ca n also schedule e-mail messages to be sent the next time you connect to you r remote mailbox.
98 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Viewing messages on a SIM card Before you can view SIM messages, yo u ne ed to copy them to a folder in your game deck. 1 In the messaging main view , select Options > SIM messages . 2 Select Options > Mar k/Unmar k > M ark or Mark all to mark messages. 3 Select Options > Copy . A list of folders opens. 4 Select a folder , and press OK . Select the folder to view the messages. Cell broadcast (network service) Y ou can receive messages on various topics, such as weather or traffic conditions from your service provider . Fo r available topics and relevant topic numbers, contact your service provider . In Messaging , select Options > Cell broadcast . In the main view you can see the status of a topic, a topic number , name, and whether it has been flagged ( ) for follow-up. The options in Cell broadcast are Open , S ubscribe/Unsubscribe , Hotmark/Unhotmark , T opic , Settings , Help , and Exit . In Settings , you can set Reception to On/Off , select the Language , and set T opic detection to On/Off . A GPRS connection may prevent cell broadcast reception. Contact your network operator for the correct GPRS settings. See Connection settings .
99 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Service command editor Select Messaging > Options > Service comman d . Key in and send service requests (also known as U SSD commands), such as activation commands for network services, to your service provider . Messaging settings Settings for text messages Options when editing text messa ge center settings are New msg. center , Edit , Delete , Help , and Exit . Select Messaging > Options > Settings > T ext message . Message centers â Lists all the text messag e service centers that have bee n defined. See Adding a new text message center . Msg. center in use â Select which message center is used for deliver ing text messages. Receive report (network service) â To reques t the network to send delivery reports on your messages. When set to No , only the status Sent is sho w n in Log . See Log settings . Message validity â If the recipien t of a mess age cannot be reached within the validity period, the message i s re moved from the text message service center . Note that the network must support this feature. Maximum ti me is the maximum amount of time allowed by the network.
100 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Message sent as â Change this option only if you are sure that your service center is able to convert text me ssages into these other forma ts. Contact your network operator . Preferred connection â Y ou can send text messages using the normal GSM network or using GPRS, if su pported by the network. See GPRS . Reply vi a same ctr . (network se rvice) â Choose Ye s , if you want the reply message to be sent using the same text message service center number . Adding a new text message center 1 Open Message centers , and select Options > New msg. center . 2 Press , write a name for the service center , and press OK . 3 Press , and , and write the numbe r of the text message service center . Y ou receive the number from yo ur service provider . 4 Press OK . 5 T o take the new settings into use, go back to the settings view; scroll to Msg. center in u se , press , and select th e new service center . Settings for multimedia messages Select Messaging > Options > Settings > Multim edia message . Access point in use â Select which access point is used as the connection (must be defined) for the multimedia message center . See Settings needed for multimedia messaging .
101 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Example: If your Access point in use uses GPRS, you may want to use GSM data call for the secondary connection. This enables you to send and receive multimedia messages even when you are not in a network that supports GPRS. Contact your network operator or service provider . See About data connections and access points . If you receive multimedia message se ttings in a sma rt message and save them, the received settings are automatically used for the Access point in use . See Receiving smart messages . Secondary conn. â Select which access point is used as the secondary connection for the multimedia message center . Both Access point in use and Secondary conn. must have the same Homepage setting pointing to the same multimedia service center . Only the data connection is different. Multimedia reception â Se lect Only in hom e net. if you want to receive multimedia messages only when you are in your home network. Important: If the settings Only in home net. or Always on have been selected, your game deck can make an active data call or GPRS connection without your knowledge. When you are outside your home netw ork, multimedia message reception is turned off. Select Always on if you want to receive multimedia messages always. Select Off if you do not want to receive multimedia messages or advertisements at all.
102 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. On receiving msg. â Select fro m the following options: Retr . immediately â Retrieve multimedia messages instantly . If there are messages with deferred status, they will be retrieved as well. Defer retrieval âÂÂSave the message to be retrieved later . Set On receiving msg. to Defer retrieval . Decline message â Decline multimedia messages. Th e multimedia messaging center will delete the messages. Allow anon. messages â Select No , if you want to decline messages coming from an anonymous sender . Receive ads â Define whether you want to receive multimedia message advertisements or not. Receive report â Se t to Ye s , if you want the status of the sent message to be shown in the Log. Receiving a delivery report of a multimedia m e s s a g e t h a t h a s b e e n s e n t t o a n e-mail address might not be possible. Deny report send ing â Choose Ye s , if you do not want your game deck to send delivery reports of re ceived multimedia messages. Message validity â If the recipien t of a mess age cannot be reached within the validity period, the message i s removed from the multimedia messaging center . Note that the network must support this feature. Maximum ti me is the maximum amount of time allowed by the network.
103 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. ⢠Image si ze â Define the size of the image in a multimedia message. The options are Small (u p to 160x120 pixels) and Large (up to 640x480 pixels). ⢠Default s peake r â Choose Loudspeaker or Handset , if you want the sounds in a multimedia message to be played through the loudspeaker or the earpiece. See Loudspeaker . Settings for e-mail Options when editing e-mail settings are Edit , New mailbox, Delete , Help, and Exit . Select Messaging > Options > Settings > e-mail and select from the following settings: Mailbox in use selects which mailbox you want to use for sending e-mail. Mailboxes opens a list of mailboxes that have been defined. If no mailboxes have been defined, you will be prompted to do so. Select a mailbox to change the settings: Mailbox name â Write a descriptive name for the mailbox. Access point in use â T o choose an Internet Access P oint (IAP) for the mailbox (must be defined). See Connection settings . My mail address â Write the e-mail address (m ust be defined) given to you by your service provider . Replies to your messages are sent to this address.
104 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Outgoing mai l server â Write the IP address or host name of the computer (must be defined) that sends your e-mail. Send message â Define how e-mail is sent from your game deck. Immediately â A connection to the mailbox is started after you have selected Send . During next conn. sends e-mail when you connect to your remote mailbox the next time. Send copy to self â Select Yes to save a copy of the e-mail to your remote mailbox and to the address defined in My mail address . Include sign ature â Select Ye s if you want to att ach a signature to your e-mail message and to start to write or edit a signature text. User name â Write your user name, given to you by your service provider . Pa s s w o r d â Write your password. If you le ave this field blank, you will be prompted for the password when you try to connect to your remote mailbox. Incoming mail server â The IP address or host name of th e computer (must be defined) that receives your e-mail. Mailbox type â Defines the e-mail protocol your remote mailbox service provider recommends. The options are POP3 and IMAP4 . This setting can be selected only once and cannot be changed if you have saved or exited from the mailbox settings.
105 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. If you are using the POP3 protocol, e-mail messages are not updated automatically in online mode. T o see the newest e-mail messages, you need to disconnect and then make a new connection to your mailbox. Security â Used with the POP3, IMAP4, and SMTP protocol s to secure the connection to the remote mailbox. APOP secure login â U sed with the POP3 protocol to encrypt the sending of passwords to the remote e-mail server (not shown if IMAP4 is selected for Mailbox type ). Retrieve attachment â T o retrieve e-mail with or without attachments (not shown if the e-mail protocol is set to POP3). Retrieve headers â T o limit the number of e-mail headers you want to retrieve to your game deck. The options are All and User defined (can only be used with the IMAP4 protocol). Settings for service messages Select Messaging > Options > Settings > Service message . Choose whether or not you want to re ceive servic e messages. A uthentic . neede d receives service messages only from authorized sources. Settings for Cell broadcast (network service) Check with your service provider to obtain the available topics and related topic numbers, and select Messaging > Options > Settings > Cell broadcast to change the settings.
106 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Language â All allows you to receive cell broa dcast messages in all supported languages. Selected allows you to choose in which languages you wish to receive cell b roadcast me ssages. If you cannot find the desired language, select Other . T opic detection â If you receive a message that does not belong to any of the existing topics, T opic detection > On allows you to save the topic number automatically . The topic number is saved to the topic list and shown without a name. Choose Off if you do not want to save new topic numbers automatically . Settings for th e Other folder Select Messaging and select Options > Settings > Other . Save sent messages â Choose if you want to save a copy of every text message, multimedia message, or e- mail th at you have sent to the Sent items folder . No. of saved msgs. â Define how many sent mess ages will be saved to the Sent items folder at a time. The default limit is 20 messages. When the limit is reached, the oldest message is deleted.
107 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 10 . W e b Va rious service providers maintain pa ges specifically designed for mobile devices. T o access these pages, press and select We b . These pages use the Wireless Markup Language (WML) or Extensible Hypertext Markup Language (XHTML). Web pages using the Hypertex t Markup Language (HTML) cannot be viewed on your phone. The Web icon may not be seen in a ll phones. Some service providers may replace the icon in the main menu with a shortcut to a specific XHTML page. Check with your service provider for details. Check the availability of services, pric ing, and tari ffs with your network operator and/or service provider . Se rvice providers will also give you instructions on how to use their services. Basic steps for accessing W eb ⢠Save the settings t hat are needed t o access the service that y ou want to use. See the sections Receiving settings in a smart message and K eying in the settings manually . ⢠Make a connection to the W eb . See Making a connection . ⢠Start browsing the pages. See Browsing . ⢠End the connection to W eb. See Ending a connection .
108 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Receiving settings in a smart message Settings may be available, for example, on the web si te of a network operator or service provider . Y ou may receive Web service settings in a special text me ssage, a so-called smart message, from the network operator or service provider that offers the W eb page. See Receiving smart messages . For more information, contact your network operator or service provider . K eying in the settings manually Follow the instructions given to you by your service provider . 1 Select T ools > Settings > Conne ction > Access point s and define the settings for an access point. See Connection settings . 2 Select Web > Options > Add bookmark . Write a name for the bookmark and the address of the page defi ned for the current access point. Bookmarks view Glossary: A bookmark consists of an Inte rnet address (mandatory), bookmark title, access point, and if the W eb page requires, a user name and password. Note: Y our phone may have some pre-installed bookmarks for sites not affiliated with Nokia. Nokia does not warrant or endorse these sites. If you choose to access them, you sh ould take the same precautions, for security or content, as you would with any site.
109 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. The starting page defined for the ac cess point. If you use another access point for browsing, the starting page is changed accordingly . The last visited page. When the phone is disconnected from W eb , the address of the last visited page is ke pt in memory until a new page is visited during the next connection. Any bookmark showing the title or Internet address of the bookmark. Options in the Bookmarks view: Open , Download , Ba ck to page , Send , Go to web address / Find bookmark , Add bookmark , Edi t , Delete , Re ad service msgs. , Disconnect , Move to folder , New folder , Mark /Unmark, Rename , Clear cach e , Details , Add to âÂÂGo toâ , Settings , Help and Exit . Making a connection Shortcut: T o start a connection, press and hold in standby mode. Once you have stored all the required connection settings, you can access the pages. Select a page or a bookmark, or writ e the address, pres s to start to download the page. T o send a bookmark, scroll to it and select Op tions > Send > Via text message .
110 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Connection security If the security indicator is displ ayed during a connection, the data transmission between the phone and th e internet gateway or server is encrypted and secure. Options when browsing: Open , Service options , Bookmarks, History , Go to web address , View image , Read service msgs. , Save as bookmark , Send bookmark , Reload , Disconnect , Show images , Clear cache , Save page , Find , Details , Session , Security , Settings, Help , and Exit . The security icon does not indicate th at data transmission between the gateway and the content serv er (place where the reques ted resource is stored) is secure. It i s up to the service prov ider to secure data tr ansmission between the gateway and the c ontent server . Browsing ⢠T o go to the previous page while browsing, press Back . If Bac k is not available, select Options > History to view a chronological list of the pages you have visited during a browsing session. The history list is cleared each time a session is closed. ⢠T o retrieve the latest content from the server , select Options > Reload . ⢠T o save a bookmark, select Options >Save as bookmark . ⢠T o save a page, while browsing select Options > Save page . Y ou can save pages either to the game deckâÂÂs memory or on a memory card and browse them when offline. To access the pa ges later , press in the Bookmarks view .
111 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. T o access the Bookmarks view while browsing, press and hold down . T o return to the browser view again, select Options > Back to page . ⢠T o open a sublist of commands or actions for the currently open page, select Options > Service options . ⢠Y ou can download items such as ringing tones, images, operator logos and video clips. Downloaded items are saved in the respective applications on your game deck, for example, a downloaded image is saved in Images . Note: Copy protections may prevent some images, ringtones and other content from being copied, modified, transferred or forwarded. ⢠T o download and view new service messages while browsing, select Options > Read service msgs. (shown only if there are new messages). See also Receiving smart messages . Ending a connection Select Options > Disconnect , or press and hold to quit browsing and to return to standby mode. Emptying the cache The information or services you have a ccessed are stored in the cache memory of the game deck. A cache is a buffer memory that is used to store data temporarily .
112 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. If you have tried to access or have a ccessed confidential information requiring passwords (for example, yo ur bank account), empty the cache of your game deck after each use. To empty the cache, select Options > C le ar ca ch e . Settings for W eb Default ac cess pointâ T o change the default access point, press to open a list of available access points. See Connection settings . Show images âÂÂIf you choose No , you can later load images during browsing by selecting Options > Show images . T ext wrapping â Choose Off if you donâÂÂt want the text in a paragraph to automatically wrap, or On if you do. Font size âÂÂChoose text size. Cookies âÂÂEnable or disable the receiving and se nding of cookies. Default enc oding âÂÂT o make sure your browse r displays text characters correctly , select the appr opriate language type. Conf. touch tone sendingâ Choose whether you want to confirm before the game deck sends touch tones during a voice call. See Options during a call .
113 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 1 1. Extras ImagesâÂÂViewing images Options in Images: Open , Image uploader , New folder , Update thumbnails , Help , and Exit . Images can be saved from Screen captur e or sent to you in a multimedia or picture message, as an e-mail at tachment, or using Bluetooth connectivity . After receiving an image in Inbox, you need to save it in the phone memory or on a memory card. Y ou can save graphics sent to you in picture messages to the Picture messages folder . 1 Press and select Extras > Images . Press or to move from one memory tab to another . T o br owse the images, press and . 2 Press , to open an image. When th e image is open, you can see the name of the image and the number of images in the folder on the top of the display .
114 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. K eyboard shortcuts ⢠Rotate: âÂÂcounterclockwise, âÂÂclockwise. ⢠Scroll: âÂÂup, âÂÂdown, âÂÂleft, âÂÂright. ⢠Zoom: âÂÂin, âÂÂout, and press and hold to return to the normal view . ⢠View: âÂÂchange between full screen and normal view . Y ou can send images using different messaging services to compatib le devices. Screen capture Y ou can capture images from the scre en of your game deck. Screen capture runs in the background and captures the screen con tents when you press the designated key combination. 1 Press and select Extras > Screen Captur e . 2 Select Options > Background . The applicat ion disappears from the screen. Screen capture rema ins active. It has no effect on any application you want to run, and it lets you capture the screen contents anytime, for example, when you are playing a game. 3 Press to capture a Screen Capture .
115 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Y ou can capture a screen while playing a game, or start Screen Capture before you start the game. If you have already started playing a game, press to ret urn to the st andb y mode. Open t he Screen Capture application and return to the game by pressing and holding . Select the game you have open and press . Note: If memory is getting low , the game deck may close some applications. The game deck saves any unsaved data before an application is closed, unless power is lost abruptly . Changing Screen capture settings Select Options > Settings to change: ⢠Shot shortcut âÂÂSelect a key combination to take Screen captures with. ⢠Folder name , Image name , Save as, ⢠Ask for image name âÂÂSelect Ye s if you want to save the image using the name you entered in the Image name option. Select No to set an individual name for every image (the name you entered in the Image name option is displayed by default).
116 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Video player Options in the main view: Open , Delete , Edit clip name , Move to mem. c ard , Send , Add to âÂÂGo toâ , Settings , and Exit . Press and select Extras > Video player to play video clips stored on your phone or on a memory card. The file types supported are 3GP and NIM. ⢠T o play a video clip , scroll to it and press or select Options > Open. ⢠T o adjust the vol ume, press or . ⢠T o send a video clip , scroll to the video clip you want to send and select Options > Send > Vi a multimedia or Via Bluetooth . Select a reci pient. The video clip is moved to Outbox fo r sending. Because of the maximum size of the multimedia message is 95 KB , the length of the recorded video clip is limited to 95 KB which usua lly means approximately 15 seconds. Receive a video clip in a message ⢠When you receive a video clip in a supported format in a multimedia message, go to Me ssaging and open the multimedia message. To view the message as text and to play th e video or save it, select Options > Objects . ⢠When you receive a video clip in a supported format as an e-mail attachment, open the message and select Options > Attachments if you want to play the video or save it.
117 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. The MMS-related serv ices are dependent on the network as well as on the compatibility of the devices used and the content formats supported. There are several video recorder applications for mobile phones in use and therefore the appearance of multimedia messages containing video clips may vary even when sent from one compatible phone to another . Network restrictions may apply for sending and receiving video c lips, contact your service provider for more information and availability . Calculator T o add, subtract, multiply , and divide, press and select Extras > Calculator . Options in Calculator: Last result , Memory , Clear screen, Help , and Exit . Note: The Calculator has limited accuracy and rounding errors may occur , especially in long divisions. Select to save a number in t he memory , indicated by M . To retrieve the number , select . To clear a number in memory , select Options > Clear screen .
118 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Clock Options in Clock: Set alarm , Reset alarm , Remove alarm , Settings , Help , and Exit . Press and select Extras > Clock . To change the time or date, select Options > Settings in Clock. To change the clock sh own in the standby mode, scroll down in the Date and time settings and select Clock type > Analog or Digital . Setting an alarm 1 To set a new alarm, se lect Options > Set alarm . 2 Enter the alarm time and press OK . When t he alarm is active , the indicator is shown. The alarm clock works even if the game deck is switched off. T o cancel an alarm, go to clock and select Options > Remove alarm . T urning off the alarm Press Stop to turn off the alarm. When the alarm tone sounds, press any key or Snooze to stop the alarm for five minutes, after which it will resume . Y ou can do this a maximum of five times.
119 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. If the alarm time is reached while the game deck is switched off, the game deck switches itself on and starts sounding the alarm tone. If you press Stop , the game deck asks whether you want to activate the game deck for calls. Press No to switch off the game deck or Ye s to make and receive calls. Do not press Ye s when wireless device use is pr ohibited or when it may cause interference or danger . Notes Press and select Extras > Notes . Y ou can link notes to âÂÂGo toâ and send them to other compatible device s. Plain text files (TXT format) that you receive can be saved to Notes. Press ( â ) to start to write. Press to clear letters. Press Done to save. See Writing text . Applications Y ou can install two types of applications and software to your game deck: ⢠Java⢠applications are installed in Applications . Y our game deck supports J2Micro Edition⢠Java applicat ions with the extension .JAD or .JAR. Do not download P ersonalJava⢠applications to your game deck as they cannot be installed. See Applications (Java â¢) . Example: If you have received the installation file as an e-mail attachment, go to your mailbox, open the e-mail, open the Attachments view , scroll to the installation file, and press to start installation.
120 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. ⢠Symbian applications specifically intended for the Nokia N-Gage QD game deck or suitable for the Symbian operating system. These applications are installed in Manager , and their installation files have the extension .SIS . Se e Installing and removing Symbian software . Installation files may be transferre d to your game deck from a compatible computer , downloaded during browsing, or sent to you in a multimedia message, as an e-mail attachment, or using Bluetooth connectivity . Important: Only install software from sources that offer adequate protection against viruses and other har mful software. During installation, the game deck checks the integrity of the packag e to be installed. The game deck shows inform ation about the checks being carried out, and you are given options whether to continue with or cancel the installation. If you are installing an application with out a digital signature or certification, the game deck displays a warning. Continue installation only if you are sure of the origins and content of the application. Applications (Java ⢠) Installing a Java ap plication Options in the Install view: Install , Del ete , View details , Settings , Help , and Exit . 1 Press and select Extras > Applications . Press to open the Instal l view with a list of Ja va installation files.
121 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 2 Scroll to an installation file and select Options > Install . 3 When the game deck asks whether to install or update the application, press Ye s to proceed with installation. The .JAR file is required for install at ion. If it is missing, the game deck may ask you to download it. If there is no access point defined for Applications, you will be asked to se lect one. When you are downloading the JAR file, you may need to enter a user name and pa ssword to access the server . Y ou obtain these from the supplier or manufacturer of the application. While browsing, you can download an installation file and install it without closing the connection. 4 The game deck informs you when installation is complete. Applications main view Options in the Applications main view: Open , Remove , Update, Go to URL address , View details , Settings , Help , and Exit . ⢠T o start an application, scroll to it and press . ⢠T o uninstall an application, scroll to it and select Options > Remove . ⢠T o start a network connection and to ch eck if there is an update available for the application, scroll to it and select Options > Update . ⢠T o start a network connection and to view extra information about the application, scroll to it and select Options > Go to URL address , if available.
122 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. ⢠T o view information such as the ty pe, version number and the supplier or manufacturer of an application , scroll to it and select Options > View details . Applications settings T o define a default access point for downloading applications and application components, select the Install view and select Options > Settings > Defaul t access point . Some Java applications may require a ne twork connection to be made to a specific access point for downloading extra data or components. In the Applications main view , scroll to an application and select Options > Settings > Settings , and then select: For more information on creating access points, see the Access points . ⢠Access point to select an access point to be used by the application. ⢠Network connection âÂÂThe options are: ⢠Allowed âÂÂConnections for the application are allowed without a notification. ⢠Ask first âÂÂY ou will be asked befo re the application makes a connection. ⢠Not allowed âÂÂConnections for the application are not allowed.
123 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Recorder Options in Recorder: Open , Record sound clip , Delete , Move to devic e mem/ Move to mem. card , Mark /Unmark , Rename sound clip , Send , Add to âÂÂGo toâ , Settings , Help , and Exit . 1 Press and select Extr as > Recorde r . You can record telephone conversations and voice memos, and listen to your recordings. If you are recording a telephone conversation, both parti es will hear a tone every five seconds during recording. 2 Select Options > Reco rd sound clip or Open . Scroll to a function an d press to select it. Us e: âÂÂt o record, âÂÂto pause, âÂÂto stop, â to fast forward, âÂÂto rewind, or âÂÂto pl ay an opened sound file. 3 T o change the volume, press or . Recorder cannot be us ed w hen a data call or a GPRS connection is active.
124 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. To - d o âÂÂtask list 1 Press and select Extr as > To-do . 2 Press any key to start to write the task in the Subject field. ⢠T o set the due date for the task, scroll to the Due date field and key in a date. ⢠T o set a priority for the to-do note, scroll to the Priority field and press . The priority icons are: for High , for Low , and no icon for Normal . 3 T o save the to-do note, press Done . T o mark a task as completed , scroll to it an d select Options > Mark as done () . T o rest ore a task , select Options > Mark as not done () . ConverterâÂÂConverting measures Options in Converter: Sele ct uni t / Change currency , Conversion type , Currency rates , Help , and Exit . 1 T o convert measures such as Lengt h from one unit ( Ya r d s ) to another ( Meters ), press and select Extras > Converter . Note: The Converter has limited accuracy and rounding errors may occur .
125 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 2 Scroll to the Typ e fiel d and press to open a list of measures. Scroll to the measure you want to use and press OK . 3 Scroll to the first Unit field and press . Select the unit from which you want to convert and press OK . Scroll to the next Unit field and select the unit to which you want to c onvert. 4 Scroll to the first Amount field and key in the value you want to convert. The other Amount field changes automatically to show the converted value. 5 Press to add a decimal and press for the , - (for temperature), and E (exponent) symbols. Setting a base currency and exchange rates T o change the conversion order , write the value in the second Amount field. The result is shown in the first Amoun t field. Before you can make currency conver sions, you need to choose a base currency and add exchange rates. The rate of the base currency is always 1. The base currency determines the conv ersion rates of the other currencies. 1 Select Currency as the measure type and select Options > Currency rates . A list of cur rencies opens and you can see the current base currency at the top. 2 T o change the base currency , sc roll to the currency , and select Options > Set as base curr . .
126 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. T o rename a currency , select the Currency rates view , scr oll to the currency , and select Options > Rename currency . Note: When you change the base currency , all previously set exchange rates are set to 0 and you need to key in new rates. 3 Add exchange rates. Scroll to the curre ncy , and key in a new rat e, that is, how many units of the currency equa l one unit of the base currency you have selected. 4 After you have inserted all the need ed exchange rates, you can make currency conversions. Composer Options in the Composer main view: Open , New tone, Del ete , Mark / Unmark , Rename , Duplicate , Help , and Exit . 1 T o create your own, customized ri nging tones, press and select Extras > Composer . Note that it is not poss ible to edit a pre-installed ringing tone. 2 Select Options > New tone to open the editor and to start composing. Use the keys to add notes and rests (see the table below), or select Options > Insert symbol . The default duration for a not e is 1/4. 3 T o listen to the tone, select Options > Play . To adjust the volume select Options > V olume before you start to play the tone. Options when composing are: Play , Insert symbol , Style, Tem po , Vo lume , Help , and Exit .
127 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. ⢠T o adjust the tempo, select Options > T empo . To increase or decrease the tempo gradually , press or , resp ectively . Tempo is measured in beats per minute. ⢠T o apply different pla ying styles, select Options > Style > Legato âÂÂnotes are played in a smooth and even manner or Staccato âÂÂnotes are played separately to produce short sharp sounds. ⢠T o select many notes or rests at the same time, press and hold and press and hold or at the same time. ⢠T o move note(s) up or down on the staff by a half step, scroll to the note and press or . ⢠T o produce C#, press and hold together with . 4 Press Back to sav e the tone.
128 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Key Note Key and function c Shortens the du ration of the selected notes/rests in st eps. d Lengthens the duration of the selected notes/rests in st eps. e Inserts a rest. f Press to open a list of notes and rests. g Switches octaves, a ll selected notes or rests are moved to the next octave. a Deletes selected notes. b A long press of â produces a lengthened (dotted) note or rest or shortens a lengthened note.
129 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Go to Default short cu ts : opens Calendar opens Inbox opens Notes T o select shortcuts, links to your favo rite images, notes, bookmarks, and so on, press and select Extras > Go to . Options in Go to : Open , Edit shortcut name , Move, Grid view , Help , and Exit . Adding shortcuts Shortcuts can be added only from the individual applications, like Images . N ot all applications have this functionality . 1 Open an application. 2 Select the item you want to add as a shortcut. 3 Select Options > Add to Go to . A shortcut in Go to is automatically updated if you move the item it is pointing to, for example, from one folder to another .
130 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Help Y our game deck has a help function that you can access from any application by selecting Options > Help . Example: T o view instructions on how to create a contact card, press and select Extras > Help > Contacts > Cre a ti ng contact cards . Y ou can access the same Help topic when you star t to create a contact card and select Options > Help .
131 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 12. T ools Game manager Options in Game manager main view: File details , Delete , Send, Backup , Restore from card , Mark/Unmark , Settings , He lp , and Exit . Press , and select Tools > Game mgr . to view and manag e game-related files. Y ou can delete files that you no longer need to free memory , send files to other compatible devices using Bluetooth connectivity , and back up and restore files to and from a memory card. ⢠T o view game data file details such as the file type and size, scroll t o the desired file and select Optio ns > File details , or press and to scroll through the details. ⢠T o delete a file, scroll to the file and select Options >Delete . ⢠T o send a file to a compatible device using Bluetooth connectivity , scroll to the file, and select Options >S end >Via Bluetooth . Copy protections may prevent some images, ringing tones, and other content from being copied, modified, transf erred, or forwarded. Some copy-protected files are marked as Not portable in the file details and cannot be used on other devices. P ortable files may be used on other compatible devices.
132 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. ⢠T o change the appearance of Game mana ger and choose how files are grouped and sorted, press Option s > Settings . Grouping and sorting files Y ou can manage game files by groupin g and sorting them in several ways. 1 T o free memory , sort files by size: Select Options > Settings > Sort by > File size . 2 If you want to know which files are the oldest, select Opti ons > Settings > Sort by > Date and time . 3 If you want to see which files belong to one game, select Options > Settings > Sort by > Similar games . Tip: Select Game manager > Style > N-Gage to see two icons on the bottom right of the status bar that show how your files are grouped and sorted. The same icons are used as attributes in the list of files. Press 5 to switch on grouping and sorting, or press 7 to switch off grouping and sorting. Check memory Select Game manage r > St yle > N-Ga ge to check memory l eft on the game deck and the memory card. Icons on the top of the status bar to the right show device memory and memory card memory . The bar at the bottom shows how much memory is free and how much is used.
133 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Information about the device memory is shown when you are in your list of game-related files. Information about the memory on the card is shown when you select Options > Restore from card . Select Style > Stand ar d to show how much memory is still free on your device. Information about free memory on t he card appears in the header when you select Options > Restore from card . Game file types ⢠Game data â Files required to play a game, such as game sounds. ⢠Game extensions â Optional game files, such as extra levels. ⢠User data â Files saved when playing, such as high scores and checkpoints you have reached. Backing up and re storing game data ⢠T o back up game data from your ga me deck memory to a memory card, scroll to the file that you want to back up, and select Options > Backup . ⢠T o restore game data from the memor y card to the game deck memory , select Options > Restore from the card. Scroll to the file that you want to restore, and select Options > Restore .
134 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Manager Installing and removing Symbian software Options in Manager are: View details , View cer tificate , Install , Remove , View log , Send log , Device memory , Help , and Exit . Press , and select Tools > Manager to see the following lists: ⢠Applications and software that you can install (no indicator icon) ⢠Installed applications and software that you can remove, indicated by ⢠Applications and software whose installation was canceled or interrupted, indicated by . Y ou cannot use these applications. Y ou should either remove them or try to re-install them. Forward Call forwarding (network service) 1 T o direct your incoming calls to another number , press , and select T ools > Forward . For details, contact your service provider . 2 Select one of the forward options, for example, If busy , to forward voice calls when your number is busy or when you decline incoming calls. 3 Select Options > Activ ate to set the forward setting on, Cance l to set the forward setting off, Check status to check whether the forward is activated or not, or Cancel all forwards to cancel all active forwards. See Essential indicators in the standby mode .
135 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Y ou can forward calls to your voice mailbox number . Y ou cannot have restrictions on incoming calls and have call forwarding active at the same time. See Call restrictions (network service) . Profiles T o adjust and customize the tones for different events, environments, or cal ler groups, pres s , and select To ols > Profiles . Y ou can see the currently selected profile at the top of the display in the standby mode. If the Normal profile is in use, only the current date is shown. Changing the profile To change the profile (shortcut), press in the standby mode. Scroll to the profile you want to activate, and press OK . Y ou can also use this method: 1 Press , and select Tools > Profiles . A list of profiles opens. 2 In the profiles list, scroll to a profile, and select Options > Activate . Incoming phone calls will sound a ringing tone if set to ring in the profile settings. Offline profil e lets you use the ga me deck without connecting to the GSM wireless network.
136 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. W arning: In the Offline pro file you cannot make any calls, including emergency calls, or use other featur es that require network coverage. When you activate the Offline profile , the game deck restarts, and the GSM is turned off, as indicated by the in the signal strength indicator . Al l GSM wireless phone signals to and from the device are prevented. Note: There may be restrictions on using Bluetooth devices in some locations. Check with your local authorities or service provider . To leave the Offline profile , select some other profile, and Options > Activate . > Ye s . The game deck restarts an d re-enables GSM wireless transmissions (providing there is sufficient signal strength). If Bluetooth connectivity is turned off as a result of entering the Offline profile you must re-enable Bluetooth connectivity manually . See Bluetooth settings . Customizing profiles 1 T o modify a profile, scroll to the profil e in the profiles list, and select Options > Customize . A list of profile settings opens. 2 Scroll to the setting you want to change, and press to open the choices: Ringin g to ne â To set th e ringing tone fo r voice calls, choose a ringing tone from the list. T ones stored on a memory card have the icon next to the tone name.
137 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. When you scroll through the ringing tone list, you can stop on a tone to listen to it before you make your selection. Press any key to stop the sound. Y ou can change ringing tones in two places: Profiles or Contacts . Se e Adding a ringing tone for a contact card or group . Ringing options â When Ascending is selected, the ringing volume starts from level one and increases level by level to the set volume level. Sound volume â To set the volume level for the ringing and message alert tones. Message alert tone â To set the tone for messages. Vibrating al ert â T o set the game deck to vibrate at incoming voice calls and messages. Key p a d t on e s â T o set the volume level for keypad tones. W a rn ing tones â The game deck sounds a warning tone, for example, when the battery is runn ing out of power . Alert fo r â To set the game deck to ring only upon calls from phone numbers that belong to a selected contact group. Phone calls coming from people outside the selected grou p will have a silent alert. The choices are All calls (list of contact groups, if you hav e created them). See Creating contact groups . Profile name â T o rename a profile. The Normal and Offline profiles cannot be renamed.
138 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Settings Changing settings 1 Press , and select T ools > Settings . 2 Scroll to a setting group, and press to open it. 3 Scroll to a setting you want to change, and press . Device settings General Game auto-start â To allow a game to start automatically when a compatible read-only game card is inserted in the game deck, select On . Device l anguage â Changing the language of th e display texts in your game deck will also affect the format used for date and time and the separators used, for example, in calculations. Automatic selects the language according to the information on your SIM card. After you have changed the display text language, the game deck restarts. Changing the settings for Device language or Writing language affects every application in your game deck, and the change remains effective until you change these settings again. Writing language â Changing the language affects the characters and special characters available when wr iting text and the predictive text dictionary used.
139 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Predicti ve text â T o set the predictive text input On or Off for all editors in the game deck. The predictive text dictionary is not available for all languages. W elcome note or logo â The welcome note or logo is displayed briefly each time you switch on th e game deck. Select Default to use the default image, Te x t to write a welcome note (up to 50 letters), or Image to select a photo or picture from Images . Orig. device settings â Y ou can reset some of the settings to their original values. T o do this, you need the lock c ode. After resetting the settings, the game deck may take a longer time to power on. See PIN code/PIN2 code/Lock code . All documents and files that you ha ve created are left a s they are. Standby mode W allpap er â Select Ye s to set a background image for the standby mode. Left sele ct ion k ey and Right sele ct ion key â To c hange the shortcuts that appear over the left and right selection keys in the standby mode. Note that you cannot have a sh ortcut to an application that you have installed.
140 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Display brightness To change the Color palette â T o change the color palette used on the display . Screen saver ti me-out â The screen sa ver is activated after the time-out period is over . The screen saver changes to indicate the number of new messages or missed calls. Screen saver â Select what is shown on the screen saver bar: Date and time or Tex t that you have written. Call settings Send my caller ID (network service) â T o set your phone number to be displayed ( Ye s ) or hidden ( No ) fr om the person whom you are call ing. The value may be set by your network op erator or service provider when you subscribe ( Set by network ). Call waiting (network service) â Select Activate to request the network to activate call waiting, Cancel to request the n etwork to deactivate call waiting, or Check status to check if the function is active or not. T o change the settings for ca ll forwarding, press , and select Tools > Call forward . See Call forwarding (network service) . Automati c redial â Se lect On and yo ur game deck will make a maximum of 1 0 attempts to connect the call afte r an unsuccessful call attempt. Press to stop automatic redialing.
141 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Summary after call â Activate this setting if you want the game deck to briefly display the duration of the last call. To show costs, the Call cost limit needs to be activated for your SIM card. See Call costs (network service) . 1-touch dialing â Select On , and the numbers assigned to the 1-touch dialing keys ( â ) can be dialed by pressing and holding the key . Anykey answer â Select On , and you can answer an incoming call by briefly pressing any key , except , , and . Line in use (network service) â This setting is shown only if the SIM card supports two subscriber numbers, that is, two phone lines. Select which phone line you want to use for making calls and sending text messages. Call s on both lines can be answered irre spective of the selected line. T o prevent line selection, select Line change > Disable if supported by your SIM card. T o change this setting, you need the PIN2 code . T o switch between the phone lines, pr ess and hold in the standby mode. Y ou will not be able to make calls if you select Line 2 and have not subscribed to this network serv ice. Connection settings A GSM data c all enables data transmission ra tes to a maximum of 14.4 Kb/s.
142 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. About data connections and access points Y our game deck supports two kinds of data connections: a GSM data call ( ) and GPRS connection ( ). See also Essential indicators in the standby mode . A data connection is required to connect to an access point. There are three different kinds of access points that you can define: ⢠MMS access point to send an d receive multimedia messages ⢠Access point for W eb to view WML or XHTML pages ⢠Internet ac cess point (IAP) to send and receive e-mail or use N-Gage Arena for games services. See N-Gage QD Arena launcher . Check with your service provider to determine the kind of an access point needed for the service you wi sh to ac cess. For availability and subscription to data call and GPRS connection servic es, contact your network operator or service provider . Most se tting are available on http://support.n-gage.com and can be sent to your game deck as a text message. Settings to mak e a data call T o insert a set of very basic GSM data call settings, select Tools > Settings > Connection > Access poin ts > Options > New access point . Fill in the following information: Data bearer: Data call, Dial-up number: obtained from service provider , User name, Data call type: Analog , and Maximum data speed: Automatic . Settings to make a GPRS connection Y ou need to subscribe to the GPRS serv ice. For availability and subscription to GPRS, contact your network operator or service provider .
143 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Select Too ls > Settings > Con n ection > Access points > Options > New access point . Fill in the following information: Data bearer: GPRS and Access point name: ( enter the name given to you by your service provider). See Creating an access point . Pricing for GPRS and appl ications The settings wizard program included in the PC Suite for Nokia N-Gage QD can help you to configure access point and mailbox settings. Y ou can also copy existing settings, for example, from your compatible computer to your game deck. See the CD-ROM supplied in the sales package. Both the active GPRS connection and th e applications used over GPRS require a fee, for example, when using services , sending and receiving data, and text messages. For more detailed informatio n on fees, contact your network operator or service provider . See also GPRS counter . Creating an access point Y ou may receive access point settings in a smart message from a service provider , or you may have preset access point settings in your game deck. Y ou can also receive settings from http://supp ort.n-gage.com . See Receiving smart messages . To create a new a ccess point, select Tool s > Settings > Connection > Access points .
144 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. If you already have access points , to create a new one, select Options > New access point > Us e default settings or Use existing settings , make the needed changes, and press Back to save the settings. Options in Access points list ar e: Edit , New access point , Delete , Help , and Exit . Access points Start to fill in the settings from the top because depending on what data connection you select ( Data bearer ) or whether you need to insert a Gateway IP address , only certain setting fields are avail able. Options when editing access point settings are: Change , Advanced se ttings , Help , and Exit . Follow the instructions given to you by your service provider . Connection name â Give a descriptive name for the connection. Data bearer â Depending on what data connection you select, only certain setting fields are available. Fill in all fields marked with Must be defined or with a red asterisk. Other fields can be left empty , unless you have been instructed otherwise by your service provider . T o be able to use a da ta connection, the network service provider must support this feature, and if necessar y , activate it for your SIM card. Access point name (for GPRS only) â The access point name is needed to establish a connection to the GPRS ne twork. Y ou obtain the access point name from your network operator or service provider .
145 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Dial-up number (for GSM data and high speed data only) â The modem telephone number of the access poi nt. This option is shown when Data call is selected as the Data bearer . See also Settings needed for multimedia messaging , Settings needed for e-mail , and Basic steps for accessing W eb . User name â The user name may be needed to make a data connection and is usually provided by the service provider . The user name is often case-sensitive. Prompt password â If you must key in a new password every time you log on to a server , or if you do not want to save your password to the game deck, choose Ye s . Pa s s w o r d â A password may be needed to make a data connection, and is usually provided by the service provider . The passwo rd is of ten case-sensitive. Authen tication â Normal / Secure . Homepage â Depending on what you are setting up, write either the service address, or the address of the multimedia messaging center . Gateway IP address â The IP address that the required W AP gateway uses. Connection security â Choose whether transport laye r security (TLS) is used for the connection. Use the TLS protocol anytime you need to connect to a secure site, for example, your bank, or an online merchant.
146 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Data call type (for GSM data) - Defines whet her the game deck uses an analog or digital connection. This setting depends on both your GSM network operator and Internet Service Provider (ISP), because some GSM networks do not support certain types of ISDN connections. For details, contact your ISP . ISDN connections are a way to establis h a data call between your game deck and your access point. ISDN connection s are digital from end to end and as such offer quicker set- up times and faster data rates than analog connections. Maximum data speed â The options for GSM data depend on what you have chosen in Session mode and Data cal l type . Network conditions can affect operating speed of your connection. Advanced settings DNS - domain name service. is an Inte rnet service that translates domain names such as www .nokia.com into IP addresses like 192.1 00. 124.195 Device IP address â The IP address of your game deck. Primary name server is the IP address of the primary DNS server . Second. name server is the IP address of the secondary DNS server . If you need to enter the Device IP address , Primary name server , or Second. name server , contact your Internet service provider to obtain these addresses.
147 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. The following settings are sh own if you have selected GSM data as the Data bearer when starting to create the access point: Use callback â This option allows a server to call you back once you have made the initial call. Contact your service provider to subscribe to this service. Callback type â Ask your service provider for the correct setting to use. Callback number â Ke y in your game deck data phone number which the dial back server uses. Usually this number is the data call phon e number of your game deck. Use PPP compression â When set to Ye s , this option speeds up the data transfer , if supported by the remote PPP server . If you have problems with establishing a connection, try setting this to No . Contact your service provider for guidance. T o insert a l ogin script, select Use login script > Y es . Insert the login script in Login script . PPP (point-to-point protocol) is a common networking software protocol that enables any computer with a modem and a phone line to connect directly to the Internet. Modem ini tialization â Modem initialization string controls your game deck using modem A T commands. If required, enter characters specified by your GSM network service provider or Internet service provider .
148 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. GPRS The GPRS settings affect all access points using a GPRS connection. GPRS connection â If you select When available and you are in a n etwork that supports GPRS, the game deck regis ters to the GPRS network and sending text messages will be done using G PRS. Also, starting an active GPRS connection is quicker , for example, to se nd and r eceive e-mail If you select When needed , the game deck will use a GPRS connection only if yo u start an application or action that needs i t. If there is no GPRS coverage and you have chosen When available , the game deck will periodically try to establish a GPRS connection. Access point â The access point name is needed when you want to use your game deck as a GPRS modem to your computer . Data call The data call settings affect all access poin ts using a data call. Online time â If there are no actions, the data call is dropped automatically after a time-out period. The options are User defined (you enter a time) or Unlimited . Date and time The date and time settings allow you to define the date and time used in your game deck, as well as change the date and time fo rmat and separators. Select Clock type > Analog or Digital to change the clock shown in th e standby
149 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. mode. Select Auto time update if you want the mobile phone network to update time, date, and time zone info rmation to your game deck (network service). For the Auto time update setting to take effect , the game deck rest arts. Security Device and SIM PIN (personal identification number) code (4 to 8 digits) protects your SIM card against unauthorized use. The PIN code is usually suppl ied with the SIM card. After three consecutive incorrect PIN code entries, the PIN code is blocked, and you must unblock it before you can use the SIM card again. See the information about the PUK code. PIN2 code (4 to 8 digits) supplied with some SI M cards, is required to access some functions, such as call cost counters. Lock code (5 digits) can be used to lock the game deck to avoid unauthorized use. The factory setting for the lock c ode is 12345 . To avoid unauthorized use of your game deck, change the lock code. Ke ep the new code secret and in a safe place separate from your game deck. PUK (personal unblocking key) and PUK2 codes (8 digits) are required to change a blocked PIN code or PIN2 c ode, respectively . If the codes are not supplied with the SIM card, contact the operator whose SIM card is in your game deck.
150 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. The PUK and PUK2 codes are not seen in the menu unless the PIN or PIN2 code is blocked. PIN code request When active, the code is requested each time the game deck is switched on. Deactivating the PIN code request may not be allo wed by some SIM cards. PIN code/PIN2 code/Lock code Y ou can change the lock code, PIN code , and PIN2 code . These codes can only include the numbers from 0 to 9 . Avoid using access codes similar to the emergency numbers, such as 9 1 1, to prevent accidental dialing of the emergency number . Autolock period Y ou can set an autolock period, a time -out after which the game deck is automatically locked, that is used only if the correct lock code is entered. Key in a number for the time-out (in minutes), or select None to turn off the autolock period. T o lock the game deck manually , pres s . A list of commands opens. Select Lock device . Lock keys appears in the list of commands after Lock device . Locking the keys does not require a code. Select Lock device to make sure yo ur game deck is secure. T o unlock the game deck, key in the lock code.
151 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Note: When the game deck is locked, calls may be possible to the emergency number programed into your game deck (for example, 9 1 1). Lock if SIM change d The game deck maintains a list of SIM cards th at are recognized as the ownerâ s cards. Set the game deck to ask for the lock code when a new SIM card is inserted into your game deck. Closed user group (network service) T o specify a group of people to whom you can call and who can call you, sel ect Default to activate the specified group with the network operator , On to use another group (you need to know the group index number), or Off . Note: When calls are limited to Clos ed User Groups, calls may be possible to certain emergency numbers in some networks (f or example, 9 1 1). Confirm SIM services (netw o rk se rvice) Set the game deck to display confirma tion messages when you are using a SIM card service. Certificate management Options in Certificate management are: Certificate details , Delete , Tru s t settings , Mark/Un mark , Help , and Exit . Digital certificates are used to verify the origin of the XHTML o r WML pages and installed software. However , they can only be trusted if the origin of the certificate is known to be authentic.
152 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. In the Certificate management main view , you can see a list of authority certificates that have been stored in your game deck. Pr ess to see a list of personal certificates, i f available. Digital certificates should be used if yo u want to connect to an online bank or another site or remote server fo r actions that involve transferring confidential information, or want to re duce the risk of viruses or other malicious software and be sure of the authenticity of software when downloading and installing software. The existence of a certificate does not offer any protection by itself; the certificate manager must contain correct , authentic, or trusted certificates for increased security to be available. Certificate details and authenticity Y ou can only be sure of the correct identity of a W AP gateway or a server when the signature and the period of validity of a gateway or server certificate have been checked. Y ou will be notified on the game deck display if the identity of the server or gateway is not auth entic, or if you do no t have the correct security certificate in your game deck. T o check certificate details, scr oll to a certificate, and select Options > Certificate details . When you open certificate details, Certificate manage ment checks the validity of the certificate and one of the following notes may appear:
153 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. ⢠Certificate not trusted â Y ou have not set any application to use the certificate. See âÂÂChanging the trust settingsâ . ⢠Expired certificate â The period of validity has ended for the selected certificate. ⢠Certificate not valid yet â The period of validity has not yet begun for the selected certificate. ⢠Certificate corrupted â The c ertificate cannot be used. Contact the certificate issuer . Certificates have a restricted lifetime. If Expired certifi cate or Certificate not valid yet is shown, even if the certific ate should be valid, check that the current date and time in your game deck are correct. Changing the tr ust setting s Scroll to an authority certificate, and select Option s > Tru st settings . Depending on the certificate, a list of the applications that can use the selected certificate is shown and include the following: Services: Y es â the certificate is able to certify sites. Application manager: Y es â the certificate is able to certify the origin of new soft ware. Internet: Y es â the certificate is able to certify e-mail and imaging servers. Important: Before changing these settings, you must make sure that you trust the owner of the certificate and that the certificate belongs to the listed owner .
154 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Network A roaming agreement is an agreement between two or more network service providers to enable the users of one se rvice provider to us e the services of other service providers. Network selection â Select Autom atic to set the game deck to search for , and select one of the networks available, or Ma nual to select the netw ork manually from a list of networks. If th e connection to the manually selected network is lost, the game deck will sound an error tone and ask you to select a network again. The selected network must h ave a roaming agreement with your home network, that is, the operato r whose SIM card is in your g ame deck. Cell info display â Select On to set the game deck to indicate when it is used in a cellular network based on micro cellular network (MCN) technology and to activate cell info reception. Enhancement settings Indicators shown in the standby mode: A headset is connected. A loopset is connected. Enhancement in use â Select the enhancement you are using. Headset/ Loopset/ TTY/ Handsfree â Select Default profile to set the profile you want to be activated each time when you connect a certain enhancement to your game deck. See Profiles . Select Au tomatic answ er to set the game deck to answer an incoming call automatically after 5 seconds. If the Ringing options is set to Beep once or Silen t , automatic answer cannot be in use.
155 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Log Call log and general log T o view a list of sent messages, press , and select Messaging > Sent . T o monitor phone calls, text messages, or data connections registered by the game deck, press , select Log , and press . Y ou can filter the general log to view just one type of event, an d create new contact cards based on the log information. Connections to your remote mailbox, mu ltimedia messaging center , or XHTML or WML pages are shown as data calls or GPRS connections in the general communications log. When you see a note in the standby mode about missed calls, press Show to access the list of missed calls. T o call back, scroll to a name or number , and press . Indicators shown in the standby mode: incoming calls outgoing calls missed communication events T o open the general log, press , select Tools > Log , and press . In the general log, for each communication event, you can see the sender or recipient name, phone number , name of the service pr ovider , or access point.
156 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Recent calls register T o monitor the phone numbers of misse d, received, and dialed calls, press , and select Tools > Log > Recent call s . The game deck registers missed and received calls only if the network supports these functions, and when the game deck is on and located wi thin the network serv ice area. Erasing recent call lists To clear all recent call lists, select Options > Clear recent calls in the recent calls main view . To clear one of the call logs, open the regist er you want to erase, and select Options > Clear list . T o clear an individual event, open a register , scroll to the event, and press . Call duration If you want to see the call duration time r while you have an active call, select Options > Settings > Show call durati on > Y es. T o monitor the approximate duration of your incoming and outgoing calls, press , and select T ools > Log > Call timers . Note: The actual time invoiced for calls by your service provider may vary , depending upon network features, rounding-off fo r billing, and so forth. Clearing call duration timers Select Options > Clear timers . For this activity , you need the lock code. See Security . T o clear an individual event, scroll to it, and press .
157 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Call cost limit is the pr eset credit limit. Calls can only be made as long as that limit is not exceeded and you are in a n etwork that supports call cost limit. The number of r emaining units is show n during a call and in the standby mode. When the charging units have expired, Call cost limit reached is displayed. Call costs (netw ork service) T o check the cost of t he last call or all calls, press , and select T ools > Log > Call costs . The call costs are displaye d separately for each SIM card. Note: The actual invoice for calls and services from your service provider may vary , depending upon network featur es, rounding-off for billing, taxes, and so forth. Call costs limit set by a service provider Y our service provider can limit the cost of your calls to a certain amount of charging units or currency . Contact your service provider for information on the limited charging mode and charging unit prices. T o change the Show costs in setting, you may need the PIN2 code. Setting a call cost limit for yourself 1 Select Options > Settings > Call cost limit > On . 2 Enter the limit in units. For this you may need the PIN2 code. When the charging limit you have set yourself is reached, the counter stops at its maximum value, and Re set all ca lls' cost coun ter is displayed.
158 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 3 T o be able to make calls, select Options > Settings > Call cost limit > Off . For this you need the PIN2 code. Clearing call cost counters Select Options > Cl ear c ounters . For this you need the PIN2 code. T o clear an individual event, scroll to it, and press . Note: When no more charging units or currency units are left, calls may only be possible to the emergency number programed into your game deck (for example, 9 1 1). GPRS counter T o check the amount of data sent an d received during GPRS connections, press , and select Tools > Log > GPRS counter . For example, you may be charged for your GPRS connections by the amount of data sent and received. Subevents, such as a te xt message sent in more than one part and GPRS connections are logged as one communication event. Note: When sending messages, your game deck may display Sent . This is an indication that the message has been sent by your game deck to the message center number programed into your game deck. This is not an indication that the message has been received at the intended destination. For more details about messaging services, check with your service provider . T o filter the log, select Optio ns > Filt er . Scroll to a filter , and press Select .
159 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. T o erase all the log contents, recent calls register , and messaging delivery reports permanently , select Options > Clear log . Press Ye s to confirm. GPRS coun ter and conn ection time r T o view how much data, measured in kilobytes, has been tr ansferred and how long a certain GPRS connection has lasted , scroll to an incoming or outgoing event with the access point icon , and select Options > View details . Log settings Select Options > Settings . Log duration â The log events remain in the game deck memory for a set number of days after which they are automatically erased to free memory . For Call duration , Show costs in , Call cost limit , see Call duration and Call costs (network se rvice) . Note: If you select No log , all the log contents, recent calls register , and messaging delivery reports are permanently deleted. V oice mail Calling your voice mail box (network service) T o call your voice mailbox, press and hold in the standby mode. If the game deck asks for the voice mailbox nu mber (obtained from your service provider), key it in, and press OK . See Call forwarding (network service) . Each phone line may have its own voice mailbox number .
160 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Bluetooth connection Note: The Nokia N-Gage game deck is compliant with and adopts Bluetooth Specifica tion 1.1. However , interoperability between the game deck and other products wi th Bluetooth wireless technology is not guaranteed and depends on compatibility . For more information on the compatibility between Bluetoot h devices, please review each product's user information or check with the manufacturer . Bluetooth connectivity in the Nokia N-Ga ge QD can be used in device-to-PC connectivity (dial-up or data synchron ization) and object exchange between two enabled terminals (business cards, images, and game playing). Bluetooth profiles supported by the Nokia N-Gage QD are: ⢠generic access profile ⢠serial port profile ⢠dial-up networking profile ⢠fax profile ⢠generic object exchange profile ⢠object push profile ⢠file transfer profile ⢠hands-free profile
161 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Bluetooth connectivity enables cost-free wireless connections for playing games, sending images, texts, or to connect wire lessly to other compatible devices with Bluetooth technology . Since Bluetooth devices communicate using radio waves, your game deck, and the other Bluetooth device do not need to be in direct line-of-sight. The two devices only need to be within a radius of 32 feet (1 0 meters), although the connection can be subject to interference fro m obstructions such as walls or from other electronic devices. Using Bluetooth connectivity consumes t he battery and the game deck operating time will be re duced. Take this into account when performing other operations with your game deck. There may be restrictions on using Bluetooth devices. Check with your local authorities. Press , and select Tools > Bluetooth . Y ou are asked to give a name to you device. Bluetooth settings Bluetooth â Select On or Off . My device's visibilit y â Select Shown to all so your game deck can be found by other Bluetooth devices, or Hidden so your game deck cannot be found by other devices. My deviceâÂÂs name â Define a name for your game deck.
162 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. When searching for devi ces, some devices may show only the unique addresses (device addresse s). To find out what the unique address of your game deck is, enter *#2820# in the standby mode. After you have activated Bluetooth connectivity and changed My device's visibility to Sho wn to all , your game deck and this na me can be seen by other Bluetooth device users. Sending data using Bluetooth connectivity There can be only one active Bluetooth connection at a t ime. Icons for different Bluetoot h connectivity dev ices are: Computer Phone Headset Carkit Other Unknown 1 Open an application where the item you wish to send is stored. For example, to send an image to another compatible device, open the Images application. 2 Select the item (for example, an image), and Options > Send > Via Bluetooth.
163 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. T o send text using Bluetooth connecti vity (instead of text messages), select Notes , write the text, and select Options > Send > via Bluetooth . The game deck starts to search for devices within range. Enabled devices that are within range start to appear on the display one by one. Y ou can see a device icon, the deviceâ s name, the device type, or a short name. 3 T o interrupt the search, press Stop . Th e device list freez es, and you can start to form a c onnection to one of the devices already found. If you have searched for Bluetooth co nnectivity devices earlier , a list of the devices that were fo un d previously is shown first. To start a new search, select More devices . If you switch off the game deck, the list is cleared. 4 Scroll to the device with which you want to connect, and press Sel ect . 5 P airing (if not required by th e other device, see s tep 6). P airing means authentication. The us ers of the enabled devices should agree together what the passcode is and use the same passcode for both devices in order to pair them. Device s that do not have a user interface have a factory set passcode. ⢠If the other device requires pairing before data can be transmitted, a tone sounds, and you are asked to enter a passcode. ⢠Create your own passcode (1âÂÂ16 numer ic characters), and agree with the owner of the other Bluetooth devi ce to us e th e same code. A passcode is used only once.
164 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. ⢠After pairing, the device is saved to the paired devices view . 6 When the connection has been established, Sending data is shown. If sending fails, the message or data will be delete d. The Drafts folder in Messaging does not store messages sent using Bluetooth connectivity . Check the status of the Bluetoot h connection by looking for these indicators: When is shown in the standby mode, Bluetooth connectivity is active. When is blinking, your game deck is trying to connect to the other device. When is shown continuously , the Bluetooth connection is act ive. P airing devices T o define a short name (nickname or alias) t o help you recognize a certain device during device search or when a device is requesting a connection, scroll to the device, and select Options > Assign short name in the paired devices view . P aired devices are ea sier to recogn ize because, th ey are indicated by in the device search. In the Bluetooth main view , press to open a list of paired devices ( ). ⢠T o pair with a device, select Options > New paired device . The game deck starts a device search. Scr oll to the device, and press Se lec t . Exchange passcodes, see step 5 (P airing).
165 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. ⢠T o cancel a pairing, scr oll to the device, and select Options > Delete . If you want to cancel all pairings, select Options > Delete all . Note: If you are currently connected to a device and delete the pairing with that device, pairing is removed immediately b ut the connection will remain active. ⢠T o set a device to be authorized or unauthorized, scroll to a device, and select Options > Set as authorized . Connections between your game deck and this device can be made wi thout your knowledge. No separate acceptance or authorization is needed. Use this status for your own devices, for example, your PC or devi ces that belong to someone you trust. The icon is added next to authorized devices in the P aired devices view . Set as unauthorized requires that connection requests from this device must be accepted se parately every time. Receiving data using Bluetooth connectivity When you receive data using Bluetooth connectivity , a tone sounds, and you are asked if you want to accept the me ssage. If you accept, is shown, and the item is placed in the Inbox folder in Messaging . Messages sent through Bluetooth connectivity are indicated by . See Inbox . Disconnecting Bluetooth A Bluetooth connection is disconnected automatically after sending or receiving data.
166 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Connecting your game deck to a computer For further information on how to insta ll the PC Suite for Nokia N-Gage, make a connection to a compatible computer us ing Bluetooth connectivity , and use the PC Suite for Nokia N-Gage QD, see the Installation G uide for PC Sui te on the CD-RO M in the âÂÂInsta llâ section and the PC suite Help . Using the CD-ROM The CD-ROM launches itself after you have inserted it into the CD-ROM drive of your compatible PC. If not, proc eed as follows: Open Windows Explorer , right-click the CD-ROM drive, and select Autorun. Memory Many features of the game deck co nsume memory as they store data. These features include games, conta cts , messages, images and r inging tones, calendar and to-do notes, documents, and downloaded applications. The amount of free memory ava ilable depends on how much data is already saved on the game deck memory . Y ou can use a memory card as extra storage space. Memory cards are rewritable, so you can delete and save data on a memory card. If the game deck memory is getting low , you can mov e different files to a memory card. Y ou canno t save an y data on a game card as they are read-only . Game cards contain data that cannot be overwritten.
167 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. View memory consumption T o view what kind of data you have in the game deck and how much memory the different data groups consume, select T ool s > Manager > Options > Device memory . Select Fr ee me mory to view the amount of free memory in the game deck. If you have a memory card inserted in the game deck, select Tools > Memory > Options > Memory details to view the memory consumption of different data groups and the amount of free memory on the card. Free memory Installing many games or saving many images can use a large amount of the available memory . The game deck notifies you when memory is getting low . In this case, additional data may not be saved until you delete some of the games, images, or other entries to free memory . T o avoid memory getting low , you should regularly delete or tr ansfer data to a memory card. Y ou can delete contact information, ca lendar notes, call timers, call cost timers, game scores, or an y other data. Select the respective application to remove the data.
168 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Other items that you can delete to free memory are as follows: ⢠Installed applications that are no longer required ⢠Messages from the inbox, drafts, and sent folders in Messaging ⢠Retrieved e -mail messages from the game deck memory ⢠Saved game data in Game manager ⢠Saved XHTML or WML pages and images in Images Memory card tool Options in Memory card are: Backup device mem. , Format mem. card , Memory card name , Set password , Memory details , Help , and Exit . The memory card tool is valid only fo r the MMC cards (not game cards). Press , and select To ol s > M e mo r y . Y ou can use a memory card to stor e your downloaded games and applications. Y ou can also back up information from your game deck memory , and restor e the information to the game deck later . See Inserting a game or memory card , and Ejecting a memory card . W arning: Ke ep all memory cards out of the reach of small children. Important: Do not remove the card in the middle of an operation when the indicator is blinking. Before inserting or removing a memory card, save all unsaved data. All applications are closed when inserting or removing the card. Removing the card in the middle of an operation may cau se data loss, or the card may become corrupted.
169 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Note: Use only compatible multimedia cards (MMC) with this device. Other memory cards, such as secure digital (SD) cards, do not fit in the MMC card slot and are not compat ible with this device. Using an incompatible memory card may damage the memory card as well as the device, and data stored on the incompatible card may be corrupted. Format a memory card When a memory card is formatted, all data on the card is permanently lost. Some memory cards are su pplied pref ormatted, while others require formatting. Consult your retailer to find out if you must format the memory card before you can use it. Select Options > Format mem. card > Ye s to confirm. When formatting is complete, key a name for th e memory card, and press OK . T o rename a memory card, select Options > Memory card name in Memory card . Back up and restore information on a memory card ⢠T o backup information from your game deck memory to a memory card, select Options > Backup device mem. ⢠T o restore information from the memory card to the game deck memory , select Options > Res tor e from card .
170 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Lock the memory card Y ou can set a password to protect your memory card against unauthorized use. The password is stored in your game deck, and you do not have to enter it again while you are using the memory ca rd on the same game deck. If you want to use the memory card on another game deck, you will be asked for the password. Select Options > Set password, Change password , or Remove password . For every option you are asked to enter and confirm your password (up to 8 characters). Important: Once the password is removed, the memory card is unlocked and can be used on anot her game deck without a password. Unlocking a memory card If you insert another password protecte d memor y card in your game deck, you will be prompted to enter the password of the card. T o unlock the card, select Options > Unlock m emory card .
171 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 1-touch dialing 1-touch dialing is a quick way to call frequently called numbers. Y ou can assign 1-touch dialing keys to eight phone numbers. 1 Press , select T ools > 1-touch , and assign a phone number to one of the 1-touch dialing keys ( â ). Number 1 is reserved for the voice mailbox. 2 Select T ools > Settings > Call , and set 1-touch dialing to On . 3 T o call in the standby mode, press and hold the 1-touch dialing key until the call is started. SIM directory Options in the SIM directory are Open , Call, New SIM contact, Edit , Delete , Copy to Contacts , My numbers , SIM details , Help , and Exit . For availability , rates, and information on using SIM services, contact your SIM card vendor , for example, your ne twork operator , or service provider . Press , and select T o ols > SIM dir ectory to see the names an d numbers stored on the SIM card. In SIM directory you can add, edit , or copy numbers to Contacts , and you can make calls. T o access additional services that yo ur SIM card may provide, press , and select Tools . Se e also: Copying contacts between the SIM card and device memory , Confirm SIM services (netwo rk service) , Memory card tool , and Viewing messages on a SIM card .
172 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Fixed dial Options in Fixed dialing are Open , Call , New contact, Edit, Delete , Add to Contacts , Add from Contacts , Help , and Exit . Y ou can restrict outgoing calls to se lected phone numbers if supported by your SIM card. Y ou need the PIN2 code for this function. When this function is active, you can only call those phone numbers that are included in the fixed dialing list or begin with the same digits as a phone number on the list. Note: When Fixed Dialing is set on, calls may be possible to certain emergency numbers in some ne tworks (for example, 9 1 1). T o view the list of fixed dialin g numbers, press , and select T ools > Fixed dialing . To add new numbers to the fixed dialing list, select Options > New contact or Add from Contacts .
173 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Call restrictions (network service) Call restrictions allows you to restrict the making and receiving of calls with your game deck. For this function, you need the restriction password from your service provider . Call restriction affects all calls, including data calls. Y ou cannot have restriction of incoming calls and call forwarding or have fixed dialing active at the same time. See Call forwarding (network service) Fixed dial . ⢠Scroll to one of the restriction options, and select Options > Activate to request the network to se t call restriction on, Cancel to set the selected call restriction off, or Check status to chec k if the calls are restricted or not. ⢠Select Options > Edit restric tions passw . to change the restriction password. ⢠Select Options > Cancel all re strictions to cancel all active call restrictions. Note: When calls are restricted, ca lls may be possible to certain emergency numbers in some ne tworks (for example, 9 1 1).
174 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Reference Information Battery information Charging and disch arging Y our game deck is po wered by a rechargeable bat tery . The full performance of a new battery is achieved only af ter two or three complete charge and dis charge cycles. T he battery can be charged and discharged hundre ds of times but it will eventually wear out. When the talk and standby times are noticeably sh orter th an normal, buy a new battery . Use only Nokia approved batteri es, an d recharge your battery only with Nokia approved chargers designated for this g ame deck. Unplug the charger from the electrical plug an d the game deck when not in use . Do not leave the battery connected to a charger . Ov ercharging may shorten its lifetime . If left unused, a fully charged battery will lose its charge over time. Temperature e xtremes can affect the ability of your battery to charge. Use the battery only for its in tended purpose. Never use any charger or battery that is damaged. Do not sh ort-circu it the battery . Accidental short-circuiting can occu r when a metallic object such as a coin, clip, or pen causes direct connection of the positive ( ) and negative (-) terminals of the battery . (These look like metal strips on the battery .) This might happen, for example, when you carry a spare battery in your pocket or purse. Short-circuiting the terminals may dama ge the battery or the connecting object. Leaving the battery in hot or cold places, such as in a closed car in summer or winter conditions, will reduce the capacity and lifet ime of the battery . Always try to keep the battery between 59ðF and 77ðF (15ð C and 25ðC). A game deck with a hot or col d battery may not work temporarily , even when the battery i s fully charged. Battery performance is particularly limited in temperatures well below freezing.
175 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Do not dispo se of batteries in a fire ! Dispose of bat teries according to local regulations. Please recycle when possible. Do not dispose as household waste. Enhancements A few practical rules about a ccessories and enhance ments: ⢠Keep all accessories and enhancements out of the reach of small children. ⢠When you disconnect the power cord of a ny accessory or enhancement, grasp and pull the pl ug, not the cord. ⢠Check regularly that enhancements inst alled in a vehicle are mounted and are operating properly . ⢠Installation of any complex car enhanc ements must be made by qualified personnel only . If you want to enhance phone functionality , a range of enhancements are available for you. Y ou can select any of these item s to help accommodate your specific communication needs. For availability of these and other e nhancements, contact your dealer . Miscellaneous â¢N - G a g e g a m e c a r d s ⢠X-press-o n TM Cover (Black, Light Blue) ⢠Carry cases ⢠Phone adapter (HDA-9) Po w e r ⢠Extended 1 0 7 0 mAh Li-Ion Battery (BL-6C) ⢠Travel charger (ACP-12)
176 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. ⢠Mobile charger (LCH-12) Car ⢠Wireless car kit (CK-1W) ⢠Headrest handsfree (BH F-2) ⢠Hands free microphone (HFM-8) Audio ⢠Dual mono headset (HS-7) ⢠Wireless clip-on headset (HS-3W) â¢H e a d s e t k i t ( H D C - 5 ) ⢠Loopset (LPS- 3)
177 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. CARE AND MAINTENANCE Y our game deck is a product of superior design and craftsmanship and should be treated with care. The suggestions below wi ll help you protect yo ur warranty coverage and enjoy your device for many years. ⢠Keep the game deck and all its part s and enhancements out of the reach of small children. ⢠Keep the game deck dry . Precipitat ion, humi dity , and all types of liquids or moisture can contain minerals that will corrode electronic circuits. If yo ur device does get wet, remove the batte ry and allow th e devi ce to dry completely before replacing it. ⢠Do not us e or store the game deck in dusty , dirty areas. Its moving p arts and electronic components can be damaged. ⢠Do not st ore the game deck in hot areas. High temperatures can shorte n the life of electronic devices, damage batteries, and warp or melt certain plastics. ⢠Do not store the game deck in cold area s. When it warm s up (to its normal temperature), moisture can form inside which may damage electronic circuit boards. ⢠Do n ot attemp t to open the game d eck ot her than as instructed in this guide. ⢠Do not drop, knock, or shake the game deck. Rough ha ndling can break in tern al circuit boards and fine mechanics. ⢠Do not use harsh chemicals, cleaning solv ents , or strong detergents to clean the game deck. ⢠Do not paint the game deck. P aint can clog the moving parts and prevent proper operation. ⢠Use only the supplied or an approv ed replacement antenna. Unauthorized antennas, modifications, or attachment s could damage the game deck and may violate regulations governing radio devices.
178 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. All of the above sugg estions apply e qually to your device, battery , charger , or any enhanc ement. If any device is not w orking pr operly , take it to the nearest authorized service facility for service. Note : Before sending your device to a service facility , create a backup of data you want to keep such as contacts and calendar notes. ADDITIONAL SAFETY INFORMA TION Operating environment Remembe r to follow any special regulations in force in any area and always switch off your game deck when its use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger . Use the game deck only in i ts normal operat ing positions. To main tain compliance with radio frequency exposure guidelines only us e accessories approved by Nokia for use with this game deck. When the game deck is on and being worn on the body , always use an approved carrying case. Medical devices Operation of any radio transmitting e qui pment, including wireless devices, may interfere with the functionality of inadequa tely protected medical devices. Consul t a physician or the manufacturer of the medical device t o determine if they are adequately shielded from external RF energy or if you have any questions. Switch off your device in health care facilities when any regulation s po sted in these areas instruct you to do so. Hospitals or health care facilities may be using equipment that could be sensitive to external RF energy .
179 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. P ACEMAKERS P acemaker manufacturers recommend tha t a mi nimum separation of 6 in (15.3 cm) be maintained between a wireless device and a pacemaker to avoid potential interference with the pacemaker . These recommendati on s are consis tent with the i ndependent research by and recommendations of Wireless T echnology Research. To minimize the potential for interference, pe rsons with pacemakers should ⢠Always keep the game deck more than 6 in (15.3 cm) from their pacemaker when the game deck is sw itched on ⢠Not carry the game deck in a breast pocket ⢠Hold the game deck to the ear o pposite the pacemaker If you have an y reason to suspect tha t interfe rence is taking place, switch off your game deck immediately . HEARING AID Some digital wireless game de cks may interfere w ith some hearing aids. If interference occurs, consult your service provider . Ve h i c l e s RF signals may affect improperly instal led or inadequately shield ed elect ronic systems in motor vehicles such as electronic fuel in jection systems, electron ic antiskid (antilock) braking systems, electronic speed contro l systems, air bag systems. For mo re information, check wit h the manufacturer or its representative of your vehicle or any equipment that has been added. Only qualified personnel should service the game deck, or ins tall the game deck in a vehicle. Faulty installation or servic e may be dangerous and may invalidate any warranty that may apply to t he game d eck. Check regularly that all wireless device equipment in your vehicle is mounted and operating properly . Do not store or carry flammable liquids, gases, or explosi ve materi als in the same compartment as the game deck, its parts, or enhancements. For vehicles equipped w ith an air bag, remember that an air bags inflate with great force. Do no t place objects, including installed or portable
180 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. wireless equipment in the area over the air bag or in the air bag deployment area. If in-vehicle wireless equipment is improperly instal led and the air bag inflat es, serious injury could result. Safety information about video gam es About photosensi tive seizures A very small percentage o f people may expe rience a seizur e when exposed to certain visual images , including flashing li ghts or patterns that may appear in video games . Even people who have no history of seizur es or epilepsy may have an undiagnosed condition that can cause p hotosensitive epile ptic se izures while watching vi deo games. These seizures may have a variety of sy mptoms, including lightheadedness, altered vision, eye or face twitching, jerking or shaking of arms or legs, disorientation, confusion, or momentary loss of awareness. Seizures may also cause loss of consciousnes s or convulsions that can lead to injury from falling do wn or striking nearby objects. Immediately s top playing a nd consult a d o ctor if you experience an y of these symptoms. Adults who allow teenagers (o r childr en) to play the games should watch for or ask their children about these symptoms as they are more likely than adults to experience these seiz ures. The risk of photos ensitive epilep tic seizures may be reduced by playing in a well-lit room and by not play ing when you are drowsy or fatigued. If you or any of your relatives have a history of seizures or epilepsy , consult a doctor before playing. Play safely . Take a break from pl aying games at least every half hour . Stop playing immediately if you begin to feel tired of if you experience an unpleasant sensation or pain in your hands and/or arms. If the co ndit ion persists, consult a doct or . Use of vibration can aggravate injuries. Do not turn vibration on if you ha ve any ailment in the bones or joints of your fingers, hands, wri sts, or arms.
181 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. P otentially explosive environments Switch off your game deck when in any ar ea with a potentially explosive atmosphere and obey all signs and instructions. P otent ially explosive atmospheres include areas where you would normally be advised to turn off your vehicle engine. Sparks in such areas could cause an e xplosion or fire resultin g in bodily injury or even death. Switch off the game deck at refueli ng points such as near gas pump s at service stations . Observe restrictions on the use of radio equipment in fuel depots, storage, and distribution areas, chemical plants or whe re blasting opera tions are in progress. Areas with a potentially explosive atmosphere are often but not always clearly marked. They include below deck on boats, chemical transf er or st orage facilities, vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas (such as propane or butane), and areas where the air contains chemicals or particles such as grain, dust or metal powders. FCC regulations prohibit using your w ireles s game deck while in the air . The use of wireless telepho nes in an aircraft may be dangerous t o the operation of t he aircraft, disrupt the wireless telephone network, and may be illegal. Failure to observe these instructions may le ad to suspensio n or denial of telephone services to the offender , legal action, or both. EMERGENCY CALLS Important: Wireless phones, including th is device, operate usi ng radio signals, wireles s networks, landline networks, and user-p rogrammed functions. Be cause of this, conn ec tions in all conditions cannot be guaranteed. Y ou should never rely solely on any wireless phone for essent ial communications like medical emergencies.
182 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. To mak e an emergency call: 1 If the device is not on, switch it on . Check for adequate signal strength. Some networks may require that a valid SIM ca rd is properly inserted in the device. 2 Press the key as many times as need ed to clear the di splay and ready the device for calls. 3 Key in the official emergency number for your present location. Emergency numbers vary by location. 4 Press the key . If certain features are in us e, you may first need to turn those features off before you can make an emergency call. Consult th is gu ide or your service provider . When making an emergency call, give all the necessary in formation as accurately as possible. Y our wireless phone may be the only means of co mmunication at th e sc ene of an accident. Do not end the call until given permissi on to do so.
183 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. CERTIFICATION INFORMATION (SAR) THIS MODEL DEVICE MEETS THE GOVERNMENT'S REQUIREMENTS FOR EXPOSURE TO RADIO WAVES. Y our wireless devi ce is a radio transmitter an d receiver . It is designe d and manufactured not to exceed the emission limits for exposure to radio frequency (RF) energy set by the Federal Communications Commission of the U. S. Government. These limits are part of comprehensive guidelines and establish pe rmit ted levels of RF energy for the general population. The guidelines are based on standards that w ere developed by independent scientific organizations through p eriodic and thorough evaluation of scientific studies . The standards include a s ubstantial safety marg in designed to ass ure the safety of all persons, regardless of age and health. The exposure standard for wireless mobile devi ces employs a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate, or SA R. The SAR limit set by the FCC is 1.6W/ kg.* Tests for SAR are conducted using stan dard operating posit ions accepted by the FCC with the device transmitting at its highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands. Although the SAR is determ ined at t he highest certified powe r level, the actual SAR level of the device while operating can be well below the maximum value. This is because the device is designed to operate at multiple power levels so as to use only the power required to reach the network. In general, the closer you are to a wireless base st ation antenna, the low er the power outp ut. Before a device model is available for sale to the public, it must be tested and certified to the FCC that it does not exceed the lim it established by the government-adopted requirement for safe exposure. The tests are performed in positions and locations (for example, at the ear and w orn on the body) as required by the FCC for eac h model. The highest SAR value fo r this model device as reported t o the FCC when tested for use with GSM 850 at the ear is 0.60 W/kg, and wh e n worn on the body , as described in this user guide, is 1.03 W/kg. (Body-worn measurements differ among device models, depending upon available enhancements and FCC requirements).
184 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. While there may be differences between th e SAR levels of various devices and at various positions, they all meet the govern ment requirement. T he FCC has granted an Equipment Authorization for this model devi ce with all reported SAR levels evaluated as in compliance with the FC C RF exposure guidelines. SAR informat ion on this model device is on file with the FCC and can be found under the Display Grant sect ion of http://www .fcc.gov/oet/fccid after searching on FCC ID OW3RH-47 . For body worn operation, this device has been tested and meets the FCC RF exposure guidelines for use wi th a carry ca se, belt clip, or holder that contains no metal and that positions the handset a minimum of 7/8 inch (2.2 cm) from the body . Use of other carry cases, belt clips, or holders may not ensure compliance wi th FCC RF exposu r e guidelines. If you do not use a body-worn acce ssory and are not holding the device at the ear , po sition the handset a minimum of 7/8 inch (2.2 cm) from your body when the device is switched on. *In the United States and Cana da, the SAR limit for mobile devices used by t he public is 1.6 watts/kilogram (W /kg) averaged ov er one gram of tissue. The standard incorporates a substa ntial margin of safety to give additional protection for the public and to account for any variations in measur ements. SAR values may vary depending on national reporting requirements and the ne twork band. For SAR information in other regions please look under product information at www .nokia.com .
185 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. T ECHNICAL INFORMATION Feature Specification W eight 5.0 oz with BL-6C 1 0 70 mAh Li-lon battery Size 124 cc Frequency Range Lowband 824âÂÂ849 MHz (TX) 869âÂÂ894 MHz (RX) Highband 1850âÂÂ19 1 0 MHz (TX) 1930âÂÂ1990 MHz (RX) T ransmitter Output Po w e r 850 MHz Up to 2 W/33dBm 1900 MHz Up to 1 W /30 dBm Battery V oltage 3.7 V nominal Operating Temperature 14ðF to 13 1ðF -1 0ðC to 55ðC
186 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. T alk time Standby time Game time Up to 5 hours Up to 1 1 days Up to 1 0 hours Phone numbers Up to 500 contacts with multiple phone numbers and text entries per contact Feature Specification
187 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Nokia 90-Day Limited W arranty Nokia Inc. (âÂÂNokiaâÂÂ) warrants that this cellular device (âÂÂProductâÂÂ) is fr ee from defects in material and workmanship that result in Product failure during normal usage, according to the following terms and conditions: 1 The limited warrant y for the Product extends for 90 day s beginn ing on t h e date of the purchase of the Product . This 90-day period is extended by each whole day that the Product is ou t of your possession for repair under this warranty . 2 The limited warranty extends only to the original purchaser (âÂÂConsumerâÂÂ) o f the Product and is not assignable or transferable to any subsequent purchaser/end-user . 3 The limited warranty extends only to Consumers who purchase the Product in the United States of America. 4 During the limited warranty period, Nokia will repair , or replace, at Nokiaâ s sole option, any defective parts, or any parts that will not properly operate for their intended use with new or refurbished replacement items if such repair or replace ment is needed because of product malfunction or failure during normal usage. No charge will be made to the Consumer for any such parts. Nokia will also pay for the labor charges incurred by Nokia in repairing or replacing the defective parts. The limited warra nty does not cover defects in appearance, cosmetic, decorative or structural items, including framing,
188 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. and any non-operative parts. NokiaâÂÂs limit of liability under the limited warranty shall be the actual cash va lue of the Product at the time the Consumer returns the Product for repa ir , determined by the price paid by the Consumer for the Product less a reasonable amount for usage. Nokia shall not be liable for any other losse s or damages. These remedies are the ConsumerâÂÂs exclusive remedie s for breach of warranty . 5 Upon request from Nokia, the Consumer must prove the date of the original purchase of the Product by a dated bill of sale or dated itemized receipt. 6 The Consumer shall bear the cost of shipping the Product to Nokia in Melbourne, Florida. Nokia shall bear th e cost of shipping the Product back to the Consumer after the completi on of service under this limited warranty . 7 The Consumer shall have no covera ge or benefits under this limited warranty if any of the following conditions are applicable: a) The Product has been subjected to abnormal use, abnormal conditions, improper storage, exposure to moist ure or dampness, unauthorized modifications, unautho rized connections, unauthorized repair , misuse, negl ect, ab use, accident, alteration, improper installation, or other acts which are not the fault of Nokia, including damage caused by shipping. b) The Product has been damaged from ex ternal cau ses such as col lision with an object, or from fire, flooding, sand, dirt, windstorm, lightning, earthquake or damage from exposur e to weather conditions, an Act
189 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. of God, or battery leakage, theft, blown fuse, or improper use of any electrical source, damage caused by computer or internet viruses, bugs, worms, T rojan Horses, cance lbots or damage caused by the connection to other products not recommended for interconnection by Nokia. c) Nokia was not advised in writing by the Consumer of the alleged defect or malfunction of the Pr oduct within fourteen (14) days aft er the expiration of the applicable limited warranty period. d) The Product serial number plate or the accessory data code has been removed, defaced or altered. e) The defect or damage was caused by the defective function of the cellular system or by inadequate signal reception by the external antenna, or viruses or other soft ware problems introduced into the Product. 8 Nokia does not warrant uninterrupted or error-free operation of the Product. If a problem develops during the limited warranty period, the Consumer shall take the following step-by-step procedure: a) The Consumer shall return the Product to the place of purchase for repair or replacement processing.
190 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. b) If â aâ is not convenient because of distance (more than 50 miles) or for other good cause, the Consumer shall ship the Product prepaid and insured to: Nokia Inc., Attn: Repair Department 5650 Alliance Gateway Zone 4 Ft. W orth, TX. 76 177 c) The Consumer shall include a return address, daytime phone number and/or fax number , complete descr iption of the problem, proof of purchase and service agreement (if applicabl e). Expenses related to removing the Product from an installa tion are not covered under this limited warranty . d) The Consumer will be billed for any pa rts or labor charges not cover ed by this limited warranty . The Consumer will be responsible for any expenses related to reinst allation of the Product. e) Nokia will repair the Product under the limited warranty within 30 days after receipt of the Product. If Nokia cannot perform repairs covered under this limited warranty within 30 days, or after a reasonable number of attempts to repa ir the same defect, Nokia at its option, will provide a replacement Product or refund the purchase price of the Product less a reasonable amount for usage. In some states the Consumer may have the r ight to a loaner if the repair of the Product takes more than ten (1 0) days. Please contact the Customer Service Center at Nokia at the telephone number listed at
191 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. the end of this warranty if you ne ed a loaner and the repair of the Product has taken or is estimated to take more than ten (1 0) days. f) If the Product is returned during the limited warranty period, but the problem with the Product is not covered under the terms and conditions of this limited warranty , the Consumer will be notified and given an estimate of the charges th e Consumer must pay to have the Product repaired, with all shipping charges billed to the Consumer . If the estimate is refused, the Product will be returned freight collect. If the Product is returned after th e expiration of the limited warranty period, NokiaâÂÂs normal service policies shall a pply and the Consumer will be responsible for all shipping charges. 9 Y ou (the Consumer) understand th at the product m ay consist o f re f ur b is h ed equipment that contains used components, some of which have been reprocessed. The used components c omply with Product performance and reliability specifications. 10 ANY IMPLIED W ARRANTY OF MERCHA NT ABILITY , OR FITNESS FOR A P ARTICULAR PURPOSE OR USE, SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE DURA TION OF THE FOREGOING LIMITED WRITTE N WA R R AN T Y . OT H ER WI S E , T H E FOREGOING LIMITED WA RRANTY IS THE CONSUMERâÂÂS SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMED Y AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTH ER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. NOKIA SHA LL NO T BE LIABLE FOR SPECIAL, INCIDENT AL, PUNITIVE OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, INCLUDING BUT NO T LIMITED TO LOSS OF ANTICI PA TED BENEFITS OR PROFITS, LOSS OF SA VINGS OR REVENUE, LOSS OF DA TA , PUNITIVE DAMAGES, LOSS O F USE
192 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. OF THE PRODUCT OR ANY ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT , COST OF CAPITAL, COST OF ANY SUBSTITUTE EQUIPMENT OR FACILITIES, DOW NTIME, THE CLAIMS OF ANY THIRD PARTIES, IN CLUDING CUST OMERS, AND INJURY TO PR O P E R T Y , R E S ULT I N G F R O M THE PURCHASE OR USE OF THE PRODUCT OR ARISING FR OM BREACH OF THE W ARRANTY , BREACH OF CONTRACT , NEGLIGENCE, STRICT TORT , OR ANY OTHER LEGAL OR EQUITABLE THEORY , EVEN IF NOKIA KNE W OF THE LIKELIHOOD OF SUCH DAMAGES. NOKIA SHALL NO T BE LIABLE FOR DELAY I N RENDERING SERVICE UNDER THE LIMITED W ARRAN TY , OR LOSS OF USE DURING THE PERIOD THA T THE PRODUC T IS BEING REPAIRED. 11 Some states do not allow limitation of how long an implied warranty lasts, so the 90 day warranty limitation may not apply to you (the Consumer). Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental and consequential damages, so certain of the above limitations or exclusions may not apply to you (the Consumer). This limited warranty gives the Consumer specific legal righ ts and the Consumer may also have other rights which vary from state to state. 12 Nokia neither assumes nor authorizes any authorized service center or any other person or entity to assume for it any other obligation or liability beyond that which is expressly pr ovided for in this limited warranty including the provider or seller of any extended warranty or service agreement. 13 This is the entire warranty between Nokia and the Consumer , and supersedes all prior and contem poraneous agr eements or understandin gs,
193 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. oral or written, relating to the Product, and no representation, promise or condition not contained here in shall modify these terms. 14 This limited warranty allocates the risk of failure of the Product bet ween the Consumer and Nokia. The allocation is recognized by the Consumer and is reflected in the purchase price. 15 Any action or lawsuit for breach of warranty must be commenced within eighteen (18) months followin g purchase of the Product. 16 Questions concerning this limited warranty may be directed to: Nokia Inc. Attn: Customer Service 7725 W oodland Center Blvd., Ste. 150 T ampa, FL 336 14 T elephone: 1-888-NOKIA-2U (1-888-665-4228) Fa csimile: (8 13) 249-96 19 TTY/TDD Users Only: 1-800- 24-NOKIA (1-800- 246-6542)
194 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Appendix A Message from the CTIA (Cellular T elecommunications & Internet Association) to all users of mobile phones. é 2001 Cellular T elecommuni cations & Internet Association . All Rights R eserv ed.1250 Connect icut A v enue, NW S uite 800, W ashington, DC 20036. Phone: (202) 785-0 081
195 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Saf ety is the most important call you will ever make . A Guide to Safe and Re sponsible Wireless Phone Use T ens of millions of people in the U .S . toda y tak e ad v antage of the unique combination of con v enience, safety and v alue deliv ered b y the wireless telephone. Quite simply , the wir eless phone giv es people the po w erful ability to communicate b y v oice--almost anyw her e, anytime--with the boss, with a c lient, with the kids, with emergency personnel or ev en with the police. Each y ear , Americans mak e billions of calls fr om their wir eless phones, and th e numbers ar e rapidly gr o wing. But an impor tant r esponsib ility accompanies those benefits , one that ev ery wireless phone user must u phold. When dri ving a car , driving is y our first r esponsibility . A wir eless phone can be an in v alua ble tool, b ut good judgment must be e xer cised at all times w hile driving a motor v ehicle--w hether on the phone or not. T he basic lessons ar e ones w e all learned as teenagers. Dri ving requir es aler tness, caution and cour tesy . It r equir es a hea vy dose of basic common sense---keep y our head up , keep y our ey es on the road, c h eck y our mirrors fr equently and w atch out f or other dri v ers. It r equires obeying all tr aff i c signs and signals and sta ying within the speed limit. It means using seatbelts and r equiring other passengers to do the same. But with wir eless phone use, dri ving safely means a little mor e. This br ochur e is a call to wir eless phone users ev er yw here to m ake safety their f irst priority w hen behind the w heel of a car . W ireless telecomm unications is k eeping us in touch, simplifying our li v es, pr otecting us in emer gencies and pro viding opportunities to help others in need. Wh en it comes to the use of wir eless phones, saf ety is your most important call . Wireless Phone "Safety Tip s" Belo w ar e safety tips to f ollo w w hile driving and using a wir eless phone w hich should be easy to r emember . 1 Get to kno w y our wireless phone and its featur es such as speed dial and r edial. Car efully r ead y our instruction manual and learn to tak e ad v antage of v alua ble featur es most phones off er , includ ing automatic r edial and memor y . Also , w ork to
196 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. memorize the phone k eypad so y ou can use the speed dial function without taking y our attention off the r oad. 2 Wh en a v ailab le, use a hands free de vice. A n umber of hands fr ee wireless ph one accessories ar e r eadily a v ailab le toda y . W hether y ou choose an installed mounted device f o r y our wir eless phone or a speak er phone accessor y , tak e ad v antage of these devices if a v ailab le to y ou. 3 P osition y our wireless phone within easy r each. Mak e sure y ou place y our wir eless phone within easy r each a nd w here y ou can gra b it without rem o ving y our ey es from the r oad. If y ou get an incoming call at an incon v enient time, if possibl e, let y our v oice mail answ er it for y ou. 4 Suspend con v ersations during hazar dous dri ving conditions or situations . Let the person y ou are speaking with kno w y ou are dri ving; if necessary , suspend the call in hea vy traff ic or hazardous w eather conditions . Rain, sleet, sno w and ice can be hazar dous, b ut so is hea vy traf fic . As a dri v er , y our first r esponsibility is to pa y attention to the road. 5 Do not tak e notes or look up phone n umbers w hile dri ving. If y ou are r eading an addr ess book or business card, or writing a "to do" list w hile driving a car , y ou ar e not w atching w here y ou are going . Itâ s common sense. Donâ t get caught in a dangero us situation because y ou are r eading or writing a nd not pa ying attention to the r oad or nearb y v ehicles . 6 Dial sensib ly and assess the traf fic; if possib le, place calls w hen y ou are not mo ving or bef or e pulling into traf fi c. T r y to plan y our calls bef ore y ou begin y our trip or attempt to coincide y our calls with times y o u ma y be stopped at a stop sign, r ed light or otherwise stationary . But if y o u need to dial w hile driving, f ollo w this simple ti p- -dial only a fe w numbers , chec k the road and y our mirrors , then contin ue. 7 Do not engage in stressful or emotional c on v ersations that ma y be distracting. Str essful or emotional con v ersations and driving do not mix--they a re distr acting and ev en dangerous w hen y ou are behind the w heel of a car . Mak e people y ou ar e talking with a w are y ou ar e driving a nd if necessary , suspend con v ersations w hich ha v e the potential to di v er t y our attention from the r oad. 8 Use y our wireless phone to call f or help . Y our wir eless phone is one of the gr eatest tools y ou can o wn to protect y ourself and y our family in dang er ous situations--with y our phone at y our side, help is only three n umbers a w a y . Dial 9-1-1 or other local
197 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. emer genc y nu mber in the case of f ire, tr affic ac cident, road hazar d or medical emer genc y . R emember , it is a fr ee call on y our wir eless phone! 9 Use y our wireless phone to help others in emergencies . Y our wireless phone pr o vides y ou a perfect opportunity to be a "Good Samaritan" in y our community . If y ou see an auto accident, crime in pr ogress or other serious em ergency w here liv es are in danger , call 9-1-1 or other local emer g ency number , as y ou w ould w ant others to do fo r yo u . 10 Call r oadside assistance or a special wir eless non-emer g ency assistance n umber w hen necessar y . Cer tain situations y ou encounter w hile dri ving ma y requir e attention, b ut are not ur g ent enough to merit a call f or emergency services . But y ou still can use y our wireless phone to lend a hand. If y ou see a brok en-do wn v ehicle posing no serio us hazar d, a brok en traf f ic signal, a minor traf fic acciden t w her e no one appears injur ed or a v ehicle y ou kno w to be stolen, call road side assistance or other special non-emer g ency wireless n umber . Car eless, distr acted indiv iduals and people dri ving irresponsib ly rep resent a h azard to ev er y one on the roa d. Since 1984, the Cellular T elecommunications Industry Association and the wir eless industr y ha v e conducted educational outr each to inf orm wir eless phone users of their r esponsibilities as safe dri v ers and good citizens . As w e appr oach a ne w centur y , more and more o f us will tak e ad v antage of the benef its of wir eless telephones. And , as w e tak e to the roads , w e all ha v e a respo nsibility to driv e safely . T he wireless industry r eminds you to use y our phone saf el y when drivin g . F or more inf or mation, please call 1-888-901-SAFE. F or updates: http://www .w o w-com.com/consumer/issues/dri ving/ar ticles .cfm?ID=85 é 2001 Cellular T elecommunications & Internet Association. All Rights R eserv ed.1250 Connecticut A v enue, NW Su ite 800, W ashington, DC 20036. Phone: (202) 785-0 081
198 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Appendix B Message from the FDA (U.S. Food and Drug Administration) to all users of mobile phones. July 18, 2001 .......... For upd ates: http: //www .fda.g ov/cdrh/phones
199 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Consumer Update on Wireless Phones U.S. Food and Drug Administration 1. Do wireless ph ones pose a he alth hazard? The available sci entific evidence does not show that any health problems are associated with using wireless phones. There is no proof, however , that wireless phones are absol u tely safe. Wi reless phones emit low levels of radio frequency energy (RF) in the microwave range while being used. They also emit very low levels of RF whe n in the stand-by mode. Wh ereas high levels of RF can produce health effects (by heating tissue), exposure to low lev el RF that does not produce heating effects causes no known adverse health effects. Many studies of lo w level RF expo sures have not found an y biological effects. Some studies have suggested that so me biol ogical effect s may occur , but such finding s have not been confirmed by additi onal research. In some cases, oth er researchers have had difficulty in reproducing tho se studies, or in determin ing the reasons for inconsistent results. 2. What is FDA's role concern ing the safety of wireless phones? Under the law , FDA does no t review the safety of radiation-emi tting consumer p roducts such as wireless phones before t hey can be sold, as it d oes with new d rugs or medical d evices. However , the agency has author ity to take acti o n if wireless pho nes are shown to emit radio frequency energy (RF) at a level that i s hazardous to th e user . In su ch a case, FDA cou ld require the manufact urers of wireless phones to notify us ers of the health hazard and to repair , replace or re call the phones so th at the hazard no longer exists . Although the exi sting scientifi c data do not justif y FDA regul atory actions, FDA h as urged the wireless phone industry to take a n umber of steps, including th e following: ⢠Support needed research into possi ble biological ef fects of RF of the type emi tted by wireless phones; ⢠Design wireless phones in a way that minimizes a ny RF exposure to t he user that is not necessary for device function; and ⢠Cooperate in providing users of wireless phones with the best possible inform ation on possi ble effects of wireless phone use on hu man health. FDA belongs to an interagen cy working group of th e federal agencies that have responsib ility for dif ferent aspects of RF safety to ensu re coordinated effort s at the federal level. The following agencies belong to this wo rking group: ⢠National I nstitute f or Occ upational Safet y and Health ⢠Environmental Protecti on Agency ⢠Federal Comm unications Comm ission ⢠Occupatio nal Safety and Health Administr ation
200 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. ⢠National T ele communic ations an d Info rmatio n Admi nistra tion The National I nstitutes of Health p articipate s in some interagency worki ng gr oup activi ties, as well. FDA shares regulatory respon si bili ties for wirel ess phones w ith the Federal Comm unications Commissio n (FCC) . All phone s that are s old in the United States must comply w ith FCC safety guidelines that limit RF ex posure. FCC reli es on FDA an d other health agencies for safety questions about wireless phones . FCC also regu lates the base station s that th e wireless ph one networks rely upon. While these base st ations operate at higher powe r than do the wi reless phones t hemselves, th e RF exposures that people g et from these base station s are typically t housands of tim es lower than those they can g et from wireless ph ones. Base stat ions are thus not the subject of the safet y questio ns discussed in this document. 3. What kinds of ph ones are the subject o f this up date? The term wireless phone refers he re to hand-held wirele ss phones with built-in antenn as, often cal led cell mobile or PCS p hones. These types of wirele ss pho nes can expose the us er to measurable radio frequency energy (RF) because of the short distan ce between the phone and the user â s head. Th ese RF exposures are limit ed by Federal Communications C omm ission s afety guidelines that were developed with the ad vice of FDA and other federal health a nd s afety agenci es. When the phone is l ocated at greater distances from the user , the exposure to RF is drastically lo wer becaus e a person's RF exposure decreases r apidly with incre asing distance from the so urce. The so-called cordle ss ph ones; which have a base unit connected to t h e telephone wiring in a house, typicall y operate at far lower po wer levels, and thus produce RF exposures far below the FCC safety limit s. 4. What are the results of the research done already? The research done thus far has produced confli cting results , and many stud ies have suffered from fl aws in their r esearch me thods. Anima l experi ments invest igating the effects of radio frequency energy (RF) exposures characteristic of wirele ss phones have yiel de d conflictin g results t hat often cannot be repeated in other laboratories. A few anim al studies , however , h ave suggested th at low levels of RF could accelera te the development of cancer in laborat ory anim als. Howev er , many of the studies th at showed increased tumor developmen t used an imals t h at had been gen etically engineered or treated with cancer -causing chemicals so as to be pre-disp osed to develop cancer in the absence of RF exposure. Other studies expo sed the animals to RF for up to 22 hou rs per day . These cond itions are not similar to the condi tions under wh ich peo ple use wirele ss phones, so we do nâÂÂt know with certainty what the results of such st udies mean for human health. Three large epidemiology studies have been pu blished since December 2 000. Between them, the studies investigat ed any pos sible associ ation betw een th e use of wireless phon es and primary brain cancer , g lioma, mening ioma, or acoustic neuroma, tum o rs of the brain or saliva ry gl and, leukem ia, or
201 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. other cancers. None of the studies demonstrated the exis tence of any har mful health ef fects from wireless phone RF expo sures. Howe v er , none of t he studies can answer q uestions about l ong-term exposures, since the average period of ph one use in thes e studies was aroun d three years. 5.What research is needed to decide whether RF exp osure from wireless phones poses a h ealth risk? A combin ation of la boratory stu dies and epidemiol ogi cal studies of people act ually using wirel ess phones would provide s ome of the data that are ne eded. Lifet ime anim al e xposure s tudies could be complete d in a few years. How ever , very la rge numbers of animals woul d be need ed to provide reliable proof of a cancer promoting effect if one exists. Ep idemiological studies can provide data that is directly applicab le to human popu lations, but 1 0 or more years follow-up may be needed to provide answers about some health ef fects, such as cancer . Thi s is because the interval between the ti me of exposure to a cancer-causing agent and the tim e tumors dev elop - if they do - may be many , many years. T he inte rpretatio n of e pidemio logical studies is ham pered by difficulties in me asuring actual RF exposure durin g day-to-day us e of wireless phones. Man y factors af fect this measurement, such as the angle at which the phone is held, or which m odel of phone i s used. 6.What is FDA do ing to f ind out mo re about th e possible health effects of wireless phone RF? FDA is working with the U.S. National T oxicology Program and with grou ps of investigato rs around the world to en sure that high priority an imal stud ies are conducted t o address important questio ns about the effects of exposure to radio frequency energy (RF). FDA has been a leading pa rticipant in the W orld Health Organization International E lectromagnetic Fields (EMF) Project since its inception in 1996. An influenti al result of this wo rk has been the development of a detailed agenda of research needs that has driven the est ablishment of new research programs around the world. The Project h as also he lped develop a series of p ublic information documents on EMF is sues. FDA and the Cellular T elecommunications & Internet Association (CTIA) have a formal Cooperative Research and Development Agreement (CRADA) to do research on wireless phone safety . FDA provides the scientific ove rsight, o btaining input from ex perts in government, ind ustry , and academic organizations. CTIA-funded research is conducted t hrough contracts to independent inv estigators. Th e initial research will include both laboratory studies and studies o f wireless phone users. The CRADA will also include a broad ass essment of additio nal research needs in the context of the latest research developments around the world. 7. How can I find out how much radio frequency energy exposu re I can get by using my wireless phone?
202 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. All phones so ld in the U nited States m ust comp ly with Federal Comm unication s Commission (FCC ) guidelines that limit radio frequency energy (RF) exposures. FCC established these gui delines in consultation with FDA and the other federal health and s afety agenci es. The FC C limit for R F exposure from wirele ss telephone s is set at a Spec ific Absorp tion Rate (S AR) of 1.6 watts per kilogram (1.6 W/ kg). The FC C limit is consiste nt with the safety st andards developed by the In stitute of Electrical and Electronic Engineering (IEEE) and the Nati onal Council on Radiatio n Protection and Measurement. The exposure limit take s into c onsideration the bodyâ s ability to remove heat from the tissu es that absorb energy from th e wireless phone and is set well bel ow levels known to have effects. Manufacturers of wireless phones must report the RF exposure level for each model of phone to the FCC. The FC C website (http://www .fcc.go v/oet/rfs afety) gives direction s for locating the FCC identification nu mber on your p hone so you can fi nd your phoneâ s RF exposur e level i n the onli ne listing. 8. What has FDA done to measu re the radio frequ ency energy comi ng from wireless phones? The Institute of Electrical and Electronic Eng in eers (IEEE) is developing a technical standard for measuring the radio frequen cy energy (RF) exposure from wireless ph ones and other wireless h andsets with the participat ion and leadership of FDA scie ntists and engineers. The s tandard, Recommended Practice for Determining the Spatia l-Peak Specific Absorpt ion Rate (SAR) in the Hu man Body Due to W i reless Commun ications De vices: Experim ental T echni ques, sets forth th e first consisten t test methodology for measuring the rate at which RF is de po sited in the heads of wireless phone users. The test method us es a tissue-sim ulating mod el of the hum an head. Standardized SAR test m ethodology i s expected to greatly improve the consist ency of meas urements made at di fferent laboratories on the same phone. SAR is th e measurement of the amount of energy absorbed in tissue, either by the whole body or a small part of th e body . It is measu red in watts/kg ( or milliwa tts/g) of mat ter . This measureme nt is used to dete rmine whether a wire less phone com plies with safet y guidelines. 9. What steps can I t ake to redu ce my exposure to radio frequency energ y from my wireless ph one? If there is a risk from these pr oducts--and at this point we do not know that there is--it is probably very small. But if you are concerned abou t avoiding even potentia l risks, you can tak e a few simple step s to minimize yo ur exposure to radio frequency energy (RF). Since time is a k ey factor in how m uch exposure a person receives, redu cing the amoun t of time spent u sing a wireless phone will reduce R F exposure. If you must conduct extend ed conversatio ns by wire less phon e every day , you could p lace more distance between your body and the source of th e RF , since the exposure level drops of f dramatically with distance. For exam ple, you could us e a headset and carry the wi reless phone aw ay from your b ody or use a wireless phone connected t o a remote antenna.
203 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Again, the scientifi c data do not d emonstrate that wireless ph ones are harmful. But if you are concerned about the RF expos ure from thes e products, you can use measures like those d escribed above to reduce your RF exposure from wirel ess phone use. 10. What about children using wireless phones ? The scientific evidence does not sh ow a danger to users of wirel ess phones, including children and teenagers. If you want to take st eps to low er exposu re to radi o frequency energy (RF), the measures described above would apply to children and teenag ers using wireless ph ones. Reducing th e time of wireless phone use and i ncreasing the dist ance betw een the user and the RF source will reduce RF exposure.So me groups sponso red by ot her national govern ment s have advised that children be discouraged from usin g wireless phones at all. For exampl e, the government in the United Kingdom distributed leaflets co ntaining such a recommendati on in December 2000. They noted that no eviden ce exists that using a wireless phone causes b rain tumo rs or other ill effects. Their recommendation to limit wireless phone use by childr en was strictly precautionary; it was not based on scientific evidence that an y health hazard exists. 1 1. What about wireless phone in terference with medical eq uipment? Radio frequency energy (RF) from wireless phones can in te ract with s ome elec tronic de vices. For this reason, FDA helped develop a deta iled test method to m easure elec trom agnetic interference (EMI) of implanted cardiac p acemakers and defibrillators from wi reless telepho nes. This test method is now part of a standard sponsored by the Associat ion for th e Adv ancem ent of Medi cal inst rument ation (AAMI) . The final draft, a joint effort by FDA, medical devi ce manufactur ers, and many other groups, was completed in late 2000. This standard will allow m a nufacturers to en sure that cardiac pacemakers and defibrillators are safe from wire less phone EM I. FDA has tested hearing aids for interference from handheld wireless phones and help ed develop a voluntary standard sp onsored by the Institute of Electrical and Elect ronic Engineers (IEEE). This standa rd specifies test me thods and performance requirements for hearing aids and wireless phon es so that no i nterference occurs when a person uses a compatible phone a nd a accompanied hearing ai d at th e same tim e. Th is standa rd was a pproved by the IEEE in 2000. FDA continues to moni tor the use of wireless ph ones for po ssible interactions wit h other medical devices. Should harmful int erference be found to occur, FDA will conduct testing to as sess the interference and work to resolve the problem . 12. Where can I find additional inform ation? For additional informatio n, please refer to the following resources: ⢠FDA web page on wireless phones http://www .fda.gov/cdrh/p hones/index.htm l
204 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. ⢠Federal Comm unications Commiss ion (FCC) RF Safety Program http://www .fcc.gov/ oet/rfsafety ⢠International Commissi on on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protect ion http://www .icni rp.de ⢠W orld Health Organization (WHO) International EMF Project http://www .who.int /emf ⢠National Radiol ogical Protect ion Board (UK) http://www .nrpb.org.uk/ July 18, 2001For upd ates: ht tp://www .fda.gov/cdrh/phon es
205 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Index A Access codes 149 Access points 141 Settings 144 Settings, Advanced 146 Alarms Alarm clock 118 Calendar alarms 59 Applications, Java 119, 120 Arena launcher Getting started 48 Registration and login 49 B Backing up and restorin g game data 133 Bluetooth Connection requests 163 Connecti on stat us indicators 164 Device address 162 Disconnecting 165 Factory set passcode 163 Pairing 163 Pairing re quests 163 Pairing, glossary explanati on 163 Passcode, glossary explanati on 163 Bookmark, glossary explanation 108 C Cache 111 Calendar Alarm 58 Sending entries 59 Stopping a calendar alar m 59 Using PC Suite 58 Call register See Log Calls Cost limit 157
206 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Dialed numbers 156 Duration 156 International 42 Received 156 Settings 140 Settings for call forwarding 134 Transferring 45 CD-ROM 166 Cell broadcast messa ges Certificates 151 Changing between applica tions 33 Clear screen See Standby mode Clock Alarm 118 Settings 118 Snooze 118 Computer connections 166 Connection ind icato rs Bluetooth 164 GPRS 36 GSM data call 36 Connection settings 141 Connection s sett ing s 48 Contact car ds Inserting picture s 52 Removing ringin g tones 54 Storing Touch tones 46 Copying Contacts between the SIM card and phone memor y 53 Text 84 Cutting Text 84 D Data connections Indicators 36 Date Settings 148 Defin ition of te rms 18 5 DNS, Domain Name Service, Glossary explanation 146
207 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. E E-mail 86 Offline 97 Remote mailbox 93 Retrieving from mailbox 94 Viewing attachments 95 F File formats SIS file 120 Fixed dialing 172 G Game card 32 Game file types 133 Game manager 131 Grouping and sorting files 132 Games Multiple players 33 Offline profile 135 Starting a gam e 31 Glossary 185 GPRS Data counter 159 Pric ing 143 Settings 148 H Handsfree See Loudspeaker I Idle state See Standb y mode Imag es Adding to a contact card 52 Indicators and icons in standby mode 36 Info service See Cell broadcast messages. Instant messaging (IM) chat sess ions 65 definition 61 group ch at 71 logout 77 settings 76
208 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Internet access po ints (IAP) See Access p oints IP address, glossary explanation 146 ISDN, glossary explanation 146 J Java See Applications. L Lock code 149 Log Erasing contents 159 Filtering 158 Loudspeaker 39 Activatin g 39 Turning off 39 M Mailbox 93 Manager Installing and removing Symbian so ftware 134 Memory card 32, 168 Passwor d 170 Unlocking 170 Memory low Viewing memory consumption 167 Menu Rearranging 36 Messaging Multimedia messages 85 Writing e-mail 86 Multimedia messages 85 Playing sounds 90 Re-playing soun ds 90 N N-Gage Arena 48 connecting to 47 P Pasting Text 84 PC Connecting 16 6 PC Suite Calendar data 58
209 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Pictures Viewing 113 PIN code 149 Prepaid SIM cards 157 R Recording voice ta gs 55 Reminder See Calendar, Alarm Remote mailbox 93 Ringing to nes Adding a personal ringi ng tone 53 Receiving in a smart m es- sage 91 Settings 135 S Safety 14 Safety information Video games 180 Services Access points, see Access points Settings Access codes 149 Access points 144 Applications (Javaâ¢) 122 Bluetooth 161 Calendar 59 Call forwarding 134 Call restrictio ns 173 Certificates 151 Data connections 141 Date and time 148 Display 140 Language 138 Lock code 149 Log 159 Original settings 139 Personalizing the game deck PIN code 149 Screen saver 140 Sounds 135 Short message service center 100 Shortcu ts
210 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. in Favorites 129 in Images 114 in Standby mode 36 SIM card Copying names and numbers 53 Messages 98 Messages on SIM 171 Names and numbers 171 SIS file 120 SMS center 100 Snooze Alarm clock 118 Calendar alarm 59 Sounds Muting a ringin g tone 44 Recording sounds 123 Removing a personal ringing tone 54 Settings 135 Standby mode 35 T Text message service center Adding new 100 Thumbn ails In a contact card 52 Time Settings 148 U USSD commands 99 V Video recorder 116 Viewing images 113 Voice dialing 54 Voice mailbox 159 Forward ing calls to voice mailbox 134 Voice messages 159 Voice tags 54 Adding 55 Making calls 56 Volume control During a call 42 Loudspeaker 39
2 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. The wireless device described in this guide is approved for the use in GSM 850 and GSM 1900 networks. LEGAL INFORMATION P art No. 93 1 0 037, Issue No. 1 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Nokia, N-Gage, N-Gage QD, Nokia Connecting P eople, and the Nokia Original Enhancements logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Nokia Corporation. Other company and product names mentioned herein may be trademarks or trade names of their respective owners. Electronic file created March 12, 200 4. US P atent No 5818437, 595354 1, 60 1 1554 and other pending paten ts. T9 text input software Copyright é 1999-2004. Tegic Communications, In c. All rights reserved. Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc. Includes RSA BSAFE cryptographic or security protocol softwar e from RSA Se curity . Java is a trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc. is a trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc. The information contained in this user guide was written for the Nokia N-Gage QD product. Nokia operates a policy of ongoing development. Nokia rese rves the right to make changes to any of the products described in this document without prior notice. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL NOKIA BE RE SPONSIBLE FOR ANY LOSS OF DATA OR INCOME OR ANY SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, AND CONSEQUE NTIAL OR INDIRECT DAMAG ES HOWSOEVER CAUSED. THE CONTENTS OF THIS DOC UMENT ARE PROVIDED "AS IS." EXCEPT AS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW , NO W ARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPR ESS OR IMPLIED, INCLU DING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO , THE IMPLIED W ARRANTIES OF MERCHANTA BIL ITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE MADE IN RELATION TO THE ACCURACY AN D RELIABIL ITY OR CONT ENTS OF THIS DOCUM ENT . NOKIA RESERVES THE RIGHT TO REVISE THIS DOCUMENT OR WITHDRAW IT AT ANY TIME WITHO UT PRIOR NOTICE.
3 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. EXPORT CONTROLS This device may contain commodities, technology , or software subject to US export laws. Diversion contrary to law is prohibited. FCC/INDUSTRY CANADA NOTICE Y our device may cause TV or radio interference (for example, when using a telephone in close proximity to receiving equipment). The FCC or Industry Canada can require you to stop using your telephone if such interference cannot be eliminated. If you require assistance, contact your local service facility . This de vice complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the condition that this device does not cause harmfu l interference.
4 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. P atents Manufactured or sold under one or more of the following US Patents. Asterisk (*) indicates design patents pending. 4868846 4945633 500 1372 5053928 5083240 5101 17 5 5 124672 5 15 1946 5152004 5173927 5212834 5230091 524 1583 5266782 527 1 056 5 3 111 5 1 53 17283 533 1638 5335362 5341 149 5353328 537 148 1 5378935 5378935 5384782 5390223 5392460 5396657 5400949 5408504 54 16435 5430 740 544252 1 5444816 5446364 5446422 5477422 5479476 5487 084 5526366 5534878 55486 16 555 106 7 5553 125 5557639 556582 1 5566201 557 0369 558 1244 5594797 5600 7 08 5606548 5613235 5625274 5640395 5664053 56756 1 1 5677620 5692032 56970 74 5699482 57 0 1392 57220 74 572954 1 5754976 5760568 578734 1 5794 142 5797 10 2 5802465 5805301 58094 13 58 1916 5 582189 1 5822366 5827 082 5835858 5835889 5839 1 01 5842 14 1 5844884 5845219 585060 7 5857 15 1 5859843 5862178 587 0683 5884 103 5884 190 588977 0 5898775 5898925 5903832 5903839 590 7823 59 1257 0 59 14690 59 14796 59 17868 5920826 5926147 5926769 59298 13 5930233 594665 1 5953665 5956332 5956625
5 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 5956625 5956633 5960354 5960389 596390 1 5966378 5977887 5983081 5987 137 5987 137 5987639 5991857 6005857 60061 14 6009328 601 1853 60 1 197 1 60 14 1 13 60 1455 1 60 14573 602580 2 6026 16 1 6028567 6031827 6035 189 6035 194 6038238 6043760 6047 196 6049796 60504 15 6054954 6054966 6055439 6060 193 6069923 60 72787 60 7300 1 60 79993 6081732 608447 1 6084855 6084920 6084962 6088746 6094587 6097964 61 05784 6 1 12099 6 1 12099 6 1 156 17 6 1 18775 6 1 19002 6 1 19 180 6 12184 6 6 122498 6 128322 6128509 6130650 6 133884 6 137789 6 13809 1 6140966 6144243 6144676 6148209 6 15148 5 6 15 150 7 6 163609 6164547 6 167 038 6167248 6 167273 61 70 07 3 6 17 1 127 617 8535 618 2101 6 184592 6 185295 618530 2 6 185422 6188909 6195338 6 199035 620 17 12 6201876 6202 1 09 6219560 6223037 6223059 6230020 62400 76 6249584 62593 12 6262735 626632 1 6266330 6269126 627 1794 6272361 6282436 6285888 6292668 6295286 630 75 12 6308084 63 1 1054 63 14 166 63 1708 3 6324389 6324412 63337 16 63472 18 6356759 6359865 6359904 6363259 637 0362 6370389 6377803 6377820 6381468 6385254 638545 1 6392605 6392660 6400958 64 178 17 6430 163 6434 133 64377 1 1 643837 0 6445932 6453179 6456237 6456826 6463278 647047 0
6 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 6487397 651 0 148 652267 0 6591 1 16 6606508 48 1674 29 177 166* 29 180899* 29 180898* 29 180900* 29 180901 *
7 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Contents 1. For your safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 About your device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Network services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Register your device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 E-newsletters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Chargers, batteries, and en hancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Shared memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 2. Getting started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Installing th e SIM card and battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Charging the ba ttery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Switch the gam e deck on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Keys and parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 About the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Accessing applicatio ns in the menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 8 Keypad lock (Keyguard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Inserting a game or memory card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Ejecting a me mory card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Playing a ga me . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Saving power when playing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Starting a multiplayer game . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Tips fo r efficient use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
8 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 3. Your game deck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Personalizing you r game de ck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Shortcuts in th e standby mo de . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Volume control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Loudspeaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Installing so ftware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Removing software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 4. Your phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Making a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Making a confe rence call (network servi ce) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Answering or d eclining a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Call waiting (network servi ce) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Options duri ng a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 5. N-Gage QD Arena launcher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Connect to N-Gage Arena . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Getting started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Connection settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Updating Arena launcher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Registration and login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Registering from you r game deck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Registering from your PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 6. Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Saving names an d numbersâ Creating and editin g contact card s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Copying contacts between the SIM card and device m emory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Adding a rin ging tone fo r a contact card or group . . . . . . . . 53
9 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Voice dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Adding a voice tag to a phone number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Creating contact groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Removing members from a group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 7. Calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Creating calendar entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Calendar view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 8. Instant messaging (IM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Getting started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 User ID and password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 First login and service settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Chat sessions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Chat history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 IM contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Group chat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Log off service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 9. Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Writing text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Traditional text input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Predictive text input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Copying text to clipboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Writing and sending messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Settings needed for mul timedia messagin g. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Settings ne eded for e-mai l. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Inbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
10 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Viewing multimedia objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Receiving smart messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Receiving web messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 My folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Mailbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Opening the mailbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Retrieving e-mail m essages from the mailbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Disconnecting from mailbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Outbox â messages waiting to be sent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Viewing messages on a SIM card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Cell broadcast (network service) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Service com mand editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Messaging settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Settings for text messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Settings for multimedia messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 10. Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Basic steps for accessing Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Receiving set tings in a smart message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Keying in the settings manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Bookmarks view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Making a connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Connection security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Browsing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Ending a connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Emptying the cache . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Settings for Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
11 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 11. Extras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 ImagesâÂÂViewing imag es . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Screen cap ture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Changing Screen capture settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Video player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Receive a video clip in a message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Setting an alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Turning off the alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Applications (Javaâ¢) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Applications main view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Applications settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 To-doâÂÂtask list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 ConverterâÂÂConverting me asures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Setting a base currency and exchange rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Composer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Go to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Adding shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 12. Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Game manag er . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Grouping and sorting files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Check memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
12 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Game file types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Backing up and restoring game data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Installing and removing Symbian software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Call forwarding (network service) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Changing the profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Customizing profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Changing settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Device settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Call settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Connection settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Date and time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Enhancement settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Call log and general log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Voice mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Calling your voice mailbox (network service) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Bluetooth co nnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Bluetooth settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Sending data using Bluetooth connectivi ty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Pairing devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
13 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Receiving data using Bluetooth connecti vity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Disconnecting Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Connecting your game deck to a computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Using the CD-ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 View memory consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Free memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Memory card tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Format a memory card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Back up and restore information on a memory card . . . . . . . . . . 169 Lock the memory card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 1-touch dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 SIM directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Fixed dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Call restrictions (network servi ce) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Battery information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Nokia 90-Day Limited W arranty . . . . . . . . . . 187 Appendix A Message from the CTIA . . . . . . . 194 Appendix B Message from the FDA . . . . . . . . 198 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
14 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 1. For your safety Read these simple guidelines. Not following them may be dangerous or il legal. Read the complete user guide for further information. SWITC H ON SAFEL Y Do not switch the device o n when wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger . ROAD SAFETY COMES FIRST Obey all local laws. Always keep yo ur hands free to operate the vehicle while driving. Your first consideratio n while driving should b e road safety . INTERFERENCE All wireless devices may be susceptible to interference , which could affect performance. SWIT CH OFF IN HOSPIT ALS Follow any restrictions. Switch the device off near medical equipment. SWIT CH OFF IN AIRCRAFT Follow any restrictions. Wireless device s can cause interference in ai rcraft.
15 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. SWITCH OFF WHEN REFUELING Don't use the device at a refueling point. Don't use near fuel or chemicals. SWIT CH OFF NEAR BLASTING Follow any restrict ions. Don' t use the device where blasting is in progress. USE SENSIBL Y Use only in the normal position as ex plained in the product documentation. Don't touch t he antenna unnecessarily . QUALIFIED SERVICE Only qualified personnel may in stall or repair this product. ENHANCEMENTS AND BATTERIES Use only approved enhanc ements and batteries. Do not connect incompatible products. BACKUP COPIES Remember to make backup copies or keep a written record of all important information. CONNECTING T O O THER DEVICES When connecting to any other device, read its user guide for detailed safety instructions. Do not connect incompatible products.
16 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. EMERGENCY CALLS Ensure the device is switched on and in service. Press as many times as needed to clear the displa y and return to the main screen. Enter the emergency number , then press . Give your location. Do not end the call until given permission to do so. Emergency calls cannot be made in Offline mode. About your device The wireless device described in this guide is approved for u se on GSM 850 and GSM 1900 networks. Contact your service provider for more i nformation about networks. When using this features in this device, obey all laws and respect privacy and legitimate rights of others. W arning: T o use any features in this device, other than the alarm clock, the device must be switched on. Do not switch the device on when wireless phone use may cause interference or danger .
17 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Network services T o use the phone you must have service from a wireless serv ice provider . Many of the features in this device depend on features in the wireless net work to function. These network services may no t be available on all networks or you may have to make specific arrangemen ts with your service provider before you can utilize network services. Y our service provider may need to give you additional instructions for their use and explain what charges will apply . Some networks may have limitations that affect how you can use network services. For instance, some networks may not support all language-dependent char acters and services. Y our service provider may have requested that certain features be disabled or not activated in your device. If so , they will not appe ar on your device menu. Contact your service provider for more information. Register your device Make sure to register your device at www .warranty .nokiausa.com or 1-888-NOKIA-2U (1-888-665-4228) so that we can serve your needs better if you should need to call the cent er or have your device repaired. E-newsletters When you register your device, you can sign up for Nokia's e-newsletter Nokia Connections if you would like. Y ou wi ll receiv e tips and tricks on using your device, accessory information, and special offers.
18 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Chargers , batteries , and enhancements Check the model number of any charger be fore use with this device. This device is intended for use when su pplied with power from the ACP-12 and LCH-12. W arning: Use only batteries, chargers and enhancemen ts approved by Nokia for use with the particular model. The use of any other types may invalidate any approval or warranty , and may be dangerous. The BL-6C battery is the only battery approved by Nokia for use with this device. For availability of approved enhancemen ts, please check with your dealer . When you disconnect the power cord of any enhancement, grasp and pull the plug, not the cord.
19 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Shared memory The following features in this device ma y share memory: games, contacts, text messages, multimedia messages, image s and ringing tones, RealPlayerâ¢, calendar and to-do notes, and downloaded app lications. Use of one or m ore of the se features may reduce the memory available for th e remaining features sha rin g memory . For example, saving man y multimedi a messages may use all of th e a vai la bl e memory . You r phone may display a message that the memory is full when you try to use a shared memory fe ature. In this case, delete some of the information or entries stored in shared memory features before continuing. Some of the features, such as contacts, may have a certain amount of memory specifically allotted to them in addition to the amount of memory shared with other features.
20 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 2. Getting started Installing the SIM card and battery Ke ep all SIM cards out of the reach of small children. For availability and information on using SIM card services , contact your SIM card vendor . This may be the service p rovider , netw ork operator , or other vendor . Note: Before removing the covers, al ways switch off the power and disconnect the Nokia N-Gage QD⢠mobile game deck from the charger or any other device. Avoid touching electronic components while changing the covers. Always store and use the game deck with the covers attached. 1 With the back of the game deck facing you, press the release button ( 1) and slide the cover in the direction of the arrow .
21 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 2 T o release the SIM card holder , slide the holder in the direction of the arrow ( 2 ). 3 Open it (3). 4 Insert the SIM card into the holder ( 4 ). Make su re that the bevelled corner on the SIM card is facing outward from the holder and that the golden contact area on the card is facing downwards.
22 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 5 Close the SIM card holder ( 5 ). 6 Lock it into place ( 6 ). 7 Insert the battery ( 7 ). Replace the back cover .
23 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Charging the battery 1 Connect the charger to a wall outlet. 2 Open the latch marked with . Connect the charger plug into the jack in the game deck ( 1 ). The battery indicator bar starts scrolling. The game deck can be used while charging. If the battery is completely discharged, it may take up to a few minutes before the charging indicator is shown. 3 When the battery is fully charged, the bar stops scrolling. Disconnect the charger from the game deck, then from the outlet.
24 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Switch the game deck on W arning: Do not switch on the game deck when wireless phone use is prohibited or when it ma y cause interference or danger . 1 Press and hold the power key . 2 If the game deck requests a PIN code, key in the code (displayed as ****) and press OK . The PIN code is usually supplied with the SIM card 3 If the game deck requests a lock code, key in the lock code (displayed as *****) and press OK . The factory setting for the lock code is 12345 . See Device and SIM .
25 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. TIPS ON EFFICIENT OPERA TION : Y our game deck has a built-in antenna (grey area shown in the picture). As with any other radio transmitting device, do not touch the antenna unnecessarily when t he game deck is switched on. Contact with the antenna affects call quality and may cause the game deck to operate at a higher power level than otherwise needed. Avoiding contact with the antenna area when operating the phone optimizes the antenna performance and the battery life. NORMAL POSITION : Hold the game deck (as shown in the picture) with the antenna pointed up and over your shoulder .
26 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. K eys and parts
27 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 1 Microphone is on the back. 2 Controller key for playing games and menu navigation. 3 OK key selects, accepts, or activa tes. In standby mode, press this key to start a game. 4 Menu key opens the main menu. 5 Loudspeaker is on the back. 6 Slot for memory or game cards. 7 and are the main game keys. 8 P ower key is at the side. 9 Earpiece. 10 Edit key opens a list of commands for text editing such as Copy , Cut , and Pa s t e . 11 Clear key for deleting text and items. 12 Charger connector . 13 Headset connector . W arning: Using a dual-bud headset may affect your ability to hear sounds around you. Do not use headsets in situations th at many endanger your safety .
28 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. About the display A small number of missing, discolored, or bright dots may appear on the screen. This is a char acteristic of th is type of display . Some displays may contain pixels or dots that remain on or off. This is normal, not a fault. Accessing applications in the menu In standby mode, press the Menu ke y to open the main menu. Use the Controller key to navigate to diffe rent menu applications. To select and open a menu, press the OK key . Use the same method to sel ect and open other menus and folders. T o quickly return to standby mode and make a phone call, press . K eypad lock (K eyguard) Use the keypad lock to prevent the ke ys from being acc identally pressed. ⢠To l o c k : In standby mode, first press and then press . When the keys are locked, appears on the display . Or , press once, select Lock keyp ad and press OK . ⢠T o unlock : Press , and then press . When the keyguard is on, to answer a call, press . During a call, the phone can be operated in the normal way .
29 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Note: When Keyguard is on, calls may be possible to the emergency number programed into your phone (for example, 9 1 1 ). Just key in the emergency number and press . The number is displayed only after you have keyed in its last digit. If you choose to start games automatically when you insert a game card, the keypad is unlocked when a game st arts. Select T ools > Settings > Device > Ge neral > Game auto- start > On to set the auto-start. Inserting a game or memory card Important: K eep all game and memory cards out of the reach of small children. Important: Before inserting or remov ing a memory card, save all unsaved data. Inserting a memory card causes all open applications to close. Unsaved data is los t when applicat ions are closed. Important: Use only MMC cards with this device. Other memory cards, such as secure digital (SD) cards, do not fit in the MMC card slot and are not compatible with this device. Y our game deck supports co mpatible MMC cards with memory from 16 MB up to 1 GB .
30 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. It is important not to add stickers or any type of adhesive to the MMC card. This may cause the MMC card not to fit the card slot and can corrupt the card or cause loss of data. See Memory card tool . If you do not want to b e interrupted while playing, press in standby mode and switch to Offline profile. When Off line profile is active, all GSM wireless phone signals to and from the device are prevented. See Profiles and Call forwarding (network service) . 1 Open the card slot ( 1 ). 2 Insert a game or a memory card ( 2 ). 3 Close the card slot. If you inserted a game card, the game starts automatically . Also, the game icon is automatically added as the last item of the main menu. Information stored on a memory card is indicated with in different applications.
31 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Ejecting a memory card Important: Do not remove the car d in the middle of an operation when the indicator is blinking. Before inserting or removing a memory card, close al l applications by pressing Exit and save all unsaved data. All applications are c losed when inserting or removing the card. Removing the card in the middle of an operation may cause data loss, or the card may become corrupted. Pressing the key does not close applications, but allows them to run in the background. Press the power key and select Remove mem. card (availa ble only if a memory card is inserted). W ait until Memory card can be removed n ow text appears and remove t he card. Visit www .n-gage.com for more information on available games and to get game service settings. Playing a game Insert a game card, see Inserting a game or memory card . When the device is switched on, the game st arts automatically . Exit a game before removing a game card from the game deck.
32 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. T o start a game when a game card is inserted, press in standby mode. Y ou can also start games by selectin g the gameâÂÂs icon in the menu. Y ou can use the primary game keys and for playing games. Other keys may be used depending on th e game. Follow the instructions supplied with the game. Games can usually be paused and unpaused w ith . Check the game manual for details. Playing games consumes power and th e game deckâ s operating time is reduced. Y ou can purchase a variety of N-Gage QD games for your game deck. Each N-Gage QD game is supplied on a separa te read-only game card (MMC). The game data, such as high scores, is sa ved to the game deckâÂÂs memory , not on the N-Gage QD game card. For availa bility of d ifferent games contact your Nokia approved Games supplier or visit www .n-ga ge.com . Saving power when playing ⢠Reduce display brightness: Select Too ls > Settings > Device > Display > Brightness . Select Options > Change . ⢠Use the headset to listen to the game tones while playing. ⢠Switch off the Bluetooth connection when you are not using it. ⢠T o save battery power , do not leave games running in the background while you are not playing.
33 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Starting a multiplayer game Y ou can play some games with two or more players who have the same game on a compatible device. Playing i s done using a Bluetooth connection. Before starting a multiplayer game, en sure that the Bluetooth settings of the devices are compatible. See Bluetooth connection . Refer to the instructions supplied with the game for details of how to st art the game, different levels, additional features, et c. Tips for efficient use ⢠T o change the profile , press , and select the profile you want. All profiles are included in the power key menu. ⢠T o open a list of last dialed numbers , press . ⢠T o see which applications are open and to switch between applications that are open , press and hold . ⢠T o select an item , scroll to it and press . ⢠T o connect t o W eb services , press and hold . ⢠T o return to standby mode , press . The applications you are using are not closed, but are running in the background.
34 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. ⢠T o select multiple items , press and hold and at the same time press or . A check mark is placed next to the selected items. T o end the selection, stop the scrolling with the controller key and then r elease . After you have selected all the items you want, you can move or delete them. ⢠In some situations, when you press the controller key , a shorter options list appears listing the main c ommands available in the view . Note : If memory is getting low , the game deck may close some applications. The game deck save s any unsaved data before an application is closed, unless power is lost abruptly .
35 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 3. Y our game deck P ersonalizing your game deck ⢠T o change the ringing tones, select T ools > Profiles . Y ou can define different ringing tones for each profile. The standard profile is Normal , and the current date is displayed in stead of the profile name in the navigation bar . See Profiles . ⢠T o change the image shown as the the standby mode background, select Too l s > Settings > Device > Standby mode > W allpap er . ⢠T o change the color palette in your phone, select Tools > Settings > Device > Display > Color palette . ⢠T o change shortcuts assigned for the selection keys in the standby mode, select T ools > Settings > Device > Standby mode > Left select ion key or Right selection key . ⢠T o change the clock shown in the standby mode, select Tools > Settings > Date and time se ttings > Clock type > Analog or Digital .
36 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. ⢠T o change the welcome note , image, or animat ion, select T ools > Settings > Device > General > W elcome note or logo . ⢠T o change what is shown in the screen saver , select Tools > S ettings > Device > Display > Screen saver . ⢠T o adjust the volume of the ringing tone, select Audio volume in the profile. ⢠T o give an individual ringing tone to a frien d, select Contacts > Options > Open > Options > Ringing tone . ⢠T o rearrange the main menu, in the main menu, select Options > Mov e, New folder , or Mov e to fold e r . You can move more rarely used applications in folders and place applications that you use more often to the main menu. Shortcuts in the standby mode ⢠T o switch between applications th at are open, press and hold . ⢠T o change the profile, press and select a profile. ⢠T o lock the keypad, first press and then press . ⢠T o start a game when a game card is insert ed, press . ⢠T o open the last dialed nu mbers list, press once. ⢠T o start a conn ection t o the W eb , press and hold . See B asic steps for accessing Web
37 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Essential indicators in the standby mode Offline profile Y ou have received one or seve ral messages to the Inbox in Messa ging. Y ou have received one or several voice messages. See Calling your voice mailbox (network service) There are messages waiting to be sent in Outbox. Shown if Ringing options is set to Silent and Messag e alert tone to Off . Se e Profiles . The game deckâÂÂs keypad is locked. See Keypad lock (K eyguard) . Y ou have an active ala rm. See Setting an alarm . Y ou can make calls using phone line 2 only (network service).
38 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. All calls to the g ame deck are forwarded to another number . If you have two phone lines, the forward indicator for the first line is and for the second line . A memory card is being read or written to. or A headset or loopset is connected to the phone. A data call is active. Shown instead of the signal strength indicator (shown in the top left corner in the standby mode) when there is an active GPRS connection. See GPRS . Shown when the GPRS connection is on hold, for example, during voice calls. A fax call is active. Bluetooth is active. Note that, when data is transmitted using Bluetooth, is shown. Essential indicators in the standby mode
39 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. V olume control When you have an active call or are listening to a sound, press or to increase or decrease the v olume level, respectively . Loudspeaker The loudspeaker allows you to speak and listen to the game deck from a short distance without having to hold the game deck to your ear , for example, having it on a table nearby . The navigation bar shows wh ich speaker is in use. To locate the loudspeaker , see Keys and parts . T o start using the loudspeaker during an already active call , select Options > Activate loudsp. . Sound applications such as Composer and Recorder use the loudspeaker by default. Important: Do not hold the game deck near to your ear while using the loudspeaker because the v olume may be extremely loud. T o turn off the loudspeaker , when you have an active call or audio application playing, select Options > Activate handset .
40 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Installing software Select Options > View log to see what software packages have been installed or removed and when. See Manager and Applications (Java â¢) . Important: If you install a file that contains an update or repair to an existing application, you can only restore the original application if you have the original install ation file or a full back-up copy of the removed software package. To rest ore the original application, first remove the application and then in st all the application again from the original installation file or the back-up copy . 1 Open Manager , scroll to an installation package, and select: ⢠Options > View detail s to view information su ch as the type, version number and the supplier or manufacturer of th e application. ⢠Options > View certificate to display the security certificate details of the application. See Certificate management . 2 Select Options > Install to start installation. T o send your installation log to a help d e s k s o t h a t t h e y c a n s e e w h a t h a s been installed or removed, select Options > Send log > Via text message or Via e-ma il (available only if the correct e-mail settings are in place).
41 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 3 When the game deck asks whether to install or update the application or soft wa re , press Ye s to proceed with installation. If the game deck displays a security warning and you choose to cont inue installation, you are given the option to view the details and the security certificate of the software package. During installation, you may b e able to choose the installation language and select which components of the software package you want t o install. 4 The game deck informs you when installation is complete. Removing software Scroll to a software package and select Options > Remove . Press Ye s to confirm. If you remove software, you can only re-install it if you have the original software package or a full back-up of the removed software package. If you remove a software package, you may no longer be able to open document s created with that software. If another software package depends on the software package that you removed, the other software package may stop working. Refer to the documentation of the installed software package for details.
42 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 4. Y our phone Making a call To adjust the volume during a call, press to increase and to decrease the volume level. 1 In standby mode, key in the phone number , including the area code. Press to remove a number . For international calls, press twice for the international prefix (the chara cter rep laces the international access code) and then key in the country code, the area code without 0 , and the phone number . Note : Calls described here as inte rnational may in some cases be made between regions of the same nation. 2 Press to call the number . 3 Press to end the call (or to cancel the call attempt). Pressing will always end a call, ev en if another application is active. In standby mode, press once, to acce ss a list of the 20 last numbers you called or attempted to call. Scroll to the number you want and press to call the number . T o change the phone number of your voice mailbox, press and select T ools > V oice mailbox and select Options > Change number . Key in t he number (obtained from your service provider) and press OK .
43 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Making a call using Co ntacts Press and select Co ntacts . Scroll to the desired name. Or , key in the first letters of the name to the Search fie ld. Matching contacts are listed. Press to call. See 1-touch dialing . Making a conference ca ll (network service) 1 Make a call to the first participant. 2 Make a call to a nothe r participant, select Options > New call . Key in or search for the phone number and press OK . The first call is automatically put on hold. 3 When the new call has been answered, join the first participant in the conference call. Select Op tion s > Confer ence . ⢠T o add a new person to the call, repeat step 2 and then select Options > Conference > Add to conference . Y ou can make a confer ence call with a maximum of six participants, including yourself.
44 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. ⢠T o have a private conversation with one of the participants: Select Options > Conference > Private . Scroll to t he desired participant and press Private . The con ference call is put on hold on your game deck. The other participants can still continue the conference call. Once you have finished th e private conversation, s elect Options > Add to conference to return to the conference call. ⢠T o drop a participant, select Options > Conference > Drop participant , then scroll to the participant and press Drop . 4 T o end the active conf erence call, press . Answering or declining a call T o answer an incoming call, press and press to end the call. If you do not want to answer a call, press . The caller will hear a âÂÂline busyâ tone. If a compatible headset is connected to the phone, you can answer and end a call by pressing the headset key . If you press S ilence , only the ringing tone is muted. Then either answer or decline the call. If you have activated the Call for ward > If busy function to forward calls, for example, to your voice mailbox, declinin g an incoming call will also forward the call. See Call forwarding (network service) .
45 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Call waiting (network service) If you have activated the Call waiting se rvice, the network will notify you of a new incoming call while you have a call in p rogress. T o change the settings, Press and select T ools > Settings > Call > Call waiting . T o adjust the game deck tones for di fferent environments and events, for example, when you want your game deck to be silent, see Prof iles . 1 During a call, press to answer th e waiting call. The first call is put on hold. T o switch between the two calls, press Swap . 2 T o end the active call, press . Options during a call Many of the options that you can use du ring a call are network services. Press Options during a call for some of the following options: Mute or Unmute , End active call , End all calls , Hold or Unhold , New call , C onference , Private , Drop participant , Send touch tones , Answer , and Decline . Swap to switch between the active call and th e call on hold, Tra n s fe r to connect an incoming call or a call on hold with an active call and to disconnect yourself from the calls.
46 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Y ou can add touch tones to the Phone number or T ouch tones fields in a contact card. Send touch tones to send touch tone strings, for example, passwords or bank account numbers. K ey in the touch tone st ring or search for it in Conta cts . Press repeatedly to produce: * , p (pause ), or w (wait). Press to produce # . Press OK to send the tone.
47 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 5. N-Gage QD Arena launcher Arena launcher is an application on your game deck that allows you to connect to N-Gage Arena, an online, world-wide community for gaming. In N-Gage Arena, you can compete with other gamers in global rankings and tournaments, and communicate with gamers across the globe. N-Gage Arena also has additional content for your ga mes such as background images, game movies, and news about events and new games. Connect to N-Gage Arena Before you can start the N-Gage Aren a, you must choose a service provider and make sure that your game deck can establish a mobile In ternet connection. Check the availability of services, pric ing, and tari ffs with your network operator and service provider . Service providers will also give you instructions on how to use their network serv ices. Y ou must also regi ster with the N- Gage Arena to set up your account. There are th ree ways to connect to N-Gage Arena: ⢠Use the Arena launcher on your game deck. Press and select Arena . ⢠Select the N-Gage Arena website from you r PC. http://arena .n-gage.com
48 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. ⢠While you are playing a game, select N-Gage Arena from the game menu. The in-game menus provide access to sele ct features and content specific to the game you are playing. Getting started Note : To connect to N-Gage Arena wi th your game deck, you must subscribe to GPRS service. Che ck with your service provider for availability of service. Connection settings Y our Internet access point must be co nfigured to connect to N-Gage Arena. Y our service provider may have preconfigured the access point. 1 Y ou can check the settings by select ing T ools > Settings > Conne ction > Access points . If there is no predefined Internet ac cess point, you can order the Internet settings on the N-Gage website. 2 Select http://support.n-gage.com and use the Settings Configurat or . 3 Choose the Internet settings for your service provider . The settings are sent to your game deck in a text message. Note : Accessing N-Gage Arena from your game deck uses GPRS service. Check w ith yo ur service provider about costs for service.
49 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Updating Arena launcher N-Gage Arena launcher is pre-installed on your game deck, but updates to the application are released reg ularly . Ea ch time you open Arena launcher , the application version is checke d. If there is a optional update available, you will be asked if you want to download the update. Some updates to Arena launcher are not optional, but must be downloaded to continue using Arena launcher . Y ou are notified when the update is required. If you do not download the new version, Arena launcher still operates, but you are not able to use t he latest functions. When you choose to update, only the f iles necessary to update the application are downloaded on your game deck. Registration and login To u se the Arena launcher application on your game deck, you must choose a service provider and make sure that your game deck can establish a mobile Internet connection before you create an account. Y ou can register as a member of the N-Gage Arena community by creating an account on your game deck, or on your PC. Registering from your game deck 1 T o use your game deck for re gistration, press and select Arena . If you are already a member of the N-Gage Arena community , login by entering your username and password .
50 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 2 If you are not a member , login and register by entering your date of birth , a username , passwor d, e-mail address , and other personal date in the appropriate fields. Y ou cannot create an account without an e-mail address. The username you choose is the name t hat appears in your rankings and other N-Gage Arena community listings. Registering from your PC 1 Connect to http://a rena.n-gage.com from your PC. 2 Select Register and enter your date of birth , a username , password , e-mail address , and other personal date in the appropriate fields. Y ou cannot create an account without an e-mail address. The username you choose is the name t hat appears in your rankings and other N-Gage Arena community listings. Tip: When you login to N-Gage Arena, you can save your password. High light the Save password? button. Y ou can toggle between Ye s and No by pressing the OK key .
51 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 6. Contacts Options in the Con tacts direct ory: Open , Call , Create message , New contact , Edit , Delete , Duplicate , Add to group , Belongs to groups , Mark/ Unmark , Send, Contacts info , Help , and Exit . Y ou can add a personal ringing tone, v oice tag, or a thumbnail image to a contact card. Y ou can also create contact groups, which allow you to send text messages or e-mail to many rec ipients at the same time. Y ou can add received contact information (business cards) to your Contact s directory . See Receiving smart messages . Contact information can only be sent to or received from compatible devices. Y ou can move contacts from many different Nokia phones to your game deck using the Data Import application of the PC Suite for Nokia N-Gage. T o use PC Suite, your PC must support Bluetoot h. Refer to the PC Suite help function for instructions.
52 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Saving names and numbersâÂÂCreating and editing contact cards Options when editing a contact card: Add thumbnail / Remove thumbnail , Add detail , Delete detail , Edit label , Help , and Ex it . 1 Press and select Contacts > Options > New contact . 2 Fill in the fields that you want and press Done . ⢠T o edit cont act cards , in the Contacts directory , scroll to the contact card and press . ⢠T o change the information on the card , select Options > Edit . T o delete contact cards , in the Contacts directory , scroll to the contact card and select Options > De le te . See ImagesâÂÂViewing images for more information on how to store pictures. ⢠T o attach a small thumbna il image to a contact card , open the contact card, select Options > Edit and then select Options > Add thumbnail . The thumbnail image is shown when the contact calls. ⢠T o add an image to a contact card , open a contact card, and press to open the Image view . T o attach an image, sele ct Options > Add image .
53 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Copying contacts between the SIM card and device memory ⢠T o copy names and numbers from a SI M card to your game deck, press and select To o ls > SIM directory . Select the names you want to copy and select Options > Copy to Contacts . ⢠T o copy a telephone, fax, or pager number from Contacts to your SIM card, select Contacts and open a cont act card. Scroll to the number , and select Options > Copy to SIM direct . Tip: T o send contact information, in the Contacts directory , scroll to the card you want to send. Select Options > Send > Via te xt message, Via e-mail (available only if the correc t e-mail settings are in place) or Via Bluetooth . See the Messaging chapter , and Sending data using Bluetooth connectivity . Adding a ringing tone for a contact card or group When a contact or group member calls you, the game deck plays the chosen ringing tone (if the callerâÂÂs telephone number is sent with th e call and your game deck recognizes it). 1 Press to open a contact card or se lect the Groups list and select a contact group. 2 Select Options > Ringing tone . A list of ringing tones opens.
54 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 3 Scroll to the ringing tone you wish to use for the contact or group and press Select . T o remove the ringing tone, select Default tone from the list of ringing tones. For an individual contact, the game deck uses the ringing tone that was assigned last. So, if you first change a group ringing tone and then the ringing tone of a single contact that belongs to that group, the ringing tone of the single contact is used. V oice dialing Y ou can make a phone call by saying a voice tag that has been added to a contact card. Any spoken word(s) can be a voice tag. Before using voice dialing, note that: ⢠V oice tags are not language depend ent. They are dependent on the speaker' s voice. ⢠V oice tag s are sensitive to background noise. Record them and make calls in a quiet environment. ⢠V ery short names are not accepted. Use long names and avoid similar names for different numbers. Note: Y ou must say the name exactly as you said it when you recor ded it. This may be difficult in, for ex ample, a noisy environment or during an emergency , so you should not rely solely upon voice dialing in all circumstances.
55 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Adding a voice tag to a phone number 1 In the Contacts directory , open the contact card to which you want to add a voice tag. Y ou can have only one voice tag per contact card. 2 Scroll to the number to which you want to add the voice tag and select Options > Add voice tag . Example: Y ou can use a personâ s name for a voice tag, for example, âÂÂJohnâÂÂs cell. â 3 Press Start to record a voice tag. After th e starting tone, say clearly the word(s) you want to record as a voic e tag. W ait until the game deck plays the recorded tag and saves it. A symbol can be seen next to the number in the contact card indicating that a voice tag has been added to it. T o view a list of voice tags you have defined, select Option s > Contacts info > V oice tags in the Contacts directory . Y ou can add a voice tag to up to 25 phone numbers.
56 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Making a call by saying a vo ice tag Y ou must say the voice tag exactly as you said it when you recorded it. T o listen to, change, or delete a voice tag, open a contact card and scroll to the number that has a voice tag (indicated by ) and select Options > V oice tags . Then select either Playback , Change , or Delete . 1 In the standby mode, press and hold . A short tone is played and the note Speak now i s displayed. 2 When you are making a call by saying a voice tag, t he loudspeaker is in use. Hold the game deck at a short distance away and say the voice tag clearly . 3 The game deck plays the original v oice tag, displays the name and number , and dials the number of the recognized voice tag. If the game deck plays the wrong voice tag, or to retry voice dialing, press Retry . V oice dialing cannot be used when a data call or a GPRS connection is active.
57 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Creating contact groups 1 In the Contacts directory , press to open the Groups list. 2 Select Options > New group . 3 Write a name for the group or use the default name Group and pre ss OK . 4 Open the group and select Options > Add me mb e rs . 5 Scroll to a contact and press to mark it. T o add multiple members at a time, repeat this action on all the contacts you want to add. 6 Press OK to add the contacts to the group. Removing members from a group 1 In the Groups list, open the group you want to modify . 2 Scroll to the contact and select Options > Remove from group . 3 Press Ye s to remove the contact from the group.
58 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 7. Calendar Creating calendar entries 1 Press and select Calendar . 2 Select Options > New entry and select: ⢠Meeting to remind you of an appointment that has a specific date and time. ⢠Memo to wr ite a general entry for a day . ⢠Anniversary to remind you of birthdays or special dates. Anniversary entries are repea ted every year . 3 Fill in the fields. Use the Con tr oller key to move between fields. Y ou can move calendar and to-do data from many different Nokia phones to your game deck or synchronize your calendar to a PC using the PC Suite for Nokia N-Gage. To use PC Suite, your PC must support Bluetooth. See the PC Suite online help. Shortcut: Press any key ( â ) in any calendar view . A Meeting entry is opened and the characters you keyed in are added to the Subject field. Alarm âÂÂSel ect On and press to fill in the Alarm time and Al arm date fields. Alarm is shown with in the Day view .
59 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Stopping a calendar alarm â Press Stop to end the calendar alarm. If you press any other key , the alarm is set to snooze. Repeat âÂÂPress to change the entry to be repeating ( is shown in the Day view). Repeat unt il âÂÂY ou can set an ending date for the repeated entry . SynchronizationâÂÂPrivate âÂÂafter synchronization the calendar entry can be seen only by you and it will not be show n to others with online access to view the calendar . Public âÂÂthe calendar entry is shown to others who have access to view your calendar online. None âÂÂthe calendar entry will not be copied to your PC when you sy nchronize. Y ou can send calendar entries to a compatible phone. See the Messaging and Sending data using Bluetooth connectivity . 4 To save the entry , press Don e . If you are editing or deleting a repeated entry , choose how you want the change to take effect: All occurrences âÂÂall repeated entries are deleted / This entry only âÂÂonly the current entry will be deleted. Example: Y our weekly class has been cancel ed. Y ou have set the calendar to remind you every week. Choose This entry only and the calendar will remind you again next week. Calendar views Select Options > Settings t o change the view t hat is shown when you open the calendar or the starting day of the week.
60 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. In the Month view , dates that have cale ndar en tries are marked with a small triangle at the right bottom corner . Memos and Anniversaries are placed before 8 a.m. In the Month view , the number of the we ek shows in the far left column if Monday is selected as the day the week starts on. Select Options > Settings > W eek starts on > Monday to see the week number displayed. ⢠T o select a certain date, select Options > Go to dat e . Write the date and press OK . ⢠Icons in Day and W eek views: â Meeting , â Memo , and â Anniversary . ⢠Press to jump to today .
61 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 8. Instant messaging (IM) Y ou can now take text messaging to the next level by expe r i e n c i n g I M i n a wireless environment. Y ou can engage in IM with friends and family , even if they are on different mobile systems (compa tible with your phone) or on the Internet, as long as you all use the same IM service. Check with your wireless service provider for availability . IM is different f rom using SMS or e-ma il because you can have a two-way or group conversation where all messages within the conversation are displayed in one screen as an ongoing dialogue. The contact list feature shows you when your friends, family members, an d col leagues are online and available to exchange instant messages. Simply se lect the name, wr ite the message, and send it. Y our message stays on the screen. The reply appears on the screen below your original message so that yo u can track the conversation. As new messages appear and the screen f ills up, the older messages disappear . Note: If IM is not available from your wireless service provider , it may not appear in your phone menu. Contact your service provider for more information about signing up for IM services and costs for services. Note: Due to variations in IM and wi reless service providers, you may not have access to all of t he fe atures described in this guide.
62 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Getting started Before you can start using IM, you must obtain a user ID and password. See User ID and password and ensure that your default GPRS connection is set up. User ID and password Before you can use IM, you must get a user ID and password by registering over the Internet (through your computer) with the IM service provider you selected. During the registration proces s you can create your user ID and password. First login and service settings The first time you log in to IM, you must enter the server settings. Contact your service provider for the settings. 1 From the main phone menu, select Instant messaging . A message displays asking you to de fine an instant messaging server . 2 Select Ye s . 3 In the New IM Server screen, scroll to each of the options and enter the information supplied by your service provider server na me, access point in use, URL address, user ID, and password . 4 Select Back . The login screen displays your user ID and password.
63 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 5 Select OK . Connecting appears; then Login completed and the Instant messaging menu follow . Set manual or automatic log in After you first log in, you can use either a manu al or an automatic login. If you log in manually , you will receive a screen prompt for your user ID and password each time. The user ID and pa ssword you entered previo usly appear on the login screen (the password is re presented by asterisks). From the Instant mess aging menu, sel ect Options > Settings > IM Settings > Open > Login type > Change and on e of the following options: Automa tic â When you select the IM application, you are automatically connected to the IM service without en tering your user ID and password. Manual â When you select the IM application, you are prompted f or your user ID and password before be ing connected to the IM service. Set Availabili ty Y ou can determine whether other users ca n know if you are online or not. To set your IM presence, perform the following steps: From the Instant mess aging menu, sel ect Options > Settings > IM Settings > Availability and one of the following options: Available â Others see your status as on l ine, and you receive availability information and messages from others.
64 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Not active â Even though others see your status as offline, you receive availability information and messages from others. Display and ic ons Note: Since each IM service has its own display text and icons, the display on your phone may appear different from this user guide. If you have questions about the various display texts and icons, contact your IM service provider . The following list shows the IM icons and their descriptions. The icons and display text may appear different for your IM service. Contact online Contact offline T racking set for contact New unread message IM connected IM disconnected
65 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Chat sessions When you send an instant message to another person you initiate a chat session. Y ou can send i nstant messag es to anyone if you have their user ID. Y ou can also add that person to your contact list during an IM session. See Add a new contact during a chat session . Start a chat session 1 In the Instant messaging menu, select Conversations > Options > New conversation > Select recipient . 2 Scroll to the desired contact, and select OK . OR Select Enter u ser ID ; then enter the recipient user ID, and select OK . The conversation view appears with the contact nickname (if available) or user ID at the top. For the first message in the IM session, the conversation view will be empty . 3 Enter your message in the text entry area; then se lect Option s > Send , or press OK . The message is sent and displayed at the top of the conversation view. 4 After your contact replies, repeat step 3 to continue your chat session.
66 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Start a Chat session from IM contacts 1 In the Instant messaging menu, select IM contacts . 2 Scroll to the desired contact, and select Option s > View conversation . The conversation view appear s with th e contact name at the top. For the first message in the IM session, th e conversation view will be empty . 3 Enter a messa ge in the text entry area; then select Options > Send , or press OK . The message is sent and displaye d in the conversation view. 4 After your contact replies, repeat step 3 to continue your chat session. Receive and reply to instant messages When you receive an instant message, a tiny balloon icon appears in the upper right corner of the screen. P erform the following steps to access and reply to the message: 1 In the Instant messaging menu, select Conve rsations. 2 Scroll to the sender name, and select Options > Open . The conversation view appears with th e contact name or user ID at the top. 3 Enter a reply to the message, and select Options > Se nd . The reply is sent and displaye d in the conversation view.
67 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Quit chat session T o end your chat session, perform the following steps: 1 In the conversation view, select Options > End convers. 2 At the confirmation message, select Ye s . Chat history Y ou can keep a record of your conversation or group chat session. Save chat history T o save your conversation or gr oup chat, perform the following steps: 1 From the conversation view or gr oup conversation view, select Options > Record conver s. 2 In the Conversation nam e screen, enter a name for the conversa tion, and select OK. The conversation is saved as a note under the Extras phone menu. 3 T o stop recording the conversation, select Options > Stop recording . View or delete chat history 1 In the phone main menu, select Extras > Notes ; then scroll to the desired conversation. 2 To view the conversation, select Options > Open , and scroll to vi ew the entire conversation. 3 T o delete the conversation, select Options > Delete .
68 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 4 At the confirmation message, select Ye s . IM contacts Y ou can add to your contact list the names of other IM users with whom you will be chatting frequently . Add a new contact 1 In the Instant messaging menu, select IM contac ts > Options > New IM contact . 2 Enter the contac t nickname in the Nickname entry are a. 3 Scroll to the Name entry area, and enter the contact name. 4 Scroll to the User ID entry area, and enter the contact user ID. 5 Select Done . The new contact is added to the contact list. Add a new contact during a chat session 1 In the conversation view, select Options > Add to IM contacts . The New IM contact screen opens, with the us er ID already filled in. 2 Enter the contac t nickname in the Nickname entry are a 3 Scroll to the Name entry area, and enter the contact name. 4 Select Done . The new contact is added to the contact list.
69 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Search for a user 1 In the Instant messaging menu, select IM contac ts > Options > Search > Users . 2 Select one of the following: UserâÂÂs name â Enter the first few characters of the contact first and l ast name, and select OK . User ID â Enter the first few characters of the contact user ID, and select OK . Phone number â Ent er th e first few numbers of contact phone number , then select OK . E-mail â Enter the first few characters of the contact e-mail address, then select OK . Search fo r a group 1 In the Instant messaging menu, select IM contac ts > Options > Search > Groups . 2 Select one of the following: Group name â Enter the first few characters of a group name, and select OK . T opic â Enter the first few characters of the group topic, and select OK . Members â Enter the first few characters of the user ID of a group member , and select OK .
70 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Remove a contact from the co ntact list 1 In the Instant messaging menu, select IM contacts . 2 Scroll to the contact name you want to remove and select Options > Delete . 3 At the confirmation message, select Ye s . Block messages from a contact 1 In the Instant messaging menu, select IM contacts . 2 Scroll to the contact you want to block. 3 Select Options > Blocking options > Add to blocked list . Unblock messages from a contact 1 In the Instant messaging menu, select IM contac ts > Options > Blocking options > Unblock . A list of blo cked contacts is displ ayed. 2 Scroll to the contact that you want to unblock, and select OK . Set and release tracking for a contact Y ou can keep trac k of whether a contact is online or offline. If the IM setting Reload user status is set to Automatica lly , and you have tracking set on for a contact, you will receive a notification whenever that contactâ s availability changes. See IM settings for more information. 1 In the Instant messaging menu, select IM contacts .
71 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 2 Scroll to the desired contact, and select Options . 3 Select Switch tracking on to set tracking or Sw itch tr acking off to release track ing. Group chat The group chat feature allows you to chat with multiple participants simultaneously . Y ou can create your own private chat groups or be invited to join a live chat in progress. During a group chat, all messages are displayed in one group conversation view screen. Y ou can also save a group chat history . See Chat history . Create chat group 1 In the Instant messaging menu, select IM groups > Options > Create new group . 2 Select from the following options, and follow the prompts: Group name â Enter a name for the new group, and select OK . Group topic â Enter a conversation topic for the group, and select OK . The default topic is Gener al . W e lcome note â Enter a welcome note of up to 1 00 characters, and select OK . The welcome note is displayed to any group member who logs in to the group. Group size â Enter the maximum group size, and select OK . The default size is 1 00 members.
72 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Allow search â Det ermine whether search en gines are allowed to show the chat group as a search result. Select either Ye s or No . Editing rights â Determine which group members should have editing rights to the group list. T o give a member editing rights, scroll to that member name and press the OK key in the middle to mark the name. When you are finished, select OK . The Group creator always has editing rights and cannot be unmarked. Group members â Determine whether to restrict the chat group to a list of members or to allow anyone to participate. S elect either Selected only (chat group is restricted to a list of members) or All (anyone can join the chat group). See Add and remove group members for more information. Allow private msgs. â Determine whether participants in the chat group are allowed to send private messages during a group chat. Select eith er Ye s or No . 3 Select Done . 4 Enter your screen name, and select OK . Y ou are connected to the new group conversation in the group conversation view. Join an existing chat group 1 In the Instant messaging menu, select IM groups , scroll to the group you want to join, and select Options > Open . 2 Enter your screen name and select OK .
73 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Y ou are connected to the group conversation in the group conversation view. The name of the chat group is displayed at t he top of the screen. Add and remove group members For a chat group that is restricted to a list of selected members, you can add members to the group and re move members from the group. 1 In the group conversation view, select Options > IM group > IM group settings > Group members . 2 Scroll to Selected only , and select OK . Add member 3 In the Group mem bers screen, select Opt ions > A d d me mbe r . 4 Select IM Contact ; then scro ll to the desired name in the contact list, and select OK . OR Select Enter u ser ID ; then enter the us er ID and select OK . 5 Repeat steps 3 âÂÂ4 to add more members to the group. Remove member 6 In the Group members screen, scroll to the member you want to remove and select Options > Remove. 7 At the confirmation message, select Ye s . 8 Repeat steps 6 âÂÂ7 to remove more members from the group.
74 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 9 T o remove all group members at the Group members screen, select Options > Remove all . Send an invitation to a group chat Members must be online before you can invite them to a group chat. 1 From the group conversation view, select Options > Send invitation . 2 Scroll to the contact whom you want to invite to the group chat, and select OK . 3 Enter an invitation message, and select Done . The invitation is sent. 4 T o add other members to the group, repeat steps 2âÂÂ3. When a member accepts an invitat ion, a message is displayed in the group conversation view announcing that the member has joined. Accept or reject invitations to g roup chat When you receive an invitation to a group chat, the New invitation received screen appears with the user ID (or nickname , if available in contacts) and message of the sender displayed. T o accept 1 Select Accept . The Screen name screen appears. 2 Enter your screen name, and Select OK .
75 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. The group conversation view appears wi th the name of the chat group at the top. To r e j e c t Select Cancel . Chat with group members All group chat messages are displayed in the group conversation view. The sender name is displayed in front of each message. Enter a message in the te xt entry area; the n select Options > Send , or pre ss the OK key in the middle. Y our message is displayed in the grou p conversation view under the last message received. If you exit from the group conversation view while the group chat is still active, you can return to the chat. In the Instant messaging menu, select IM groups ; then select the name of the chat group. Send a private message While you are in a group chat, you can sen d a private message to one member of the group. The message cannot be seen by other group members. 1 From the group conversation view, select Options > Send private msg. 2 Select the contact to whom you want to send the private message. 3 Enter the me ssage; then select Op tion s > Send , or press the OK key in the middle.
76 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Leave a group chat From the group conversation view, select Options > Leave IM group. Settings Y ou can customize your IM and server se ttings, depending upon the IM service you have selected. IM settings 1 From the Instant messaging menu, select Options > Settings > IM settings > Open . 2 Select from the following options, and follow the prompts: Use screen name â Select either Ye s or No . If you select Ye s , enter your screen name (up to 1 0 characters) and select OK . IM presence â Select either Active for all or Not active . See Set Availability for more information. Message speed â Use the left and right selection keys to move the indicator between Slow and Fas t on the speed bar; then select OK . Reload us er statu s â Select either Automati cally or Manually . If you select Automatically , the online/offline status of your contacts is updated automatically whenever a status changes. If y ou select Manually , you must update the status by selecting IM Contacts > Options > Reload user st atus from the Instant messaging menu. Block invitations â Select Ye s to prevent invitations to group chat from
77 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. appearing or No to allow invitations to appear . Login type â Select either Automatic or Manual . If you select Automa tic , IM will log you in aut omatically each time you start the application. 3 When you are finished, select Back to save your changes. Server settings 1 From the Instant messaging menu, select Options > Settings > S erver settings > Open . 2 Select from the following options, and follow the prompts: IM server â Edit the settings for an existing s erver , create a new serve r , or delete a server . Contact your service provider for more information. Serve r in use â Select the server you want to use. Log off service When you log out of the IM service, you can exit the Instant messaging menu and return to the phone main menu, or you can remain in the Instant messaging menu without an active connect ion. Y ou can also remain logged in, but return to the phone main menu. This enables you to receive in stant messages and chat invitations from yo ur c ontacts even when using your phone for other purposes, such as making a call or playing a game.
78 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Once you are logged in to the IM servic e, your phone will keep you logged in even if you have not used yo ur IM applic ation for some time. However , if your GPRS connection is put on hold for more than a few minutes (for example, during a phone call), GPRS is disconnec ted and your IM connection is lost. The next time you open th e IM application, you will need to log in again. Log out and retu rn to main menu In the Instant messaging menu, select Options > Exit . Logging out appears, followed by a confirmation note. The phone main menu appears in the display . Log out and remain in instant messag ing menu From the Instant mess aging menu, sel ect Options > Logout . Logging out appears, followed by a confirmation note. The Instant messaging menu remains in the display , and the IM logo changes to disconnected mode. Return to main menu while remaining connected Press the key .
79 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 9. Messaging In Messaging , you can create, send, receive, view , edit, and organize text messages, multimedia messages, e-ma il messages, smar t messages, and special text messages containing data. Y ou can also receive Bluetooth messages and data, WAP service messages , cell broadcast messages as well as send service commands. Options in the Messaging main view are Create me ssage , Connect (shown if you have defined mailbox settings)/ Disconnect (shown if a connection to mailbox is active), SIM messages , Cell broadcast , Service command , Settings , Help , and Exit . When you open Messaging, you can see the New message function and a list of folders: Inbox â contains received messages except e-mail and cell broadcast messages. e-mail messages are stored in the Mailbox . M y f o l d e r s â f or organizing your messages into f olders. Organize your messages by addin g new folders under My folders . Mailbox â When you open this folder , you can e-mail connect to your remote mailbox to retrieve your new e-mail messages or view your previously retrie ved e-mail messages offline. See Settings for e-mail . Drafts â stores draft messages that have not been sen t.
80 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Sent â stores the last 20 messages that ha ve be en se n t. To ch an g e t he number of messages to be saved, see Settings for the Other folder . Messages or data that have been sent using Bluetooth connection are not saved. Outbox â is a temporary storage place fo r messages waiting to be sent. Reports â you can request the network to se nd you a delivery report of the text messa ges, smart mes sages, and multimedia messages you have sent. Receiving a delivery report of a mult imedia message that has been sent to an e-mail address might not be possible. When you have opened any of the defa ult folders, you can switch between the folders by pressing or . Writing text T raditional text input is shown on the top right of the display when you are writing text using traditional text input. and indicate the selected case. means that the first letter of the word, is written in u pper case, and all th e other let ters will automatically be written in lower case. indicates number mode.
81 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. ⢠Press a number key ( â ) repeat edly until the desired character appears. Note, that there are more ch aracters available for a number key than are printed on the key . ⢠T o insert a number , pres s and hold the number key . ⢠T o switch between letter and number mode, press and hold . ⢠If the next letter is located on th e sa me key as the present one, wait until the cursor appears (or press to end the time-out period), and key in the letter . ⢠If you make a mistake, press to remove a character . Press and hold to clear more than one character . ⢠The most common punctuation mark s are available under . Press repeatedly to reach the desired punctuation mark. ⢠Press to open a list of special characters. Use the controller key to move through the list and press Select to select a character . ⢠T o insert a space, press . To move the cursor to the next line, press three times. ⢠T o switch between the different character cases Abc , abc , and ABC , press .
82 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Predictive text input Tip: T o set predictive text input on or off, press twice quickly when writing text. Y ou can key in any letter with a single keypress. The predicti ve text input is based on a built-in dictionary to which you can also add new words. When the dictionary becomes full, a new wo rd replaces the oldest added one. 1 T o activate predictive text input, press and select Predictive text > On . This will activat e predictive text input for all editors in the game deck. is shown on the top right of the display when you are writing text u sing predictive text input. 2 Write the desired word by pressing the keys â . Press each key only once for one letter . For example, to write âÂÂNokiaâ when English dictionary is selected, press for N for o for k for i for a. The word match is evolving. W ait to ke y in the whole word before you check for results. The word suggestion changes after each key press.
83 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 1 When you have finished writing the correct word, confirm it by pressi ng or adding a space by pressing . ⢠If the word is not correct, press repeatedly to view the matching words the dictionary has found one by one, or press and select Predictive text > Matches . â¢I f ? is shown after the word, the word you intended to write is not in the dictionary . To add a word to the dictionary , press Spell , key in the word (up to 32 letters) using traditional text input, and press OK . The word is added to the dictionary . When the dictionary becomes full, a new word replaces the oldest added word. 2 Start writing the next word. When you press , the following options appear (depending on the editing mode selected ): Predictive text , Alpha m ode â traditional text input Numbe r mode , Cut â if text has been selected Copy â if text has been selected Pa s t e â when text has been cut or copied first Insert number , Insert symbol , and Writing language â change s the input language for all editors in the game deck
84 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Writing compound w ord s Write the first half of a compound word, and confirm it by pressing . Write the last part of the compound word, and complete the compound word by pressing to add a space. T urning predictive text in put off Press , and select Predictive text > Off to turn predictive text input off for all editors in the game deck. Copying text to clipboard 1 T o select letters and words, press and hold . At the same time, press or . As the selection moves, text is highlighted. 2 T o end the selection, stop pressing the controller key . 3 T o copy the text to clipboard while still holding , press Copy . 4 T o insert the text into a document, press and hold , and press Pas t e ; press once, and select P aste . ⢠T o select lines of text, press and hold . At the same time press or . ⢠If you want to remove the selected text from the document, press .
85 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Writing and sending messages Note: This function can be used only if it is supported by your network operator or service provid er . Only de vices that offer compatible picture message, multimedia message, or e-mail features can receive and display these messages. Devices that do not have multimedia features may receive details of a link to a web page. Before you can create a multimedia message, or write an e-mail, or connect to your r emote mailbox, you must have the correct connection settings in place. See Settings for e-mail and Settings for multimedia messages . Y ou can start to create a message fr om any application that has the option Send . Choose a file (an image, text) to be added to the message, and select Options > Send . 1 Select New message . A list of message options opens. 2 Select Create: Text message if you want to create a text message. Sending a mu ltimedia message 1 T o send a picture message, select Options > Inser t > Pictur e . 2 Select Create: Multimedia message if you want to send a multimedia message (MMS). Note: Each picture message is made up of several text messages. Therefore, sending one picture me ssage may cost more than sending one text message.
86 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Options in the message editor are: Send , Add recipient , In ser t , Attac hment s (e-mail), Preview message (MMS), Objects (MMS), Remove (M MS), Delete , Message details , Sending options , He lp , and Exit . When you are sending a multimedia message to any compatible device other than a Nokia N-Gage game deck, it is recommended to use a smaller image size and a sound clip that is no longer than 15 seconds. The default setting is Image size: Small . When you are sending a multimedia message to an e-mail address or another Nokia N-Gage game deck, if possible, use the larger ( Large ) image size (network depen dent). To ch ange the image size setting, select Options > Sending options > Image size when you are creating a multimedia message. Important: Copy protections may prevent some images, ringing tones, and other content from being copie d, modified, transferred, or forwarded. Sending e- mail 1 Select Cr eate: e-mail to send e-mail. If you ha ve not set up your e-mail account, you will be prompted to do so. Scroll to a contact, and press to mark it. Y ou can mark several recipients at a time. 2 Press to select recipients from the contacts directory or write the recipientâÂÂs phone number or e-mail addr ess if you are sending an MMS or e-mail.
87 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 3 If you want to send a copy of your e-mail to someone, write the address in the Cc field. Press to add a semicolon ( ; ) to separate each recipient. 4 Press to move to the message field. 5 Write the message. Y ou can send multiple text messages at the same time. Therefore, the normal 160 characters limit for one text messag e can be exceeded. If your text exceeds 160 characters, it will be sent in two or more mess ages, and message sending may cost you more. 6 T o add a media object to a multimedia message, select Opti ons > Insert > Image, Sound clip , Video clip , or Te mplate . Select the item you wish to add. When sound has been added, is shown in the navigation bar . If you select Ins ert > Ne w sound clip , the recorder opens and you can record a new sound. The new sound is automatically saved and a copy is inserted in the message. A multimedia message can contain only one image and one sound clip. 7 T o preview the multimedia message, select Options > Preview message . 8 T o remove a multimedia object, select Options > Remove > Image , Video clip , or Sound clip ; press to remove text.
88 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 9 If you want to add an attachment to the e-mail, select Options > Insert > Image , Sound clip , Video clip or Note. will appear in the navigation bar to indicate that the e-mail has an attachment. Tem p l a t e adds prewritten text to the e-mail. 10 T o send the messa ge, select Optio ns > Send , or press . E-mail messages are automatically placed in the outbox before being sent. If something goes wrong while the game de ck is sending the e-mail, the e-mail is left in the outbox with the F ailed status displayed. Settings needed for mu ltimedia messaging Y ou may receive the settings as a s mar t message from your network operator or service provider . See Receiving smart messages . For availability of and subscription to data servic es, please contact your ne twork operator or service provider . 1 Select T ools > Settings > Conne ction > Access point s , and define the settings for a multimedia messaging access point: Connection name â Give a descriptive name for the connection. Data bearer â Select a data connection type: GPRS or Data c all . Gateway IP address â Enter the add ress. Example: Domain names such as www .nokia.com can be translated into IP addresses like 192.1 00.124.19 5 .
89 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Homepage â Enter the address of th e multimedia messaging center . ⢠If you selected Data call , fill in Dial-u p number , a phone number for the data call. ⢠If you selected GPRS , fill in Access point nam e, the name given to you by your service provider . See Connection settings . 2 Select Messaging > Options > Se ttings > Mult imedia message . Open Access point in use , and select the access point you created to be used as the connect ion. See Settings for multimedia messages . Settings needed for e-mail T o send files other than sounds an d notes as attachments, open the appropriate application and select Send > Via e-mail , if available. Before you can send, receiv e, retrieve, reply to, and forward e-mail, you must do the following: ⢠Configure an Internet access point (IAP) correctly . See Connection settings . ⢠Define your e-mail settings correctly . See Settings needed for e-mail . Follow the instructions given by your remote mailbox and Internet service provider .
90 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Inbox T o determine the status of your inbox refer to these icons: Unread text message Unread multimedia message Data received using Bluetooth technology When there are unread messages in the inbox, the icon changes to . When you receive a message, and the note 1 new message is shown in the standby mode. Press Show to open the message. T o open a message in the inbox, scroll to it, and press . When you open a multimedia message ( ) , you can see an image, read a message, and hear a sound through th e loudspeaker simultaneously . is shown if the sound is included). If th ere is sound, p ress or to increase or decrease the sound volume. To mute the soun d, press Stop . To listen to a sound again, select Options > Play sound clip . Viewing multimedia objects Options in the objects view are Open , Save, Send, Help , and Exit . To see what kinds of media objects ha ve been included in the multimedia message, open the message, and select Options > Objec ts . Y ou can choose to save a multimedia object file in your ga me deck or send it, for example, using Bluetooth connectivity technology to another compatible device.
91 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Important: Multimedia message objects may con tain viruses or otherwise be harmful to your game deck or PC. Do not open any attachment if you are not sure of the trustworthiness of the sender . See Certificate management . Receiving smart messages If you receive a vCard file that has a pi cture attached, the picture will be saved to Contacts as well. Y our game deck can receive many kinds of smart messages ( ), that is, text messages that contain data, also called over-the-air (O TA) messages : Pictur e me ssage â To save the picture for later use in Extras > Images > Picture msgs. , select Option s > Save picture . Business card â T o save the contact information, select Options > Save business card . If certificates or sound files ar e attached, they will not be saved. Ringin g to ne â To save the ringing tone to Composer , select Options > Save . Operator logo â For the logo to be shown in the standby mode instead of the network operatorâÂÂs own identification, select Options > Save . T o change the default access point settin gs for multimedia messagi ng, select Messaging > Options > Settings > M ultimedia message > Access point in use . Calendar entry â To save the invitation, select Options > Save to Calendar .
92 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. W AP message â T o save the bookmark to the Bookmarks list in Web , selec t Options > Save to bookmarks . If the message contains both access point settings and bookmarks, to save the data select Options > Sav e all . E-mail notification â T ells you how many new e-mail messages you have in your remote mailbox. An extended no tification may list more detailed information. In addition, you can receive a text message service number , voice mailbox number , profile settings for remote sync hronization, access point settings for We b , multimedia messaging or e-mail, access point login script settings, or e-mail settings. Receiving web messages We b messages ( ) are notifications of, for example, news headlines, and may contain a text message or a link. For availability and subscription, contact your service provider . My folders Y ou can use texts in the templates folder to avoid rewriting messages that you send often. In My folders , you can organize yo ur messages into folders, create new folders, and rename and delete folders. Select Options > Move to folder , New folder , or Rename folder .
93 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Mailbox If you select Mailb ox and have not set up y our e-mail account, you will be prompted to do so. See Settings for e-mail . When you create a n ew mailbox, the na me you give to the mailbox replaces Mailbox in Messaging . Y ou can have several mailboxes (up to six). Opening the mailbox When you open the mailbox, you can ch oose whether you want to view the previously retrieved e-mail messages an d e-mail headings offline or connect to the e-mail server . When you scroll to your mailbox and pr ess , the game deck asks you if you want to Connect to mailbox? ⢠Select Ye s to connect to your mailbox an d retrieve new e-mail headings or messages. When you view messag es online, you are continuously connected to a remote mailbox using a data call or a GPRS connection. See also Essential indicators in the standby mode and Connection settings . ⢠Select No to view previously retrieved e- mail messages offline. When you view e-mail messages offline, your game deck is not connected to the remote mailbox.
94 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Retrieving e-mail messa ges from the mailbox If you are offline, select Options > Connect to start a connection to a remote mailbox. Y ou can use the PC Suite for Nokia N-Gage to configure access point and mailbox settings. See the CD-ROM supplied in the sales package. 1 When you have an open connection to a remote mailbox, select Options > Retrieve e-mail and one of the fol lowing options: New â to retrieve all new e-mail messages to your game deck. Selected â to retrieve only the e-mail me ssages that have be en marked. All â to retrieve all messages from the mailbox. T o cancel retrieving, press Cancel . 2 After you have retrieved the e-mail messages, you can continue viewing them online, or select Options > Disconnec t to close the connection and view the e-mail messages offline. View the E-mail status using these icons: new e-mail (offline or online mode), the content has not been retrieved to your game deck (arrow outwards). new e-mail, the content h as been retrieved to your game deck (arrow inwards). e-mail message has been read. e-mail heading that has been read and the message content h as been deleted from the game deck.
95 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 3 T o open an e-mail message, press . If the e-mail message has not been retrieved (arrow in the icon is pointing outwards) and you are offline, you will be asked if you want to retrieve this message from the mailbox. 4 T o view e-mail attachments, open a message that has the attachment indicator , and select Options > Attachments . If the attachment has a dimmed indicator , it has not been re trieved to the game deck, select Options > Retrieve . In the attachments view , you can retrieve, open, or save attachments. Y ou can also send attachments using Bluetooth connectivity . Important: E-mail attachments may contai n viruses or otherwise be harmful to your game deck or PC. Do not open any attachment if you are not sure of the trustworthiness of the sender . See Certificate management . Y our mailbox uses the IMAP4 protocol, you can decide whether to retrieve e-mail headings only , messages only , or messages and attachments. With the POP3 protocol, the options are e-mail headings only or messages and attachments. See Settings for e-mail . Deleting e-mail messag es T o delete an e-mail from the game deck while still retaining it in the remote mailbox. ⢠Select Options > Delete > Device only .
96 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. ⢠T o delete an e-mail from both the game deck as well as from the remote mailbox. ⢠T o cancel deleting an e-mail from both the game deck and server , scroll to an e-mail that has been marked to be deleted during the next connection ( ), and select Options > Undelete . The game deck mirrors the e-mail headings in t he remote mailbox. So, although you delete the message content, the e-mail heading stays in your game deck. If you want to remove the heading as well, you have to delete the e-mail message from your remote mailbox and make a connection from your game deck to the remote mailbox again to update the status. ⢠T o copy an e-mail from the remote mailbox to a folder under My folders , select Options > Copy to folder . Select a folder from the list, and press OK . Select Options > Delete > Device and server to delete the e-mail. If you are offline, the e-mail will be deleted from your game deck. During the next connection to the remote mailbox, it will be aut omatically deleted from the remote mailbox. If you are using the POP3 protocol, messages marked to be deleted are removed only after you have closed the conn ection to the remote mailbox. Disconnecting from mailbox When you are online, select Options > Disconnect to end the data call or GPRS connection to the remote mailbox. See also Essential indicators in the standby mode .
97 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Viewing e-mail messag es when offline When you open M ailbox the next time and y ou want to view and read the e-mail messages offline, answer No to the Connect to mailbox? query . Y ou can read the previously re trieved e-mail headings and the retrieved e-mail messages. Y ou can also write new , reply to, or forward e-mail to be sent the next time you connect to the mailbox. Outbox â messages waiting to be sent Status of the messages in the outbox: Sendin g , Waiting/Queued , Resend at , Deferred , and Failed . Resend at (time) â The game deck will try to send the message again after a time-out period. Press Send to restar t the sending immediately . Deferred â Y o u can set documents to be on hold while they are in the outbox. Scroll to a message that is being sent, and select Options > Defer sending. F ailed â The maximum number of sending attempts has been reached. Sending has failed. If you are trying to send a text message, open the message, and check that the sending options are correct. Example: Messages are placed to th e out box, for example, when your game deck is outside network coverage. Y ou ca n also schedule e-mail messages to be sent the next time you connect to you r remote mailbox.
98 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Viewing messages on a SIM card Before you can view SIM messages, yo u ne ed to copy them to a folder in your game deck. 1 In the messaging main view , select Options > SIM messages . 2 Select Options > Mar k/Unmar k > M ark or Mark all to mark messages. 3 Select Options > Copy . A list of folders opens. 4 Select a folder , and press OK . Select the folder to view the messages. Cell broadcast (network service) Y ou can receive messages on various topics, such as weather or traffic conditions from your service provider . Fo r available topics and relevant topic numbers, contact your service provider . In Messaging , select Options > Cell broadcast . In the main view you can see the status of a topic, a topic number , name, and whether it has been flagged ( ) for follow-up. The options in Cell broadcast are Open , S ubscribe/Unsubscribe , Hotmark/Unhotmark , T opic , Settings , Help , and Exit . In Settings , you can set Reception to On/Off , select the Language , and set T opic detection to On/Off . A GPRS connection may prevent cell broadcast reception. Contact your network operator for the correct GPRS settings. See Connection settings .
99 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Service command editor Select Messaging > Options > Service comman d . Key in and send service requests (also known as U SSD commands), such as activation commands for network services, to your service provider . Messaging settings Settings for text messages Options when editing text messa ge center settings are New msg. center , Edit , Delete , Help , and Exit . Select Messaging > Options > Settings > T ext message . Message centers â Lists all the text messag e service centers that have bee n defined. See Adding a new text message center . Msg. center in use â Select which message center is used for deliver ing text messages. Receive report (network service) â To reques t the network to send delivery reports on your messages. When set to No , only the status Sent is sho w n in Log . See Log settings . Message validity â If the recipien t of a mess age cannot be reached within the validity period, the message i s re moved from the text message service center . Note that the network must support this feature. Maximum ti me is the maximum amount of time allowed by the network.
100 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Message sent as â Change this option only if you are sure that your service center is able to convert text me ssages into these other forma ts. Contact your network operator . Preferred connection â Y ou can send text messages using the normal GSM network or using GPRS, if su pported by the network. See GPRS . Reply vi a same ctr . (network se rvice) â Choose Ye s , if you want the reply message to be sent using the same text message service center number . Adding a new text message center 1 Open Message centers , and select Options > New msg. center . 2 Press , write a name for the service center , and press OK . 3 Press , and , and write the numbe r of the text message service center . Y ou receive the number from yo ur service provider . 4 Press OK . 5 T o take the new settings into use, go back to the settings view; scroll to Msg. center in u se , press , and select th e new service center . Settings for multimedia messages Select Messaging > Options > Settings > Multim edia message . Access point in use â Select which access point is used as the connection (must be defined) for the multimedia message center . See Settings needed for multimedia messaging .
101 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Example: If your Access point in use uses GPRS, you may want to use GSM data call for the secondary connection. This enables you to send and receive multimedia messages even when you are not in a network that supports GPRS. Contact your network operator or service provider . See About data connections and access points . If you receive multimedia message se ttings in a sma rt message and save them, the received settings are automatically used for the Access point in use . See Receiving smart messages . Secondary conn. â Select which access point is used as the secondary connection for the multimedia message center . Both Access point in use and Secondary conn. must have the same Homepage setting pointing to the same multimedia service center . Only the data connection is different. Multimedia reception â Se lect Only in hom e net. if you want to receive multimedia messages only when you are in your home network. Important: If the settings Only in home net. or Always on have been selected, your game deck can make an active data call or GPRS connection without your knowledge. When you are outside your home netw ork, multimedia message reception is turned off. Select Always on if you want to receive multimedia messages always. Select Off if you do not want to receive multimedia messages or advertisements at all.
102 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. On receiving msg. â Select fro m the following options: Retr . immediately â Retrieve multimedia messages instantly . If there are messages with deferred status, they will be retrieved as well. Defer retrieval âÂÂSave the message to be retrieved later . Set On receiving msg. to Defer retrieval . Decline message â Decline multimedia messages. Th e multimedia messaging center will delete the messages. Allow anon. messages â Select No , if you want to decline messages coming from an anonymous sender . Receive ads â Define whether you want to receive multimedia message advertisements or not. Receive report â Se t to Ye s , if you want the status of the sent message to be shown in the Log. Receiving a delivery report of a multimedia m e s s a g e t h a t h a s b e e n s e n t t o a n e-mail address might not be possible. Deny report send ing â Choose Ye s , if you do not want your game deck to send delivery reports of re ceived multimedia messages. Message validity â If the recipien t of a mess age cannot be reached within the validity period, the message i s removed from the multimedia messaging center . Note that the network must support this feature. Maximum ti me is the maximum amount of time allowed by the network.
103 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. ⢠Image si ze â Define the size of the image in a multimedia message. The options are Small (u p to 160x120 pixels) and Large (up to 640x480 pixels). ⢠Default s peake r â Choose Loudspeaker or Handset , if you want the sounds in a multimedia message to be played through the loudspeaker or the earpiece. See Loudspeaker . Settings for e-mail Options when editing e-mail settings are Edit , New mailbox, Delete , Help, and Exit . Select Messaging > Options > Settings > e-mail and select from the following settings: Mailbox in use selects which mailbox you want to use for sending e-mail. Mailboxes opens a list of mailboxes that have been defined. If no mailboxes have been defined, you will be prompted to do so. Select a mailbox to change the settings: Mailbox name â Write a descriptive name for the mailbox. Access point in use â T o choose an Internet Access P oint (IAP) for the mailbox (must be defined). See Connection settings . My mail address â Write the e-mail address (m ust be defined) given to you by your service provider . Replies to your messages are sent to this address.
104 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Outgoing mai l server â Write the IP address or host name of the computer (must be defined) that sends your e-mail. Send message â Define how e-mail is sent from your game deck. Immediately â A connection to the mailbox is started after you have selected Send . During next conn. sends e-mail when you connect to your remote mailbox the next time. Send copy to self â Select Yes to save a copy of the e-mail to your remote mailbox and to the address defined in My mail address . Include sign ature â Select Ye s if you want to att ach a signature to your e-mail message and to start to write or edit a signature text. User name â Write your user name, given to you by your service provider . Pa s s w o r d â Write your password. If you le ave this field blank, you will be prompted for the password when you try to connect to your remote mailbox. Incoming mail server â The IP address or host name of th e computer (must be defined) that receives your e-mail. Mailbox type â Defines the e-mail protocol your remote mailbox service provider recommends. The options are POP3 and IMAP4 . This setting can be selected only once and cannot be changed if you have saved or exited from the mailbox settings.
105 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. If you are using the POP3 protocol, e-mail messages are not updated automatically in online mode. T o see the newest e-mail messages, you need to disconnect and then make a new connection to your mailbox. Security â Used with the POP3, IMAP4, and SMTP protocol s to secure the connection to the remote mailbox. APOP secure login â U sed with the POP3 protocol to encrypt the sending of passwords to the remote e-mail server (not shown if IMAP4 is selected for Mailbox type ). Retrieve attachment â T o retrieve e-mail with or without attachments (not shown if the e-mail protocol is set to POP3). Retrieve headers â T o limit the number of e-mail headers you want to retrieve to your game deck. The options are All and User defined (can only be used with the IMAP4 protocol). Settings for service messages Select Messaging > Options > Settings > Service message . Choose whether or not you want to re ceive servic e messages. A uthentic . neede d receives service messages only from authorized sources. Settings for Cell broadcast (network service) Check with your service provider to obtain the available topics and related topic numbers, and select Messaging > Options > Settings > Cell broadcast to change the settings.
106 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Language â All allows you to receive cell broa dcast messages in all supported languages. Selected allows you to choose in which languages you wish to receive cell b roadcast me ssages. If you cannot find the desired language, select Other . T opic detection â If you receive a message that does not belong to any of the existing topics, T opic detection > On allows you to save the topic number automatically . The topic number is saved to the topic list and shown without a name. Choose Off if you do not want to save new topic numbers automatically . Settings for th e Other folder Select Messaging and select Options > Settings > Other . Save sent messages â Choose if you want to save a copy of every text message, multimedia message, or e- mail th at you have sent to the Sent items folder . No. of saved msgs. â Define how many sent mess ages will be saved to the Sent items folder at a time. The default limit is 20 messages. When the limit is reached, the oldest message is deleted.
107 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 10 . W e b Va rious service providers maintain pa ges specifically designed for mobile devices. T o access these pages, press and select We b . These pages use the Wireless Markup Language (WML) or Extensible Hypertext Markup Language (XHTML). Web pages using the Hypertex t Markup Language (HTML) cannot be viewed on your phone. The Web icon may not be seen in a ll phones. Some service providers may replace the icon in the main menu with a shortcut to a specific XHTML page. Check with your service provider for details. Check the availability of services, pric ing, and tari ffs with your network operator and/or service provider . Se rvice providers will also give you instructions on how to use their services. Basic steps for accessing W eb ⢠Save the settings t hat are needed t o access the service that y ou want to use. See the sections Receiving settings in a smart message and K eying in the settings manually . ⢠Make a connection to the W eb . See Making a connection . ⢠Start browsing the pages. See Browsing . ⢠End the connection to W eb. See Ending a connection .
108 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Receiving settings in a smart message Settings may be available, for example, on the web si te of a network operator or service provider . Y ou may receive Web service settings in a special text me ssage, a so-called smart message, from the network operator or service provider that offers the W eb page. See Receiving smart messages . For more information, contact your network operator or service provider . K eying in the settings manually Follow the instructions given to you by your service provider . 1 Select T ools > Settings > Conne ction > Access point s and define the settings for an access point. See Connection settings . 2 Select Web > Options > Add bookmark . Write a name for the bookmark and the address of the page defi ned for the current access point. Bookmarks view Glossary: A bookmark consists of an Inte rnet address (mandatory), bookmark title, access point, and if the W eb page requires, a user name and password. Note: Y our phone may have some pre-installed bookmarks for sites not affiliated with Nokia. Nokia does not warrant or endorse these sites. If you choose to access them, you sh ould take the same precautions, for security or content, as you would with any site.
109 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. The starting page defined for the ac cess point. If you use another access point for browsing, the starting page is changed accordingly . The last visited page. When the phone is disconnected from W eb , the address of the last visited page is ke pt in memory until a new page is visited during the next connection. Any bookmark showing the title or Internet address of the bookmark. Options in the Bookmarks view: Open , Download , Ba ck to page , Send , Go to web address / Find bookmark , Add bookmark , Edi t , Delete , Re ad service msgs. , Disconnect , Move to folder , New folder , Mark /Unmark, Rename , Clear cach e , Details , Add to âÂÂGo toâ , Settings , Help and Exit . Making a connection Shortcut: T o start a connection, press and hold in standby mode. Once you have stored all the required connection settings, you can access the pages. Select a page or a bookmark, or writ e the address, pres s to start to download the page. T o send a bookmark, scroll to it and select Op tions > Send > Via text message .
110 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Connection security If the security indicator is displ ayed during a connection, the data transmission between the phone and th e internet gateway or server is encrypted and secure. Options when browsing: Open , Service options , Bookmarks, History , Go to web address , View image , Read service msgs. , Save as bookmark , Send bookmark , Reload , Disconnect , Show images , Clear cache , Save page , Find , Details , Session , Security , Settings, Help , and Exit . The security icon does not indicate th at data transmission between the gateway and the content serv er (place where the reques ted resource is stored) is secure. It i s up to the service prov ider to secure data tr ansmission between the gateway and the c ontent server . Browsing ⢠T o go to the previous page while browsing, press Back . If Bac k is not available, select Options > History to view a chronological list of the pages you have visited during a browsing session. The history list is cleared each time a session is closed. ⢠T o retrieve the latest content from the server , select Options > Reload . ⢠T o save a bookmark, select Options >Save as bookmark . ⢠T o save a page, while browsing select Options > Save page . Y ou can save pages either to the game deckâÂÂs memory or on a memory card and browse them when offline. To access the pa ges later , press in the Bookmarks view .
111 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. T o access the Bookmarks view while browsing, press and hold down . T o return to the browser view again, select Options > Back to page . ⢠T o open a sublist of commands or actions for the currently open page, select Options > Service options . ⢠Y ou can download items such as ringing tones, images, operator logos and video clips. Downloaded items are saved in the respective applications on your game deck, for example, a downloaded image is saved in Images . Note: Copy protections may prevent some images, ringtones and other content from being copied, modified, transferred or forwarded. ⢠T o download and view new service messages while browsing, select Options > Read service msgs. (shown only if there are new messages). See also Receiving smart messages . Ending a connection Select Options > Disconnect , or press and hold to quit browsing and to return to standby mode. Emptying the cache The information or services you have a ccessed are stored in the cache memory of the game deck. A cache is a buffer memory that is used to store data temporarily .
112 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. If you have tried to access or have a ccessed confidential information requiring passwords (for example, yo ur bank account), empty the cache of your game deck after each use. To empty the cache, select Options > C le ar ca ch e . Settings for W eb Default ac cess pointâ T o change the default access point, press to open a list of available access points. See Connection settings . Show images âÂÂIf you choose No , you can later load images during browsing by selecting Options > Show images . T ext wrapping â Choose Off if you donâÂÂt want the text in a paragraph to automatically wrap, or On if you do. Font size âÂÂChoose text size. Cookies âÂÂEnable or disable the receiving and se nding of cookies. Default enc oding âÂÂT o make sure your browse r displays text characters correctly , select the appr opriate language type. Conf. touch tone sendingâ Choose whether you want to confirm before the game deck sends touch tones during a voice call. See Options during a call .
113 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 1 1. Extras ImagesâÂÂViewing images Options in Images: Open , Image uploader , New folder , Update thumbnails , Help , and Exit . Images can be saved from Screen captur e or sent to you in a multimedia or picture message, as an e-mail at tachment, or using Bluetooth connectivity . After receiving an image in Inbox, you need to save it in the phone memory or on a memory card. Y ou can save graphics sent to you in picture messages to the Picture messages folder . 1 Press and select Extras > Images . Press or to move from one memory tab to another . T o br owse the images, press and . 2 Press , to open an image. When th e image is open, you can see the name of the image and the number of images in the folder on the top of the display .
114 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. K eyboard shortcuts ⢠Rotate: âÂÂcounterclockwise, âÂÂclockwise. ⢠Scroll: âÂÂup, âÂÂdown, âÂÂleft, âÂÂright. ⢠Zoom: âÂÂin, âÂÂout, and press and hold to return to the normal view . ⢠View: âÂÂchange between full screen and normal view . Y ou can send images using different messaging services to compatib le devices. Screen capture Y ou can capture images from the scre en of your game deck. Screen capture runs in the background and captures the screen con tents when you press the designated key combination. 1 Press and select Extras > Screen Captur e . 2 Select Options > Background . The applicat ion disappears from the screen. Screen capture rema ins active. It has no effect on any application you want to run, and it lets you capture the screen contents anytime, for example, when you are playing a game. 3 Press to capture a Screen Capture .
115 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Y ou can capture a screen while playing a game, or start Screen Capture before you start the game. If you have already started playing a game, press to ret urn to the st andb y mode. Open t he Screen Capture application and return to the game by pressing and holding . Select the game you have open and press . Note: If memory is getting low , the game deck may close some applications. The game deck saves any unsaved data before an application is closed, unless power is lost abruptly . Changing Screen capture settings Select Options > Settings to change: ⢠Shot shortcut âÂÂSelect a key combination to take Screen captures with. ⢠Folder name , Image name , Save as, ⢠Ask for image name âÂÂSelect Ye s if you want to save the image using the name you entered in the Image name option. Select No to set an individual name for every image (the name you entered in the Image name option is displayed by default).
116 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Video player Options in the main view: Open , Delete , Edit clip name , Move to mem. c ard , Send , Add to âÂÂGo toâ , Settings , and Exit . Press and select Extras > Video player to play video clips stored on your phone or on a memory card. The file types supported are 3GP and NIM. ⢠T o play a video clip , scroll to it and press or select Options > Open. ⢠T o adjust the vol ume, press or . ⢠T o send a video clip , scroll to the video clip you want to send and select Options > Send > Vi a multimedia or Via Bluetooth . Select a reci pient. The video clip is moved to Outbox fo r sending. Because of the maximum size of the multimedia message is 95 KB , the length of the recorded video clip is limited to 95 KB which usua lly means approximately 15 seconds. Receive a video clip in a message ⢠When you receive a video clip in a supported format in a multimedia message, go to Me ssaging and open the multimedia message. To view the message as text and to play th e video or save it, select Options > Objects . ⢠When you receive a video clip in a supported format as an e-mail attachment, open the message and select Options > Attachments if you want to play the video or save it.
117 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. The MMS-related serv ices are dependent on the network as well as on the compatibility of the devices used and the content formats supported. There are several video recorder applications for mobile phones in use and therefore the appearance of multimedia messages containing video clips may vary even when sent from one compatible phone to another . Network restrictions may apply for sending and receiving video c lips, contact your service provider for more information and availability . Calculator T o add, subtract, multiply , and divide, press and select Extras > Calculator . Options in Calculator: Last result , Memory , Clear screen, Help , and Exit . Note: The Calculator has limited accuracy and rounding errors may occur , especially in long divisions. Select to save a number in t he memory , indicated by M . To retrieve the number , select . To clear a number in memory , select Options > Clear screen .
118 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Clock Options in Clock: Set alarm , Reset alarm , Remove alarm , Settings , Help , and Exit . Press and select Extras > Clock . To change the time or date, select Options > Settings in Clock. To change the clock sh own in the standby mode, scroll down in the Date and time settings and select Clock type > Analog or Digital . Setting an alarm 1 To set a new alarm, se lect Options > Set alarm . 2 Enter the alarm time and press OK . When t he alarm is active , the indicator is shown. The alarm clock works even if the game deck is switched off. T o cancel an alarm, go to clock and select Options > Remove alarm . T urning off the alarm Press Stop to turn off the alarm. When the alarm tone sounds, press any key or Snooze to stop the alarm for five minutes, after which it will resume . Y ou can do this a maximum of five times.
119 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. If the alarm time is reached while the game deck is switched off, the game deck switches itself on and starts sounding the alarm tone. If you press Stop , the game deck asks whether you want to activate the game deck for calls. Press No to switch off the game deck or Ye s to make and receive calls. Do not press Ye s when wireless device use is pr ohibited or when it may cause interference or danger . Notes Press and select Extras > Notes . Y ou can link notes to âÂÂGo toâ and send them to other compatible device s. Plain text files (TXT format) that you receive can be saved to Notes. Press ( â ) to start to write. Press to clear letters. Press Done to save. See Writing text . Applications Y ou can install two types of applications and software to your game deck: ⢠Java⢠applications are installed in Applications . Y our game deck supports J2Micro Edition⢠Java applicat ions with the extension .JAD or .JAR. Do not download P ersonalJava⢠applications to your game deck as they cannot be installed. See Applications (Java â¢) . Example: If you have received the installation file as an e-mail attachment, go to your mailbox, open the e-mail, open the Attachments view , scroll to the installation file, and press to start installation.
120 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. ⢠Symbian applications specifically intended for the Nokia N-Gage QD game deck or suitable for the Symbian operating system. These applications are installed in Manager , and their installation files have the extension .SIS . Se e Installing and removing Symbian software . Installation files may be transferre d to your game deck from a compatible computer , downloaded during browsing, or sent to you in a multimedia message, as an e-mail attachment, or using Bluetooth connectivity . Important: Only install software from sources that offer adequate protection against viruses and other har mful software. During installation, the game deck checks the integrity of the packag e to be installed. The game deck shows inform ation about the checks being carried out, and you are given options whether to continue with or cancel the installation. If you are installing an application with out a digital signature or certification, the game deck displays a warning. Continue installation only if you are sure of the origins and content of the application. Applications (Java ⢠) Installing a Java ap plication Options in the Install view: Install , Del ete , View details , Settings , Help , and Exit . 1 Press and select Extras > Applications . Press to open the Instal l view with a list of Ja va installation files.
121 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 2 Scroll to an installation file and select Options > Install . 3 When the game deck asks whether to install or update the application, press Ye s to proceed with installation. The .JAR file is required for install at ion. If it is missing, the game deck may ask you to download it. If there is no access point defined for Applications, you will be asked to se lect one. When you are downloading the JAR file, you may need to enter a user name and pa ssword to access the server . Y ou obtain these from the supplier or manufacturer of the application. While browsing, you can download an installation file and install it without closing the connection. 4 The game deck informs you when installation is complete. Applications main view Options in the Applications main view: Open , Remove , Update, Go to URL address , View details , Settings , Help , and Exit . ⢠T o start an application, scroll to it and press . ⢠T o uninstall an application, scroll to it and select Options > Remove . ⢠T o start a network connection and to ch eck if there is an update available for the application, scroll to it and select Options > Update . ⢠T o start a network connection and to view extra information about the application, scroll to it and select Options > Go to URL address , if available.
122 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. ⢠T o view information such as the ty pe, version number and the supplier or manufacturer of an application , scroll to it and select Options > View details . Applications settings T o define a default access point for downloading applications and application components, select the Install view and select Options > Settings > Defaul t access point . Some Java applications may require a ne twork connection to be made to a specific access point for downloading extra data or components. In the Applications main view , scroll to an application and select Options > Settings > Settings , and then select: For more information on creating access points, see the Access points . ⢠Access point to select an access point to be used by the application. ⢠Network connection âÂÂThe options are: ⢠Allowed âÂÂConnections for the application are allowed without a notification. ⢠Ask first âÂÂY ou will be asked befo re the application makes a connection. ⢠Not allowed âÂÂConnections for the application are not allowed.
123 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Recorder Options in Recorder: Open , Record sound clip , Delete , Move to devic e mem/ Move to mem. card , Mark /Unmark , Rename sound clip , Send , Add to âÂÂGo toâ , Settings , Help , and Exit . 1 Press and select Extr as > Recorde r . You can record telephone conversations and voice memos, and listen to your recordings. If you are recording a telephone conversation, both parti es will hear a tone every five seconds during recording. 2 Select Options > Reco rd sound clip or Open . Scroll to a function an d press to select it. Us e: âÂÂt o record, âÂÂto pause, âÂÂto stop, â to fast forward, âÂÂto rewind, or âÂÂto pl ay an opened sound file. 3 T o change the volume, press or . Recorder cannot be us ed w hen a data call or a GPRS connection is active.
124 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. To - d o âÂÂtask list 1 Press and select Extr as > To-do . 2 Press any key to start to write the task in the Subject field. ⢠T o set the due date for the task, scroll to the Due date field and key in a date. ⢠T o set a priority for the to-do note, scroll to the Priority field and press . The priority icons are: for High , for Low , and no icon for Normal . 3 T o save the to-do note, press Done . T o mark a task as completed , scroll to it an d select Options > Mark as done () . T o rest ore a task , select Options > Mark as not done () . ConverterâÂÂConverting measures Options in Converter: Sele ct uni t / Change currency , Conversion type , Currency rates , Help , and Exit . 1 T o convert measures such as Lengt h from one unit ( Ya r d s ) to another ( Meters ), press and select Extras > Converter . Note: The Converter has limited accuracy and rounding errors may occur .
125 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 2 Scroll to the Typ e fiel d and press to open a list of measures. Scroll to the measure you want to use and press OK . 3 Scroll to the first Unit field and press . Select the unit from which you want to convert and press OK . Scroll to the next Unit field and select the unit to which you want to c onvert. 4 Scroll to the first Amount field and key in the value you want to convert. The other Amount field changes automatically to show the converted value. 5 Press to add a decimal and press for the , - (for temperature), and E (exponent) symbols. Setting a base currency and exchange rates T o change the conversion order , write the value in the second Amount field. The result is shown in the first Amoun t field. Before you can make currency conver sions, you need to choose a base currency and add exchange rates. The rate of the base currency is always 1. The base currency determines the conv ersion rates of the other currencies. 1 Select Currency as the measure type and select Options > Currency rates . A list of cur rencies opens and you can see the current base currency at the top. 2 T o change the base currency , sc roll to the currency , and select Options > Set as base curr . .
126 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. T o rename a currency , select the Currency rates view , scr oll to the currency , and select Options > Rename currency . Note: When you change the base currency , all previously set exchange rates are set to 0 and you need to key in new rates. 3 Add exchange rates. Scroll to the curre ncy , and key in a new rat e, that is, how many units of the currency equa l one unit of the base currency you have selected. 4 After you have inserted all the need ed exchange rates, you can make currency conversions. Composer Options in the Composer main view: Open , New tone, Del ete , Mark / Unmark , Rename , Duplicate , Help , and Exit . 1 T o create your own, customized ri nging tones, press and select Extras > Composer . Note that it is not poss ible to edit a pre-installed ringing tone. 2 Select Options > New tone to open the editor and to start composing. Use the keys to add notes and rests (see the table below), or select Options > Insert symbol . The default duration for a not e is 1/4. 3 T o listen to the tone, select Options > Play . To adjust the volume select Options > V olume before you start to play the tone. Options when composing are: Play , Insert symbol , Style, Tem po , Vo lume , Help , and Exit .
127 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. ⢠T o adjust the tempo, select Options > T empo . To increase or decrease the tempo gradually , press or , resp ectively . Tempo is measured in beats per minute. ⢠T o apply different pla ying styles, select Options > Style > Legato âÂÂnotes are played in a smooth and even manner or Staccato âÂÂnotes are played separately to produce short sharp sounds. ⢠T o select many notes or rests at the same time, press and hold and press and hold or at the same time. ⢠T o move note(s) up or down on the staff by a half step, scroll to the note and press or . ⢠T o produce C#, press and hold together with . 4 Press Back to sav e the tone.
128 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Key Note Key and function c Shortens the du ration of the selected notes/rests in st eps. d Lengthens the duration of the selected notes/rests in st eps. e Inserts a rest. f Press to open a list of notes and rests. g Switches octaves, a ll selected notes or rests are moved to the next octave. a Deletes selected notes. b A long press of â produces a lengthened (dotted) note or rest or shortens a lengthened note.
129 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Go to Default short cu ts : opens Calendar opens Inbox opens Notes T o select shortcuts, links to your favo rite images, notes, bookmarks, and so on, press and select Extras > Go to . Options in Go to : Open , Edit shortcut name , Move, Grid view , Help , and Exit . Adding shortcuts Shortcuts can be added only from the individual applications, like Images . N ot all applications have this functionality . 1 Open an application. 2 Select the item you want to add as a shortcut. 3 Select Options > Add to Go to . A shortcut in Go to is automatically updated if you move the item it is pointing to, for example, from one folder to another .
130 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Help Y our game deck has a help function that you can access from any application by selecting Options > Help . Example: T o view instructions on how to create a contact card, press and select Extras > Help > Contacts > Cre a ti ng contact cards . Y ou can access the same Help topic when you star t to create a contact card and select Options > Help .
131 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 12. T ools Game manager Options in Game manager main view: File details , Delete , Send, Backup , Restore from card , Mark/Unmark , Settings , He lp , and Exit . Press , and select Tools > Game mgr . to view and manag e game-related files. Y ou can delete files that you no longer need to free memory , send files to other compatible devices using Bluetooth connectivity , and back up and restore files to and from a memory card. ⢠T o view game data file details such as the file type and size, scroll t o the desired file and select Optio ns > File details , or press and to scroll through the details. ⢠T o delete a file, scroll to the file and select Options >Delete . ⢠T o send a file to a compatible device using Bluetooth connectivity , scroll to the file, and select Options >S end >Via Bluetooth . Copy protections may prevent some images, ringing tones, and other content from being copied, modified, transf erred, or forwarded. Some copy-protected files are marked as Not portable in the file details and cannot be used on other devices. P ortable files may be used on other compatible devices.
132 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. ⢠T o change the appearance of Game mana ger and choose how files are grouped and sorted, press Option s > Settings . Grouping and sorting files Y ou can manage game files by groupin g and sorting them in several ways. 1 T o free memory , sort files by size: Select Options > Settings > Sort by > File size . 2 If you want to know which files are the oldest, select Opti ons > Settings > Sort by > Date and time . 3 If you want to see which files belong to one game, select Options > Settings > Sort by > Similar games . Tip: Select Game manager > Style > N-Gage to see two icons on the bottom right of the status bar that show how your files are grouped and sorted. The same icons are used as attributes in the list of files. Press 5 to switch on grouping and sorting, or press 7 to switch off grouping and sorting. Check memory Select Game manage r > St yle > N-Ga ge to check memory l eft on the game deck and the memory card. Icons on the top of the status bar to the right show device memory and memory card memory . The bar at the bottom shows how much memory is free and how much is used.
133 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Information about the device memory is shown when you are in your list of game-related files. Information about the memory on the card is shown when you select Options > Restore from card . Select Style > Stand ar d to show how much memory is still free on your device. Information about free memory on t he card appears in the header when you select Options > Restore from card . Game file types ⢠Game data â Files required to play a game, such as game sounds. ⢠Game extensions â Optional game files, such as extra levels. ⢠User data â Files saved when playing, such as high scores and checkpoints you have reached. Backing up and re storing game data ⢠T o back up game data from your ga me deck memory to a memory card, scroll to the file that you want to back up, and select Options > Backup . ⢠T o restore game data from the memor y card to the game deck memory , select Options > Restore from the card. Scroll to the file that you want to restore, and select Options > Restore .
134 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Manager Installing and removing Symbian software Options in Manager are: View details , View cer tificate , Install , Remove , View log , Send log , Device memory , Help , and Exit . Press , and select Tools > Manager to see the following lists: ⢠Applications and software that you can install (no indicator icon) ⢠Installed applications and software that you can remove, indicated by ⢠Applications and software whose installation was canceled or interrupted, indicated by . Y ou cannot use these applications. Y ou should either remove them or try to re-install them. Forward Call forwarding (network service) 1 T o direct your incoming calls to another number , press , and select T ools > Forward . For details, contact your service provider . 2 Select one of the forward options, for example, If busy , to forward voice calls when your number is busy or when you decline incoming calls. 3 Select Options > Activ ate to set the forward setting on, Cance l to set the forward setting off, Check status to check whether the forward is activated or not, or Cancel all forwards to cancel all active forwards. See Essential indicators in the standby mode .
135 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Y ou can forward calls to your voice mailbox number . Y ou cannot have restrictions on incoming calls and have call forwarding active at the same time. See Call restrictions (network service) . Profiles T o adjust and customize the tones for different events, environments, or cal ler groups, pres s , and select To ols > Profiles . Y ou can see the currently selected profile at the top of the display in the standby mode. If the Normal profile is in use, only the current date is shown. Changing the profile To change the profile (shortcut), press in the standby mode. Scroll to the profile you want to activate, and press OK . Y ou can also use this method: 1 Press , and select Tools > Profiles . A list of profiles opens. 2 In the profiles list, scroll to a profile, and select Options > Activate . Incoming phone calls will sound a ringing tone if set to ring in the profile settings. Offline profil e lets you use the ga me deck without connecting to the GSM wireless network.
136 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. W arning: In the Offline pro file you cannot make any calls, including emergency calls, or use other featur es that require network coverage. When you activate the Offline profile , the game deck restarts, and the GSM is turned off, as indicated by the in the signal strength indicator . Al l GSM wireless phone signals to and from the device are prevented. Note: There may be restrictions on using Bluetooth devices in some locations. Check with your local authorities or service provider . To leave the Offline profile , select some other profile, and Options > Activate . > Ye s . The game deck restarts an d re-enables GSM wireless transmissions (providing there is sufficient signal strength). If Bluetooth connectivity is turned off as a result of entering the Offline profile you must re-enable Bluetooth connectivity manually . See Bluetooth settings . Customizing profiles 1 T o modify a profile, scroll to the profil e in the profiles list, and select Options > Customize . A list of profile settings opens. 2 Scroll to the setting you want to change, and press to open the choices: Ringin g to ne â To set th e ringing tone fo r voice calls, choose a ringing tone from the list. T ones stored on a memory card have the icon next to the tone name.
137 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. When you scroll through the ringing tone list, you can stop on a tone to listen to it before you make your selection. Press any key to stop the sound. Y ou can change ringing tones in two places: Profiles or Contacts . Se e Adding a ringing tone for a contact card or group . Ringing options â When Ascending is selected, the ringing volume starts from level one and increases level by level to the set volume level. Sound volume â To set the volume level for the ringing and message alert tones. Message alert tone â To set the tone for messages. Vibrating al ert â T o set the game deck to vibrate at incoming voice calls and messages. Key p a d t on e s â T o set the volume level for keypad tones. W a rn ing tones â The game deck sounds a warning tone, for example, when the battery is runn ing out of power . Alert fo r â To set the game deck to ring only upon calls from phone numbers that belong to a selected contact group. Phone calls coming from people outside the selected grou p will have a silent alert. The choices are All calls (list of contact groups, if you hav e created them). See Creating contact groups . Profile name â T o rename a profile. The Normal and Offline profiles cannot be renamed.
138 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Settings Changing settings 1 Press , and select T ools > Settings . 2 Scroll to a setting group, and press to open it. 3 Scroll to a setting you want to change, and press . Device settings General Game auto-start â To allow a game to start automatically when a compatible read-only game card is inserted in the game deck, select On . Device l anguage â Changing the language of th e display texts in your game deck will also affect the format used for date and time and the separators used, for example, in calculations. Automatic selects the language according to the information on your SIM card. After you have changed the display text language, the game deck restarts. Changing the settings for Device language or Writing language affects every application in your game deck, and the change remains effective until you change these settings again. Writing language â Changing the language affects the characters and special characters available when wr iting text and the predictive text dictionary used.
139 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Predicti ve text â T o set the predictive text input On or Off for all editors in the game deck. The predictive text dictionary is not available for all languages. W elcome note or logo â The welcome note or logo is displayed briefly each time you switch on th e game deck. Select Default to use the default image, Te x t to write a welcome note (up to 50 letters), or Image to select a photo or picture from Images . Orig. device settings â Y ou can reset some of the settings to their original values. T o do this, you need the lock c ode. After resetting the settings, the game deck may take a longer time to power on. See PIN code/PIN2 code/Lock code . All documents and files that you ha ve created are left a s they are. Standby mode W allpap er â Select Ye s to set a background image for the standby mode. Left sele ct ion k ey and Right sele ct ion key â To c hange the shortcuts that appear over the left and right selection keys in the standby mode. Note that you cannot have a sh ortcut to an application that you have installed.
140 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Display brightness To change the Color palette â T o change the color palette used on the display . Screen saver ti me-out â The screen sa ver is activated after the time-out period is over . The screen saver changes to indicate the number of new messages or missed calls. Screen saver â Select what is shown on the screen saver bar: Date and time or Tex t that you have written. Call settings Send my caller ID (network service) â T o set your phone number to be displayed ( Ye s ) or hidden ( No ) fr om the person whom you are call ing. The value may be set by your network op erator or service provider when you subscribe ( Set by network ). Call waiting (network service) â Select Activate to request the network to activate call waiting, Cancel to request the n etwork to deactivate call waiting, or Check status to check if the function is active or not. T o change the settings for ca ll forwarding, press , and select Tools > Call forward . See Call forwarding (network service) . Automati c redial â Se lect On and yo ur game deck will make a maximum of 1 0 attempts to connect the call afte r an unsuccessful call attempt. Press to stop automatic redialing.
141 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Summary after call â Activate this setting if you want the game deck to briefly display the duration of the last call. To show costs, the Call cost limit needs to be activated for your SIM card. See Call costs (network service) . 1-touch dialing â Select On , and the numbers assigned to the 1-touch dialing keys ( â ) can be dialed by pressing and holding the key . Anykey answer â Select On , and you can answer an incoming call by briefly pressing any key , except , , and . Line in use (network service) â This setting is shown only if the SIM card supports two subscriber numbers, that is, two phone lines. Select which phone line you want to use for making calls and sending text messages. Call s on both lines can be answered irre spective of the selected line. T o prevent line selection, select Line change > Disable if supported by your SIM card. T o change this setting, you need the PIN2 code . T o switch between the phone lines, pr ess and hold in the standby mode. Y ou will not be able to make calls if you select Line 2 and have not subscribed to this network serv ice. Connection settings A GSM data c all enables data transmission ra tes to a maximum of 14.4 Kb/s.
142 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. About data connections and access points Y our game deck supports two kinds of data connections: a GSM data call ( ) and GPRS connection ( ). See also Essential indicators in the standby mode . A data connection is required to connect to an access point. There are three different kinds of access points that you can define: ⢠MMS access point to send an d receive multimedia messages ⢠Access point for W eb to view WML or XHTML pages ⢠Internet ac cess point (IAP) to send and receive e-mail or use N-Gage Arena for games services. See N-Gage QD Arena launcher . Check with your service provider to determine the kind of an access point needed for the service you wi sh to ac cess. For availability and subscription to data call and GPRS connection servic es, contact your network operator or service provider . Most se tting are available on http://support.n-gage.com and can be sent to your game deck as a text message. Settings to mak e a data call T o insert a set of very basic GSM data call settings, select Tools > Settings > Connection > Access poin ts > Options > New access point . Fill in the following information: Data bearer: Data call, Dial-up number: obtained from service provider , User name, Data call type: Analog , and Maximum data speed: Automatic . Settings to make a GPRS connection Y ou need to subscribe to the GPRS serv ice. For availability and subscription to GPRS, contact your network operator or service provider .
143 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Select Too ls > Settings > Con n ection > Access points > Options > New access point . Fill in the following information: Data bearer: GPRS and Access point name: ( enter the name given to you by your service provider). See Creating an access point . Pricing for GPRS and appl ications The settings wizard program included in the PC Suite for Nokia N-Gage QD can help you to configure access point and mailbox settings. Y ou can also copy existing settings, for example, from your compatible computer to your game deck. See the CD-ROM supplied in the sales package. Both the active GPRS connection and th e applications used over GPRS require a fee, for example, when using services , sending and receiving data, and text messages. For more detailed informatio n on fees, contact your network operator or service provider . See also GPRS counter . Creating an access point Y ou may receive access point settings in a smart message from a service provider , or you may have preset access point settings in your game deck. Y ou can also receive settings from http://supp ort.n-gage.com . See Receiving smart messages . To create a new a ccess point, select Tool s > Settings > Connection > Access points .
144 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. If you already have access points , to create a new one, select Options > New access point > Us e default settings or Use existing settings , make the needed changes, and press Back to save the settings. Options in Access points list ar e: Edit , New access point , Delete , Help , and Exit . Access points Start to fill in the settings from the top because depending on what data connection you select ( Data bearer ) or whether you need to insert a Gateway IP address , only certain setting fields are avail able. Options when editing access point settings are: Change , Advanced se ttings , Help , and Exit . Follow the instructions given to you by your service provider . Connection name â Give a descriptive name for the connection. Data bearer â Depending on what data connection you select, only certain setting fields are available. Fill in all fields marked with Must be defined or with a red asterisk. Other fields can be left empty , unless you have been instructed otherwise by your service provider . T o be able to use a da ta connection, the network service provider must support this feature, and if necessar y , activate it for your SIM card. Access point name (for GPRS only) â The access point name is needed to establish a connection to the GPRS ne twork. Y ou obtain the access point name from your network operator or service provider .
145 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Dial-up number (for GSM data and high speed data only) â The modem telephone number of the access poi nt. This option is shown when Data call is selected as the Data bearer . See also Settings needed for multimedia messaging , Settings needed for e-mail , and Basic steps for accessing W eb . User name â The user name may be needed to make a data connection and is usually provided by the service provider . The user name is often case-sensitive. Prompt password â If you must key in a new password every time you log on to a server , or if you do not want to save your password to the game deck, choose Ye s . Pa s s w o r d â A password may be needed to make a data connection, and is usually provided by the service provider . The passwo rd is of ten case-sensitive. Authen tication â Normal / Secure . Homepage â Depending on what you are setting up, write either the service address, or the address of the multimedia messaging center . Gateway IP address â The IP address that the required W AP gateway uses. Connection security â Choose whether transport laye r security (TLS) is used for the connection. Use the TLS protocol anytime you need to connect to a secure site, for example, your bank, or an online merchant.
146 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Data call type (for GSM data) - Defines whet her the game deck uses an analog or digital connection. This setting depends on both your GSM network operator and Internet Service Provider (ISP), because some GSM networks do not support certain types of ISDN connections. For details, contact your ISP . ISDN connections are a way to establis h a data call between your game deck and your access point. ISDN connection s are digital from end to end and as such offer quicker set- up times and faster data rates than analog connections. Maximum data speed â The options for GSM data depend on what you have chosen in Session mode and Data cal l type . Network conditions can affect operating speed of your connection. Advanced settings DNS - domain name service. is an Inte rnet service that translates domain names such as www .nokia.com into IP addresses like 192.1 00. 124.195 Device IP address â The IP address of your game deck. Primary name server is the IP address of the primary DNS server . Second. name server is the IP address of the secondary DNS server . If you need to enter the Device IP address , Primary name server , or Second. name server , contact your Internet service provider to obtain these addresses.
147 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. The following settings are sh own if you have selected GSM data as the Data bearer when starting to create the access point: Use callback â This option allows a server to call you back once you have made the initial call. Contact your service provider to subscribe to this service. Callback type â Ask your service provider for the correct setting to use. Callback number â Ke y in your game deck data phone number which the dial back server uses. Usually this number is the data call phon e number of your game deck. Use PPP compression â When set to Ye s , this option speeds up the data transfer , if supported by the remote PPP server . If you have problems with establishing a connection, try setting this to No . Contact your service provider for guidance. T o insert a l ogin script, select Use login script > Y es . Insert the login script in Login script . PPP (point-to-point protocol) is a common networking software protocol that enables any computer with a modem and a phone line to connect directly to the Internet. Modem ini tialization â Modem initialization string controls your game deck using modem A T commands. If required, enter characters specified by your GSM network service provider or Internet service provider .
148 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. GPRS The GPRS settings affect all access points using a GPRS connection. GPRS connection â If you select When available and you are in a n etwork that supports GPRS, the game deck regis ters to the GPRS network and sending text messages will be done using G PRS. Also, starting an active GPRS connection is quicker , for example, to se nd and r eceive e-mail If you select When needed , the game deck will use a GPRS connection only if yo u start an application or action that needs i t. If there is no GPRS coverage and you have chosen When available , the game deck will periodically try to establish a GPRS connection. Access point â The access point name is needed when you want to use your game deck as a GPRS modem to your computer . Data call The data call settings affect all access poin ts using a data call. Online time â If there are no actions, the data call is dropped automatically after a time-out period. The options are User defined (you enter a time) or Unlimited . Date and time The date and time settings allow you to define the date and time used in your game deck, as well as change the date and time fo rmat and separators. Select Clock type > Analog or Digital to change the clock shown in th e standby
149 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. mode. Select Auto time update if you want the mobile phone network to update time, date, and time zone info rmation to your game deck (network service). For the Auto time update setting to take effect , the game deck rest arts. Security Device and SIM PIN (personal identification number) code (4 to 8 digits) protects your SIM card against unauthorized use. The PIN code is usually suppl ied with the SIM card. After three consecutive incorrect PIN code entries, the PIN code is blocked, and you must unblock it before you can use the SIM card again. See the information about the PUK code. PIN2 code (4 to 8 digits) supplied with some SI M cards, is required to access some functions, such as call cost counters. Lock code (5 digits) can be used to lock the game deck to avoid unauthorized use. The factory setting for the lock c ode is 12345 . To avoid unauthorized use of your game deck, change the lock code. Ke ep the new code secret and in a safe place separate from your game deck. PUK (personal unblocking key) and PUK2 codes (8 digits) are required to change a blocked PIN code or PIN2 c ode, respectively . If the codes are not supplied with the SIM card, contact the operator whose SIM card is in your game deck.
150 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. The PUK and PUK2 codes are not seen in the menu unless the PIN or PIN2 code is blocked. PIN code request When active, the code is requested each time the game deck is switched on. Deactivating the PIN code request may not be allo wed by some SIM cards. PIN code/PIN2 code/Lock code Y ou can change the lock code, PIN code , and PIN2 code . These codes can only include the numbers from 0 to 9 . Avoid using access codes similar to the emergency numbers, such as 9 1 1, to prevent accidental dialing of the emergency number . Autolock period Y ou can set an autolock period, a time -out after which the game deck is automatically locked, that is used only if the correct lock code is entered. Key in a number for the time-out (in minutes), or select None to turn off the autolock period. T o lock the game deck manually , pres s . A list of commands opens. Select Lock device . Lock keys appears in the list of commands after Lock device . Locking the keys does not require a code. Select Lock device to make sure yo ur game deck is secure. T o unlock the game deck, key in the lock code.
151 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Note: When the game deck is locked, calls may be possible to the emergency number programed into your game deck (for example, 9 1 1). Lock if SIM change d The game deck maintains a list of SIM cards th at are recognized as the ownerâ s cards. Set the game deck to ask for the lock code when a new SIM card is inserted into your game deck. Closed user group (network service) T o specify a group of people to whom you can call and who can call you, sel ect Default to activate the specified group with the network operator , On to use another group (you need to know the group index number), or Off . Note: When calls are limited to Clos ed User Groups, calls may be possible to certain emergency numbers in some networks (f or example, 9 1 1). Confirm SIM services (netw o rk se rvice) Set the game deck to display confirma tion messages when you are using a SIM card service. Certificate management Options in Certificate management are: Certificate details , Delete , Tru s t settings , Mark/Un mark , Help , and Exit . Digital certificates are used to verify the origin of the XHTML o r WML pages and installed software. However , they can only be trusted if the origin of the certificate is known to be authentic.
152 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. In the Certificate management main view , you can see a list of authority certificates that have been stored in your game deck. Pr ess to see a list of personal certificates, i f available. Digital certificates should be used if yo u want to connect to an online bank or another site or remote server fo r actions that involve transferring confidential information, or want to re duce the risk of viruses or other malicious software and be sure of the authenticity of software when downloading and installing software. The existence of a certificate does not offer any protection by itself; the certificate manager must contain correct , authentic, or trusted certificates for increased security to be available. Certificate details and authenticity Y ou can only be sure of the correct identity of a W AP gateway or a server when the signature and the period of validity of a gateway or server certificate have been checked. Y ou will be notified on the game deck display if the identity of the server or gateway is not auth entic, or if you do no t have the correct security certificate in your game deck. T o check certificate details, scr oll to a certificate, and select Options > Certificate details . When you open certificate details, Certificate manage ment checks the validity of the certificate and one of the following notes may appear:
153 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. ⢠Certificate not trusted â Y ou have not set any application to use the certificate. See âÂÂChanging the trust settingsâ . ⢠Expired certificate â The period of validity has ended for the selected certificate. ⢠Certificate not valid yet â The period of validity has not yet begun for the selected certificate. ⢠Certificate corrupted â The c ertificate cannot be used. Contact the certificate issuer . Certificates have a restricted lifetime. If Expired certifi cate or Certificate not valid yet is shown, even if the certific ate should be valid, check that the current date and time in your game deck are correct. Changing the tr ust setting s Scroll to an authority certificate, and select Option s > Tru st settings . Depending on the certificate, a list of the applications that can use the selected certificate is shown and include the following: Services: Y es â the certificate is able to certify sites. Application manager: Y es â the certificate is able to certify the origin of new soft ware. Internet: Y es â the certificate is able to certify e-mail and imaging servers. Important: Before changing these settings, you must make sure that you trust the owner of the certificate and that the certificate belongs to the listed owner .
154 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Network A roaming agreement is an agreement between two or more network service providers to enable the users of one se rvice provider to us e the services of other service providers. Network selection â Select Autom atic to set the game deck to search for , and select one of the networks available, or Ma nual to select the netw ork manually from a list of networks. If th e connection to the manually selected network is lost, the game deck will sound an error tone and ask you to select a network again. The selected network must h ave a roaming agreement with your home network, that is, the operato r whose SIM card is in your g ame deck. Cell info display â Select On to set the game deck to indicate when it is used in a cellular network based on micro cellular network (MCN) technology and to activate cell info reception. Enhancement settings Indicators shown in the standby mode: A headset is connected. A loopset is connected. Enhancement in use â Select the enhancement you are using. Headset/ Loopset/ TTY/ Handsfree â Select Default profile to set the profile you want to be activated each time when you connect a certain enhancement to your game deck. See Profiles . Select Au tomatic answ er to set the game deck to answer an incoming call automatically after 5 seconds. If the Ringing options is set to Beep once or Silen t , automatic answer cannot be in use.
155 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Log Call log and general log T o view a list of sent messages, press , and select Messaging > Sent . T o monitor phone calls, text messages, or data connections registered by the game deck, press , select Log , and press . Y ou can filter the general log to view just one type of event, an d create new contact cards based on the log information. Connections to your remote mailbox, mu ltimedia messaging center , or XHTML or WML pages are shown as data calls or GPRS connections in the general communications log. When you see a note in the standby mode about missed calls, press Show to access the list of missed calls. T o call back, scroll to a name or number , and press . Indicators shown in the standby mode: incoming calls outgoing calls missed communication events T o open the general log, press , select Tools > Log , and press . In the general log, for each communication event, you can see the sender or recipient name, phone number , name of the service pr ovider , or access point.
156 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Recent calls register T o monitor the phone numbers of misse d, received, and dialed calls, press , and select Tools > Log > Recent call s . The game deck registers missed and received calls only if the network supports these functions, and when the game deck is on and located wi thin the network serv ice area. Erasing recent call lists To clear all recent call lists, select Options > Clear recent calls in the recent calls main view . To clear one of the call logs, open the regist er you want to erase, and select Options > Clear list . T o clear an individual event, open a register , scroll to the event, and press . Call duration If you want to see the call duration time r while you have an active call, select Options > Settings > Show call durati on > Y es. T o monitor the approximate duration of your incoming and outgoing calls, press , and select T ools > Log > Call timers . Note: The actual time invoiced for calls by your service provider may vary , depending upon network features, rounding-off fo r billing, and so forth. Clearing call duration timers Select Options > Clear timers . For this activity , you need the lock code. See Security . T o clear an individual event, scroll to it, and press .
157 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Call cost limit is the pr eset credit limit. Calls can only be made as long as that limit is not exceeded and you are in a n etwork that supports call cost limit. The number of r emaining units is show n during a call and in the standby mode. When the charging units have expired, Call cost limit reached is displayed. Call costs (netw ork service) T o check the cost of t he last call or all calls, press , and select T ools > Log > Call costs . The call costs are displaye d separately for each SIM card. Note: The actual invoice for calls and services from your service provider may vary , depending upon network featur es, rounding-off for billing, taxes, and so forth. Call costs limit set by a service provider Y our service provider can limit the cost of your calls to a certain amount of charging units or currency . Contact your service provider for information on the limited charging mode and charging unit prices. T o change the Show costs in setting, you may need the PIN2 code. Setting a call cost limit for yourself 1 Select Options > Settings > Call cost limit > On . 2 Enter the limit in units. For this you may need the PIN2 code. When the charging limit you have set yourself is reached, the counter stops at its maximum value, and Re set all ca lls' cost coun ter is displayed.
158 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 3 T o be able to make calls, select Options > Settings > Call cost limit > Off . For this you need the PIN2 code. Clearing call cost counters Select Options > Cl ear c ounters . For this you need the PIN2 code. T o clear an individual event, scroll to it, and press . Note: When no more charging units or currency units are left, calls may only be possible to the emergency number programed into your game deck (for example, 9 1 1). GPRS counter T o check the amount of data sent an d received during GPRS connections, press , and select Tools > Log > GPRS counter . For example, you may be charged for your GPRS connections by the amount of data sent and received. Subevents, such as a te xt message sent in more than one part and GPRS connections are logged as one communication event. Note: When sending messages, your game deck may display Sent . This is an indication that the message has been sent by your game deck to the message center number programed into your game deck. This is not an indication that the message has been received at the intended destination. For more details about messaging services, check with your service provider . T o filter the log, select Optio ns > Filt er . Scroll to a filter , and press Select .
159 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. T o erase all the log contents, recent calls register , and messaging delivery reports permanently , select Options > Clear log . Press Ye s to confirm. GPRS coun ter and conn ection time r T o view how much data, measured in kilobytes, has been tr ansferred and how long a certain GPRS connection has lasted , scroll to an incoming or outgoing event with the access point icon , and select Options > View details . Log settings Select Options > Settings . Log duration â The log events remain in the game deck memory for a set number of days after which they are automatically erased to free memory . For Call duration , Show costs in , Call cost limit , see Call duration and Call costs (network se rvice) . Note: If you select No log , all the log contents, recent calls register , and messaging delivery reports are permanently deleted. V oice mail Calling your voice mail box (network service) T o call your voice mailbox, press and hold in the standby mode. If the game deck asks for the voice mailbox nu mber (obtained from your service provider), key it in, and press OK . See Call forwarding (network service) . Each phone line may have its own voice mailbox number .
160 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Bluetooth connection Note: The Nokia N-Gage game deck is compliant with and adopts Bluetooth Specifica tion 1.1. However , interoperability between the game deck and other products wi th Bluetooth wireless technology is not guaranteed and depends on compatibility . For more information on the compatibility between Bluetoot h devices, please review each product's user information or check with the manufacturer . Bluetooth connectivity in the Nokia N-Ga ge QD can be used in device-to-PC connectivity (dial-up or data synchron ization) and object exchange between two enabled terminals (business cards, images, and game playing). Bluetooth profiles supported by the Nokia N-Gage QD are: ⢠generic access profile ⢠serial port profile ⢠dial-up networking profile ⢠fax profile ⢠generic object exchange profile ⢠object push profile ⢠file transfer profile ⢠hands-free profile
161 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Bluetooth connectivity enables cost-free wireless connections for playing games, sending images, texts, or to connect wire lessly to other compatible devices with Bluetooth technology . Since Bluetooth devices communicate using radio waves, your game deck, and the other Bluetooth device do not need to be in direct line-of-sight. The two devices only need to be within a radius of 32 feet (1 0 meters), although the connection can be subject to interference fro m obstructions such as walls or from other electronic devices. Using Bluetooth connectivity consumes t he battery and the game deck operating time will be re duced. Take this into account when performing other operations with your game deck. There may be restrictions on using Bluetooth devices. Check with your local authorities. Press , and select Tools > Bluetooth . Y ou are asked to give a name to you device. Bluetooth settings Bluetooth â Select On or Off . My device's visibilit y â Select Shown to all so your game deck can be found by other Bluetooth devices, or Hidden so your game deck cannot be found by other devices. My deviceâÂÂs name â Define a name for your game deck.
162 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. When searching for devi ces, some devices may show only the unique addresses (device addresse s). To find out what the unique address of your game deck is, enter *#2820# in the standby mode. After you have activated Bluetooth connectivity and changed My device's visibility to Sho wn to all , your game deck and this na me can be seen by other Bluetooth device users. Sending data using Bluetooth connectivity There can be only one active Bluetooth connection at a t ime. Icons for different Bluetoot h connectivity dev ices are: Computer Phone Headset Carkit Other Unknown 1 Open an application where the item you wish to send is stored. For example, to send an image to another compatible device, open the Images application. 2 Select the item (for example, an image), and Options > Send > Via Bluetooth.
163 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. T o send text using Bluetooth connecti vity (instead of text messages), select Notes , write the text, and select Options > Send > via Bluetooth . The game deck starts to search for devices within range. Enabled devices that are within range start to appear on the display one by one. Y ou can see a device icon, the deviceâ s name, the device type, or a short name. 3 T o interrupt the search, press Stop . Th e device list freez es, and you can start to form a c onnection to one of the devices already found. If you have searched for Bluetooth co nnectivity devices earlier , a list of the devices that were fo un d previously is shown first. To start a new search, select More devices . If you switch off the game deck, the list is cleared. 4 Scroll to the device with which you want to connect, and press Sel ect . 5 P airing (if not required by th e other device, see s tep 6). P airing means authentication. The us ers of the enabled devices should agree together what the passcode is and use the same passcode for both devices in order to pair them. Device s that do not have a user interface have a factory set passcode. ⢠If the other device requires pairing before data can be transmitted, a tone sounds, and you are asked to enter a passcode. ⢠Create your own passcode (1âÂÂ16 numer ic characters), and agree with the owner of the other Bluetooth devi ce to us e th e same code. A passcode is used only once.
164 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. ⢠After pairing, the device is saved to the paired devices view . 6 When the connection has been established, Sending data is shown. If sending fails, the message or data will be delete d. The Drafts folder in Messaging does not store messages sent using Bluetooth connectivity . Check the status of the Bluetoot h connection by looking for these indicators: When is shown in the standby mode, Bluetooth connectivity is active. When is blinking, your game deck is trying to connect to the other device. When is shown continuously , the Bluetooth connection is act ive. P airing devices T o define a short name (nickname or alias) t o help you recognize a certain device during device search or when a device is requesting a connection, scroll to the device, and select Options > Assign short name in the paired devices view . P aired devices are ea sier to recogn ize because, th ey are indicated by in the device search. In the Bluetooth main view , press to open a list of paired devices ( ). ⢠T o pair with a device, select Options > New paired device . The game deck starts a device search. Scr oll to the device, and press Se lec t . Exchange passcodes, see step 5 (P airing).
165 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. ⢠T o cancel a pairing, scr oll to the device, and select Options > Delete . If you want to cancel all pairings, select Options > Delete all . Note: If you are currently connected to a device and delete the pairing with that device, pairing is removed immediately b ut the connection will remain active. ⢠T o set a device to be authorized or unauthorized, scroll to a device, and select Options > Set as authorized . Connections between your game deck and this device can be made wi thout your knowledge. No separate acceptance or authorization is needed. Use this status for your own devices, for example, your PC or devi ces that belong to someone you trust. The icon is added next to authorized devices in the P aired devices view . Set as unauthorized requires that connection requests from this device must be accepted se parately every time. Receiving data using Bluetooth connectivity When you receive data using Bluetooth connectivity , a tone sounds, and you are asked if you want to accept the me ssage. If you accept, is shown, and the item is placed in the Inbox folder in Messaging . Messages sent through Bluetooth connectivity are indicated by . See Inbox . Disconnecting Bluetooth A Bluetooth connection is disconnected automatically after sending or receiving data.
166 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Connecting your game deck to a computer For further information on how to insta ll the PC Suite for Nokia N-Gage, make a connection to a compatible computer us ing Bluetooth connectivity , and use the PC Suite for Nokia N-Gage QD, see the Installation G uide for PC Sui te on the CD-RO M in the âÂÂInsta llâ section and the PC suite Help . Using the CD-ROM The CD-ROM launches itself after you have inserted it into the CD-ROM drive of your compatible PC. If not, proc eed as follows: Open Windows Explorer , right-click the CD-ROM drive, and select Autorun. Memory Many features of the game deck co nsume memory as they store data. These features include games, conta cts , messages, images and r inging tones, calendar and to-do notes, documents, and downloaded applications. The amount of free memory ava ilable depends on how much data is already saved on the game deck memory . Y ou can use a memory card as extra storage space. Memory cards are rewritable, so you can delete and save data on a memory card. If the game deck memory is getting low , you can mov e different files to a memory card. Y ou canno t save an y data on a game card as they are read-only . Game cards contain data that cannot be overwritten.
167 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. View memory consumption T o view what kind of data you have in the game deck and how much memory the different data groups consume, select T ool s > Manager > Options > Device memory . Select Fr ee me mory to view the amount of free memory in the game deck. If you have a memory card inserted in the game deck, select Tools > Memory > Options > Memory details to view the memory consumption of different data groups and the amount of free memory on the card. Free memory Installing many games or saving many images can use a large amount of the available memory . The game deck notifies you when memory is getting low . In this case, additional data may not be saved until you delete some of the games, images, or other entries to free memory . T o avoid memory getting low , you should regularly delete or tr ansfer data to a memory card. Y ou can delete contact information, ca lendar notes, call timers, call cost timers, game scores, or an y other data. Select the respective application to remove the data.
168 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Other items that you can delete to free memory are as follows: ⢠Installed applications that are no longer required ⢠Messages from the inbox, drafts, and sent folders in Messaging ⢠Retrieved e -mail messages from the game deck memory ⢠Saved game data in Game manager ⢠Saved XHTML or WML pages and images in Images Memory card tool Options in Memory card are: Backup device mem. , Format mem. card , Memory card name , Set password , Memory details , Help , and Exit . The memory card tool is valid only fo r the MMC cards (not game cards). Press , and select To ol s > M e mo r y . Y ou can use a memory card to stor e your downloaded games and applications. Y ou can also back up information from your game deck memory , and restor e the information to the game deck later . See Inserting a game or memory card , and Ejecting a memory card . W arning: Ke ep all memory cards out of the reach of small children. Important: Do not remove the card in the middle of an operation when the indicator is blinking. Before inserting or removing a memory card, save all unsaved data. All applications are closed when inserting or removing the card. Removing the card in the middle of an operation may cau se data loss, or the card may become corrupted.
169 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Note: Use only compatible multimedia cards (MMC) with this device. Other memory cards, such as secure digital (SD) cards, do not fit in the MMC card slot and are not compat ible with this device. Using an incompatible memory card may damage the memory card as well as the device, and data stored on the incompatible card may be corrupted. Format a memory card When a memory card is formatted, all data on the card is permanently lost. Some memory cards are su pplied pref ormatted, while others require formatting. Consult your retailer to find out if you must format the memory card before you can use it. Select Options > Format mem. card > Ye s to confirm. When formatting is complete, key a name for th e memory card, and press OK . T o rename a memory card, select Options > Memory card name in Memory card . Back up and restore information on a memory card ⢠T o backup information from your game deck memory to a memory card, select Options > Backup device mem. ⢠T o restore information from the memory card to the game deck memory , select Options > Res tor e from card .
170 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Lock the memory card Y ou can set a password to protect your memory card against unauthorized use. The password is stored in your game deck, and you do not have to enter it again while you are using the memory ca rd on the same game deck. If you want to use the memory card on another game deck, you will be asked for the password. Select Options > Set password, Change password , or Remove password . For every option you are asked to enter and confirm your password (up to 8 characters). Important: Once the password is removed, the memory card is unlocked and can be used on anot her game deck without a password. Unlocking a memory card If you insert another password protecte d memor y card in your game deck, you will be prompted to enter the password of the card. T o unlock the card, select Options > Unlock m emory card .
171 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. 1-touch dialing 1-touch dialing is a quick way to call frequently called numbers. Y ou can assign 1-touch dialing keys to eight phone numbers. 1 Press , select T ools > 1-touch , and assign a phone number to one of the 1-touch dialing keys ( â ). Number 1 is reserved for the voice mailbox. 2 Select T ools > Settings > Call , and set 1-touch dialing to On . 3 T o call in the standby mode, press and hold the 1-touch dialing key until the call is started. SIM directory Options in the SIM directory are Open , Call, New SIM contact, Edit , Delete , Copy to Contacts , My numbers , SIM details , Help , and Exit . For availability , rates, and information on using SIM services, contact your SIM card vendor , for example, your ne twork operator , or service provider . Press , and select T o ols > SIM dir ectory to see the names an d numbers stored on the SIM card. In SIM directory you can add, edit , or copy numbers to Contacts , and you can make calls. T o access additional services that yo ur SIM card may provide, press , and select Tools . Se e also: Copying contacts between the SIM card and device memory , Confirm SIM services (netwo rk service) , Memory card tool , and Viewing messages on a SIM card .
172 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Fixed dial Options in Fixed dialing are Open , Call , New contact, Edit, Delete , Add to Contacts , Add from Contacts , Help , and Exit . Y ou can restrict outgoing calls to se lected phone numbers if supported by your SIM card. Y ou need the PIN2 code for this function. When this function is active, you can only call those phone numbers that are included in the fixed dialing list or begin with the same digits as a phone number on the list. Note: When Fixed Dialing is set on, calls may be possible to certain emergency numbers in some ne tworks (for example, 9 1 1). T o view the list of fixed dialin g numbers, press , and select T ools > Fixed dialing . To add new numbers to the fixed dialing list, select Options > New contact or Add from Contacts .
173 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Call restrictions (network service) Call restrictions allows you to restrict the making and receiving of calls with your game deck. For this function, you need the restriction password from your service provider . Call restriction affects all calls, including data calls. Y ou cannot have restriction of incoming calls and call forwarding or have fixed dialing active at the same time. See Call forwarding (network service) Fixed dial . ⢠Scroll to one of the restriction options, and select Options > Activate to request the network to se t call restriction on, Cancel to set the selected call restriction off, or Check status to chec k if the calls are restricted or not. ⢠Select Options > Edit restric tions passw . to change the restriction password. ⢠Select Options > Cancel all re strictions to cancel all active call restrictions. Note: When calls are restricted, ca lls may be possible to certain emergency numbers in some ne tworks (for example, 9 1 1).
174 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Reference Information Battery information Charging and disch arging Y our game deck is po wered by a rechargeable bat tery . The full performance of a new battery is achieved only af ter two or three complete charge and dis charge cycles. T he battery can be charged and discharged hundre ds of times but it will eventually wear out. When the talk and standby times are noticeably sh orter th an normal, buy a new battery . Use only Nokia approved batteri es, an d recharge your battery only with Nokia approved chargers designated for this g ame deck. Unplug the charger from the electrical plug an d the game deck when not in use . Do not leave the battery connected to a charger . Ov ercharging may shorten its lifetime . If left unused, a fully charged battery will lose its charge over time. Temperature e xtremes can affect the ability of your battery to charge. Use the battery only for its in tended purpose. Never use any charger or battery that is damaged. Do not sh ort-circu it the battery . Accidental short-circuiting can occu r when a metallic object such as a coin, clip, or pen causes direct connection of the positive ( ) and negative (-) terminals of the battery . (These look like metal strips on the battery .) This might happen, for example, when you carry a spare battery in your pocket or purse. Short-circuiting the terminals may dama ge the battery or the connecting object. Leaving the battery in hot or cold places, such as in a closed car in summer or winter conditions, will reduce the capacity and lifet ime of the battery . Always try to keep the battery between 59ðF and 77ðF (15ð C and 25ðC). A game deck with a hot or col d battery may not work temporarily , even when the battery i s fully charged. Battery performance is particularly limited in temperatures well below freezing.
175 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Do not dispo se of batteries in a fire ! Dispose of bat teries according to local regulations. Please recycle when possible. Do not dispose as household waste. Enhancements A few practical rules about a ccessories and enhance ments: ⢠Keep all accessories and enhancements out of the reach of small children. ⢠When you disconnect the power cord of a ny accessory or enhancement, grasp and pull the pl ug, not the cord. ⢠Check regularly that enhancements inst alled in a vehicle are mounted and are operating properly . ⢠Installation of any complex car enhanc ements must be made by qualified personnel only . If you want to enhance phone functionality , a range of enhancements are available for you. Y ou can select any of these item s to help accommodate your specific communication needs. For availability of these and other e nhancements, contact your dealer . Miscellaneous â¢N - G a g e g a m e c a r d s ⢠X-press-o n TM Cover (Black, Light Blue) ⢠Carry cases ⢠Phone adapter (HDA-9) Po w e r ⢠Extended 1 0 7 0 mAh Li-Ion Battery (BL-6C) ⢠Travel charger (ACP-12)
176 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. ⢠Mobile charger (LCH-12) Car ⢠Wireless car kit (CK-1W) ⢠Headrest handsfree (BH F-2) ⢠Hands free microphone (HFM-8) Audio ⢠Dual mono headset (HS-7) ⢠Wireless clip-on headset (HS-3W) â¢H e a d s e t k i t ( H D C - 5 ) ⢠Loopset (LPS- 3)
177 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. CARE AND MAINTENANCE Y our game deck is a product of superior design and craftsmanship and should be treated with care. The suggestions below wi ll help you protect yo ur warranty coverage and enjoy your device for many years. ⢠Keep the game deck and all its part s and enhancements out of the reach of small children. ⢠Keep the game deck dry . Precipitat ion, humi dity , and all types of liquids or moisture can contain minerals that will corrode electronic circuits. If yo ur device does get wet, remove the batte ry and allow th e devi ce to dry completely before replacing it. ⢠Do not us e or store the game deck in dusty , dirty areas. Its moving p arts and electronic components can be damaged. ⢠Do not st ore the game deck in hot areas. High temperatures can shorte n the life of electronic devices, damage batteries, and warp or melt certain plastics. ⢠Do not store the game deck in cold area s. When it warm s up (to its normal temperature), moisture can form inside which may damage electronic circuit boards. ⢠Do n ot attemp t to open the game d eck ot her than as instructed in this guide. ⢠Do not drop, knock, or shake the game deck. Rough ha ndling can break in tern al circuit boards and fine mechanics. ⢠Do not use harsh chemicals, cleaning solv ents , or strong detergents to clean the game deck. ⢠Do not paint the game deck. P aint can clog the moving parts and prevent proper operation. ⢠Use only the supplied or an approv ed replacement antenna. Unauthorized antennas, modifications, or attachment s could damage the game deck and may violate regulations governing radio devices.
178 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. All of the above sugg estions apply e qually to your device, battery , charger , or any enhanc ement. If any device is not w orking pr operly , take it to the nearest authorized service facility for service. Note : Before sending your device to a service facility , create a backup of data you want to keep such as contacts and calendar notes. ADDITIONAL SAFETY INFORMA TION Operating environment Remembe r to follow any special regulations in force in any area and always switch off your game deck when its use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger . Use the game deck only in i ts normal operat ing positions. To main tain compliance with radio frequency exposure guidelines only us e accessories approved by Nokia for use with this game deck. When the game deck is on and being worn on the body , always use an approved carrying case. Medical devices Operation of any radio transmitting e qui pment, including wireless devices, may interfere with the functionality of inadequa tely protected medical devices. Consul t a physician or the manufacturer of the medical device t o determine if they are adequately shielded from external RF energy or if you have any questions. Switch off your device in health care facilities when any regulation s po sted in these areas instruct you to do so. Hospitals or health care facilities may be using equipment that could be sensitive to external RF energy .
179 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. P ACEMAKERS P acemaker manufacturers recommend tha t a mi nimum separation of 6 in (15.3 cm) be maintained between a wireless device and a pacemaker to avoid potential interference with the pacemaker . These recommendati on s are consis tent with the i ndependent research by and recommendations of Wireless T echnology Research. To minimize the potential for interference, pe rsons with pacemakers should ⢠Always keep the game deck more than 6 in (15.3 cm) from their pacemaker when the game deck is sw itched on ⢠Not carry the game deck in a breast pocket ⢠Hold the game deck to the ear o pposite the pacemaker If you have an y reason to suspect tha t interfe rence is taking place, switch off your game deck immediately . HEARING AID Some digital wireless game de cks may interfere w ith some hearing aids. If interference occurs, consult your service provider . Ve h i c l e s RF signals may affect improperly instal led or inadequately shield ed elect ronic systems in motor vehicles such as electronic fuel in jection systems, electron ic antiskid (antilock) braking systems, electronic speed contro l systems, air bag systems. For mo re information, check wit h the manufacturer or its representative of your vehicle or any equipment that has been added. Only qualified personnel should service the game deck, or ins tall the game deck in a vehicle. Faulty installation or servic e may be dangerous and may invalidate any warranty that may apply to t he game d eck. Check regularly that all wireless device equipment in your vehicle is mounted and operating properly . Do not store or carry flammable liquids, gases, or explosi ve materi als in the same compartment as the game deck, its parts, or enhancements. For vehicles equipped w ith an air bag, remember that an air bags inflate with great force. Do no t place objects, including installed or portable
180 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. wireless equipment in the area over the air bag or in the air bag deployment area. If in-vehicle wireless equipment is improperly instal led and the air bag inflat es, serious injury could result. Safety information about video gam es About photosensi tive seizures A very small percentage o f people may expe rience a seizur e when exposed to certain visual images , including flashing li ghts or patterns that may appear in video games . Even people who have no history of seizur es or epilepsy may have an undiagnosed condition that can cause p hotosensitive epile ptic se izures while watching vi deo games. These seizures may have a variety of sy mptoms, including lightheadedness, altered vision, eye or face twitching, jerking or shaking of arms or legs, disorientation, confusion, or momentary loss of awareness. Seizures may also cause loss of consciousnes s or convulsions that can lead to injury from falling do wn or striking nearby objects. Immediately s top playing a nd consult a d o ctor if you experience an y of these symptoms. Adults who allow teenagers (o r childr en) to play the games should watch for or ask their children about these symptoms as they are more likely than adults to experience these seiz ures. The risk of photos ensitive epilep tic seizures may be reduced by playing in a well-lit room and by not play ing when you are drowsy or fatigued. If you or any of your relatives have a history of seizures or epilepsy , consult a doctor before playing. Play safely . Take a break from pl aying games at least every half hour . Stop playing immediately if you begin to feel tired of if you experience an unpleasant sensation or pain in your hands and/or arms. If the co ndit ion persists, consult a doct or . Use of vibration can aggravate injuries. Do not turn vibration on if you ha ve any ailment in the bones or joints of your fingers, hands, wri sts, or arms.
181 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. P otentially explosive environments Switch off your game deck when in any ar ea with a potentially explosive atmosphere and obey all signs and instructions. P otent ially explosive atmospheres include areas where you would normally be advised to turn off your vehicle engine. Sparks in such areas could cause an e xplosion or fire resultin g in bodily injury or even death. Switch off the game deck at refueli ng points such as near gas pump s at service stations . Observe restrictions on the use of radio equipment in fuel depots, storage, and distribution areas, chemical plants or whe re blasting opera tions are in progress. Areas with a potentially explosive atmosphere are often but not always clearly marked. They include below deck on boats, chemical transf er or st orage facilities, vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas (such as propane or butane), and areas where the air contains chemicals or particles such as grain, dust or metal powders. FCC regulations prohibit using your w ireles s game deck while in the air . The use of wireless telepho nes in an aircraft may be dangerous t o the operation of t he aircraft, disrupt the wireless telephone network, and may be illegal. Failure to observe these instructions may le ad to suspensio n or denial of telephone services to the offender , legal action, or both. EMERGENCY CALLS Important: Wireless phones, including th is device, operate usi ng radio signals, wireles s networks, landline networks, and user-p rogrammed functions. Be cause of this, conn ec tions in all conditions cannot be guaranteed. Y ou should never rely solely on any wireless phone for essent ial communications like medical emergencies.
182 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. To mak e an emergency call: 1 If the device is not on, switch it on . Check for adequate signal strength. Some networks may require that a valid SIM ca rd is properly inserted in the device. 2 Press the key as many times as need ed to clear the di splay and ready the device for calls. 3 Key in the official emergency number for your present location. Emergency numbers vary by location. 4 Press the key . If certain features are in us e, you may first need to turn those features off before you can make an emergency call. Consult th is gu ide or your service provider . When making an emergency call, give all the necessary in formation as accurately as possible. Y our wireless phone may be the only means of co mmunication at th e sc ene of an accident. Do not end the call until given permissi on to do so.
183 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. CERTIFICATION INFORMATION (SAR) THIS MODEL DEVICE MEETS THE GOVERNMENT'S REQUIREMENTS FOR EXPOSURE TO RADIO WAVES. Y our wireless devi ce is a radio transmitter an d receiver . It is designe d and manufactured not to exceed the emission limits for exposure to radio frequency (RF) energy set by the Federal Communications Commission of the U. S. Government. These limits are part of comprehensive guidelines and establish pe rmit ted levels of RF energy for the general population. The guidelines are based on standards that w ere developed by independent scientific organizations through p eriodic and thorough evaluation of scientific studies . The standards include a s ubstantial safety marg in designed to ass ure the safety of all persons, regardless of age and health. The exposure standard for wireless mobile devi ces employs a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate, or SA R. The SAR limit set by the FCC is 1.6W/ kg.* Tests for SAR are conducted using stan dard operating posit ions accepted by the FCC with the device transmitting at its highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands. Although the SAR is determ ined at t he highest certified powe r level, the actual SAR level of the device while operating can be well below the maximum value. This is because the device is designed to operate at multiple power levels so as to use only the power required to reach the network. In general, the closer you are to a wireless base st ation antenna, the low er the power outp ut. Before a device model is available for sale to the public, it must be tested and certified to the FCC that it does not exceed the lim it established by the government-adopted requirement for safe exposure. The tests are performed in positions and locations (for example, at the ear and w orn on the body) as required by the FCC for eac h model. The highest SAR value fo r this model device as reported t o the FCC when tested for use with GSM 850 at the ear is 0.60 W/kg, and wh e n worn on the body , as described in this user guide, is 1.03 W/kg. (Body-worn measurements differ among device models, depending upon available enhancements and FCC requirements).
184 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. While there may be differences between th e SAR levels of various devices and at various positions, they all meet the govern ment requirement. T he FCC has granted an Equipment Authorization for this model devi ce with all reported SAR levels evaluated as in compliance with the FC C RF exposure guidelines. SAR informat ion on this model device is on file with the FCC and can be found under the Display Grant sect ion of http://www .fcc.gov/oet/fccid after searching on FCC ID OW3RH-47 . For body worn operation, this device has been tested and meets the FCC RF exposure guidelines for use wi th a carry ca se, belt clip, or holder that contains no metal and that positions the handset a minimum of 7/8 inch (2.2 cm) from the body . Use of other carry cases, belt clips, or holders may not ensure compliance wi th FCC RF exposu r e guidelines. If you do not use a body-worn acce ssory and are not holding the device at the ear , po sition the handset a minimum of 7/8 inch (2.2 cm) from your body when the device is switched on. *In the United States and Cana da, the SAR limit for mobile devices used by t he public is 1.6 watts/kilogram (W /kg) averaged ov er one gram of tissue. The standard incorporates a substa ntial margin of safety to give additional protection for the public and to account for any variations in measur ements. SAR values may vary depending on national reporting requirements and the ne twork band. For SAR information in other regions please look under product information at www .nokia.com .
185 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. T ECHNICAL INFORMATION Feature Specification W eight 5.0 oz with BL-6C 1 0 70 mAh Li-lon battery Size 124 cc Frequency Range Lowband 824âÂÂ849 MHz (TX) 869âÂÂ894 MHz (RX) Highband 1850âÂÂ19 1 0 MHz (TX) 1930âÂÂ1990 MHz (RX) T ransmitter Output Po w e r 850 MHz Up to 2 W/33dBm 1900 MHz Up to 1 W /30 dBm Battery V oltage 3.7 V nominal Operating Temperature 14ðF to 13 1ðF -1 0ðC to 55ðC
186 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. T alk time Standby time Game time Up to 5 hours Up to 1 1 days Up to 1 0 hours Phone numbers Up to 500 contacts with multiple phone numbers and text entries per contact Feature Specification
187 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Nokia 90-Day Limited W arranty Nokia Inc. (âÂÂNokiaâÂÂ) warrants that this cellular device (âÂÂProductâÂÂ) is fr ee from defects in material and workmanship that result in Product failure during normal usage, according to the following terms and conditions: 1 The limited warrant y for the Product extends for 90 day s beginn ing on t h e date of the purchase of the Product . This 90-day period is extended by each whole day that the Product is ou t of your possession for repair under this warranty . 2 The limited warranty extends only to the original purchaser (âÂÂConsumerâÂÂ) o f the Product and is not assignable or transferable to any subsequent purchaser/end-user . 3 The limited warranty extends only to Consumers who purchase the Product in the United States of America. 4 During the limited warranty period, Nokia will repair , or replace, at Nokiaâ s sole option, any defective parts, or any parts that will not properly operate for their intended use with new or refurbished replacement items if such repair or replace ment is needed because of product malfunction or failure during normal usage. No charge will be made to the Consumer for any such parts. Nokia will also pay for the labor charges incurred by Nokia in repairing or replacing the defective parts. The limited warra nty does not cover defects in appearance, cosmetic, decorative or structural items, including framing,
188 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. and any non-operative parts. NokiaâÂÂs limit of liability under the limited warranty shall be the actual cash va lue of the Product at the time the Consumer returns the Product for repa ir , determined by the price paid by the Consumer for the Product less a reasonable amount for usage. Nokia shall not be liable for any other losse s or damages. These remedies are the ConsumerâÂÂs exclusive remedie s for breach of warranty . 5 Upon request from Nokia, the Consumer must prove the date of the original purchase of the Product by a dated bill of sale or dated itemized receipt. 6 The Consumer shall bear the cost of shipping the Product to Nokia in Melbourne, Florida. Nokia shall bear th e cost of shipping the Product back to the Consumer after the completi on of service under this limited warranty . 7 The Consumer shall have no covera ge or benefits under this limited warranty if any of the following conditions are applicable: a) The Product has been subjected to abnormal use, abnormal conditions, improper storage, exposure to moist ure or dampness, unauthorized modifications, unautho rized connections, unauthorized repair , misuse, negl ect, ab use, accident, alteration, improper installation, or other acts which are not the fault of Nokia, including damage caused by shipping. b) The Product has been damaged from ex ternal cau ses such as col lision with an object, or from fire, flooding, sand, dirt, windstorm, lightning, earthquake or damage from exposur e to weather conditions, an Act
189 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. of God, or battery leakage, theft, blown fuse, or improper use of any electrical source, damage caused by computer or internet viruses, bugs, worms, T rojan Horses, cance lbots or damage caused by the connection to other products not recommended for interconnection by Nokia. c) Nokia was not advised in writing by the Consumer of the alleged defect or malfunction of the Pr oduct within fourteen (14) days aft er the expiration of the applicable limited warranty period. d) The Product serial number plate or the accessory data code has been removed, defaced or altered. e) The defect or damage was caused by the defective function of the cellular system or by inadequate signal reception by the external antenna, or viruses or other soft ware problems introduced into the Product. 8 Nokia does not warrant uninterrupted or error-free operation of the Product. If a problem develops during the limited warranty period, the Consumer shall take the following step-by-step procedure: a) The Consumer shall return the Product to the place of purchase for repair or replacement processing.
190 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. b) If â aâ is not convenient because of distance (more than 50 miles) or for other good cause, the Consumer shall ship the Product prepaid and insured to: Nokia Inc., Attn: Repair Department 5650 Alliance Gateway Zone 4 Ft. W orth, TX. 76 177 c) The Consumer shall include a return address, daytime phone number and/or fax number , complete descr iption of the problem, proof of purchase and service agreement (if applicabl e). Expenses related to removing the Product from an installa tion are not covered under this limited warranty . d) The Consumer will be billed for any pa rts or labor charges not cover ed by this limited warranty . The Consumer will be responsible for any expenses related to reinst allation of the Product. e) Nokia will repair the Product under the limited warranty within 30 days after receipt of the Product. If Nokia cannot perform repairs covered under this limited warranty within 30 days, or after a reasonable number of attempts to repa ir the same defect, Nokia at its option, will provide a replacement Product or refund the purchase price of the Product less a reasonable amount for usage. In some states the Consumer may have the r ight to a loaner if the repair of the Product takes more than ten (1 0) days. Please contact the Customer Service Center at Nokia at the telephone number listed at
191 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. the end of this warranty if you ne ed a loaner and the repair of the Product has taken or is estimated to take more than ten (1 0) days. f) If the Product is returned during the limited warranty period, but the problem with the Product is not covered under the terms and conditions of this limited warranty , the Consumer will be notified and given an estimate of the charges th e Consumer must pay to have the Product repaired, with all shipping charges billed to the Consumer . If the estimate is refused, the Product will be returned freight collect. If the Product is returned after th e expiration of the limited warranty period, NokiaâÂÂs normal service policies shall a pply and the Consumer will be responsible for all shipping charges. 9 Y ou (the Consumer) understand th at the product m ay consist o f re f ur b is h ed equipment that contains used components, some of which have been reprocessed. The used components c omply with Product performance and reliability specifications. 10 ANY IMPLIED W ARRANTY OF MERCHA NT ABILITY , OR FITNESS FOR A P ARTICULAR PURPOSE OR USE, SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE DURA TION OF THE FOREGOING LIMITED WRITTE N WA R R AN T Y . OT H ER WI S E , T H E FOREGOING LIMITED WA RRANTY IS THE CONSUMERâÂÂS SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMED Y AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTH ER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. NOKIA SHA LL NO T BE LIABLE FOR SPECIAL, INCIDENT AL, PUNITIVE OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, INCLUDING BUT NO T LIMITED TO LOSS OF ANTICI PA TED BENEFITS OR PROFITS, LOSS OF SA VINGS OR REVENUE, LOSS OF DA TA , PUNITIVE DAMAGES, LOSS O F USE
192 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. OF THE PRODUCT OR ANY ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT , COST OF CAPITAL, COST OF ANY SUBSTITUTE EQUIPMENT OR FACILITIES, DOW NTIME, THE CLAIMS OF ANY THIRD PARTIES, IN CLUDING CUST OMERS, AND INJURY TO PR O P E R T Y , R E S ULT I N G F R O M THE PURCHASE OR USE OF THE PRODUCT OR ARISING FR OM BREACH OF THE W ARRANTY , BREACH OF CONTRACT , NEGLIGENCE, STRICT TORT , OR ANY OTHER LEGAL OR EQUITABLE THEORY , EVEN IF NOKIA KNE W OF THE LIKELIHOOD OF SUCH DAMAGES. NOKIA SHALL NO T BE LIABLE FOR DELAY I N RENDERING SERVICE UNDER THE LIMITED W ARRAN TY , OR LOSS OF USE DURING THE PERIOD THA T THE PRODUC T IS BEING REPAIRED. 11 Some states do not allow limitation of how long an implied warranty lasts, so the 90 day warranty limitation may not apply to you (the Consumer). Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental and consequential damages, so certain of the above limitations or exclusions may not apply to you (the Consumer). This limited warranty gives the Consumer specific legal righ ts and the Consumer may also have other rights which vary from state to state. 12 Nokia neither assumes nor authorizes any authorized service center or any other person or entity to assume for it any other obligation or liability beyond that which is expressly pr ovided for in this limited warranty including the provider or seller of any extended warranty or service agreement. 13 This is the entire warranty between Nokia and the Consumer , and supersedes all prior and contem poraneous agr eements or understandin gs,
193 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. oral or written, relating to the Product, and no representation, promise or condition not contained here in shall modify these terms. 14 This limited warranty allocates the risk of failure of the Product bet ween the Consumer and Nokia. The allocation is recognized by the Consumer and is reflected in the purchase price. 15 Any action or lawsuit for breach of warranty must be commenced within eighteen (18) months followin g purchase of the Product. 16 Questions concerning this limited warranty may be directed to: Nokia Inc. Attn: Customer Service 7725 W oodland Center Blvd., Ste. 150 T ampa, FL 336 14 T elephone: 1-888-NOKIA-2U (1-888-665-4228) Fa csimile: (8 13) 249-96 19 TTY/TDD Users Only: 1-800- 24-NOKIA (1-800- 246-6542)
194 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Appendix A Message from the CTIA (Cellular T elecommunications & Internet Association) to all users of mobile phones. é 2001 Cellular T elecommuni cations & Internet Association . All Rights R eserv ed.1250 Connect icut A v enue, NW S uite 800, W ashington, DC 20036. Phone: (202) 785-0 081
195 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Saf ety is the most important call you will ever make . A Guide to Safe and Re sponsible Wireless Phone Use T ens of millions of people in the U .S . toda y tak e ad v antage of the unique combination of con v enience, safety and v alue deliv ered b y the wireless telephone. Quite simply , the wir eless phone giv es people the po w erful ability to communicate b y v oice--almost anyw her e, anytime--with the boss, with a c lient, with the kids, with emergency personnel or ev en with the police. Each y ear , Americans mak e billions of calls fr om their wir eless phones, and th e numbers ar e rapidly gr o wing. But an impor tant r esponsib ility accompanies those benefits , one that ev ery wireless phone user must u phold. When dri ving a car , driving is y our first r esponsibility . A wir eless phone can be an in v alua ble tool, b ut good judgment must be e xer cised at all times w hile driving a motor v ehicle--w hether on the phone or not. T he basic lessons ar e ones w e all learned as teenagers. Dri ving requir es aler tness, caution and cour tesy . It r equir es a hea vy dose of basic common sense---keep y our head up , keep y our ey es on the road, c h eck y our mirrors fr equently and w atch out f or other dri v ers. It r equires obeying all tr aff i c signs and signals and sta ying within the speed limit. It means using seatbelts and r equiring other passengers to do the same. But with wir eless phone use, dri ving safely means a little mor e. This br ochur e is a call to wir eless phone users ev er yw here to m ake safety their f irst priority w hen behind the w heel of a car . W ireless telecomm unications is k eeping us in touch, simplifying our li v es, pr otecting us in emer gencies and pro viding opportunities to help others in need. Wh en it comes to the use of wir eless phones, saf ety is your most important call . Wireless Phone "Safety Tip s" Belo w ar e safety tips to f ollo w w hile driving and using a wir eless phone w hich should be easy to r emember . 1 Get to kno w y our wireless phone and its featur es such as speed dial and r edial. Car efully r ead y our instruction manual and learn to tak e ad v antage of v alua ble featur es most phones off er , includ ing automatic r edial and memor y . Also , w ork to
196 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. memorize the phone k eypad so y ou can use the speed dial function without taking y our attention off the r oad. 2 Wh en a v ailab le, use a hands free de vice. A n umber of hands fr ee wireless ph one accessories ar e r eadily a v ailab le toda y . W hether y ou choose an installed mounted device f o r y our wir eless phone or a speak er phone accessor y , tak e ad v antage of these devices if a v ailab le to y ou. 3 P osition y our wireless phone within easy r each. Mak e sure y ou place y our wir eless phone within easy r each a nd w here y ou can gra b it without rem o ving y our ey es from the r oad. If y ou get an incoming call at an incon v enient time, if possibl e, let y our v oice mail answ er it for y ou. 4 Suspend con v ersations during hazar dous dri ving conditions or situations . Let the person y ou are speaking with kno w y ou are dri ving; if necessary , suspend the call in hea vy traff ic or hazardous w eather conditions . Rain, sleet, sno w and ice can be hazar dous, b ut so is hea vy traf fic . As a dri v er , y our first r esponsibility is to pa y attention to the road. 5 Do not tak e notes or look up phone n umbers w hile dri ving. If y ou are r eading an addr ess book or business card, or writing a "to do" list w hile driving a car , y ou ar e not w atching w here y ou are going . Itâ s common sense. Donâ t get caught in a dangero us situation because y ou are r eading or writing a nd not pa ying attention to the r oad or nearb y v ehicles . 6 Dial sensib ly and assess the traf fic; if possib le, place calls w hen y ou are not mo ving or bef or e pulling into traf fi c. T r y to plan y our calls bef ore y ou begin y our trip or attempt to coincide y our calls with times y o u ma y be stopped at a stop sign, r ed light or otherwise stationary . But if y o u need to dial w hile driving, f ollo w this simple ti p- -dial only a fe w numbers , chec k the road and y our mirrors , then contin ue. 7 Do not engage in stressful or emotional c on v ersations that ma y be distracting. Str essful or emotional con v ersations and driving do not mix--they a re distr acting and ev en dangerous w hen y ou are behind the w heel of a car . Mak e people y ou ar e talking with a w are y ou ar e driving a nd if necessary , suspend con v ersations w hich ha v e the potential to di v er t y our attention from the r oad. 8 Use y our wireless phone to call f or help . Y our wir eless phone is one of the gr eatest tools y ou can o wn to protect y ourself and y our family in dang er ous situations--with y our phone at y our side, help is only three n umbers a w a y . Dial 9-1-1 or other local
197 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. emer genc y nu mber in the case of f ire, tr affic ac cident, road hazar d or medical emer genc y . R emember , it is a fr ee call on y our wir eless phone! 9 Use y our wireless phone to help others in emergencies . Y our wireless phone pr o vides y ou a perfect opportunity to be a "Good Samaritan" in y our community . If y ou see an auto accident, crime in pr ogress or other serious em ergency w here liv es are in danger , call 9-1-1 or other local emer g ency number , as y ou w ould w ant others to do fo r yo u . 10 Call r oadside assistance or a special wir eless non-emer g ency assistance n umber w hen necessar y . Cer tain situations y ou encounter w hile dri ving ma y requir e attention, b ut are not ur g ent enough to merit a call f or emergency services . But y ou still can use y our wireless phone to lend a hand. If y ou see a brok en-do wn v ehicle posing no serio us hazar d, a brok en traf f ic signal, a minor traf fic acciden t w her e no one appears injur ed or a v ehicle y ou kno w to be stolen, call road side assistance or other special non-emer g ency wireless n umber . Car eless, distr acted indiv iduals and people dri ving irresponsib ly rep resent a h azard to ev er y one on the roa d. Since 1984, the Cellular T elecommunications Industry Association and the wir eless industr y ha v e conducted educational outr each to inf orm wir eless phone users of their r esponsibilities as safe dri v ers and good citizens . As w e appr oach a ne w centur y , more and more o f us will tak e ad v antage of the benef its of wir eless telephones. And , as w e tak e to the roads , w e all ha v e a respo nsibility to driv e safely . T he wireless industry r eminds you to use y our phone saf el y when drivin g . F or more inf or mation, please call 1-888-901-SAFE. F or updates: http://www .w o w-com.com/consumer/issues/dri ving/ar ticles .cfm?ID=85 é 2001 Cellular T elecommunications & Internet Association. All Rights R eserv ed.1250 Connecticut A v enue, NW Su ite 800, W ashington, DC 20036. Phone: (202) 785-0 081
198 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Appendix B Message from the FDA (U.S. Food and Drug Administration) to all users of mobile phones. July 18, 2001 .......... For upd ates: http: //www .fda.g ov/cdrh/phones
199 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Consumer Update on Wireless Phones U.S. Food and Drug Administration 1. Do wireless ph ones pose a he alth hazard? The available sci entific evidence does not show that any health problems are associated with using wireless phones. There is no proof, however , that wireless phones are absol u tely safe. Wi reless phones emit low levels of radio frequency energy (RF) in the microwave range while being used. They also emit very low levels of RF whe n in the stand-by mode. Wh ereas high levels of RF can produce health effects (by heating tissue), exposure to low lev el RF that does not produce heating effects causes no known adverse health effects. Many studies of lo w level RF expo sures have not found an y biological effects. Some studies have suggested that so me biol ogical effect s may occur , but such finding s have not been confirmed by additi onal research. In some cases, oth er researchers have had difficulty in reproducing tho se studies, or in determin ing the reasons for inconsistent results. 2. What is FDA's role concern ing the safety of wireless phones? Under the law , FDA does no t review the safety of radiation-emi tting consumer p roducts such as wireless phones before t hey can be sold, as it d oes with new d rugs or medical d evices. However , the agency has author ity to take acti o n if wireless pho nes are shown to emit radio frequency energy (RF) at a level that i s hazardous to th e user . In su ch a case, FDA cou ld require the manufact urers of wireless phones to notify us ers of the health hazard and to repair , replace or re call the phones so th at the hazard no longer exists . Although the exi sting scientifi c data do not justif y FDA regul atory actions, FDA h as urged the wireless phone industry to take a n umber of steps, including th e following: ⢠Support needed research into possi ble biological ef fects of RF of the type emi tted by wireless phones; ⢠Design wireless phones in a way that minimizes a ny RF exposure to t he user that is not necessary for device function; and ⢠Cooperate in providing users of wireless phones with the best possible inform ation on possi ble effects of wireless phone use on hu man health. FDA belongs to an interagen cy working group of th e federal agencies that have responsib ility for dif ferent aspects of RF safety to ensu re coordinated effort s at the federal level. The following agencies belong to this wo rking group: ⢠National I nstitute f or Occ upational Safet y and Health ⢠Environmental Protecti on Agency ⢠Federal Comm unications Comm ission ⢠Occupatio nal Safety and Health Administr ation
200 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. ⢠National T ele communic ations an d Info rmatio n Admi nistra tion The National I nstitutes of Health p articipate s in some interagency worki ng gr oup activi ties, as well. FDA shares regulatory respon si bili ties for wirel ess phones w ith the Federal Comm unications Commissio n (FCC) . All phone s that are s old in the United States must comply w ith FCC safety guidelines that limit RF ex posure. FCC reli es on FDA an d other health agencies for safety questions about wireless phones . FCC also regu lates the base station s that th e wireless ph one networks rely upon. While these base st ations operate at higher powe r than do the wi reless phones t hemselves, th e RF exposures that people g et from these base station s are typically t housands of tim es lower than those they can g et from wireless ph ones. Base stat ions are thus not the subject of the safet y questio ns discussed in this document. 3. What kinds of ph ones are the subject o f this up date? The term wireless phone refers he re to hand-held wirele ss phones with built-in antenn as, often cal led cell mobile or PCS p hones. These types of wirele ss pho nes can expose the us er to measurable radio frequency energy (RF) because of the short distan ce between the phone and the user â s head. Th ese RF exposures are limit ed by Federal Communications C omm ission s afety guidelines that were developed with the ad vice of FDA and other federal health a nd s afety agenci es. When the phone is l ocated at greater distances from the user , the exposure to RF is drastically lo wer becaus e a person's RF exposure decreases r apidly with incre asing distance from the so urce. The so-called cordle ss ph ones; which have a base unit connected to t h e telephone wiring in a house, typicall y operate at far lower po wer levels, and thus produce RF exposures far below the FCC safety limit s. 4. What are the results of the research done already? The research done thus far has produced confli cting results , and many stud ies have suffered from fl aws in their r esearch me thods. Anima l experi ments invest igating the effects of radio frequency energy (RF) exposures characteristic of wirele ss phones have yiel de d conflictin g results t hat often cannot be repeated in other laboratories. A few anim al studies , however , h ave suggested th at low levels of RF could accelera te the development of cancer in laborat ory anim als. Howev er , many of the studies th at showed increased tumor developmen t used an imals t h at had been gen etically engineered or treated with cancer -causing chemicals so as to be pre-disp osed to develop cancer in the absence of RF exposure. Other studies expo sed the animals to RF for up to 22 hou rs per day . These cond itions are not similar to the condi tions under wh ich peo ple use wirele ss phones, so we do nâÂÂt know with certainty what the results of such st udies mean for human health. Three large epidemiology studies have been pu blished since December 2 000. Between them, the studies investigat ed any pos sible associ ation betw een th e use of wireless phon es and primary brain cancer , g lioma, mening ioma, or acoustic neuroma, tum o rs of the brain or saliva ry gl and, leukem ia, or
201 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. other cancers. None of the studies demonstrated the exis tence of any har mful health ef fects from wireless phone RF expo sures. Howe v er , none of t he studies can answer q uestions about l ong-term exposures, since the average period of ph one use in thes e studies was aroun d three years. 5.What research is needed to decide whether RF exp osure from wireless phones poses a h ealth risk? A combin ation of la boratory stu dies and epidemiol ogi cal studies of people act ually using wirel ess phones would provide s ome of the data that are ne eded. Lifet ime anim al e xposure s tudies could be complete d in a few years. How ever , very la rge numbers of animals woul d be need ed to provide reliable proof of a cancer promoting effect if one exists. Ep idemiological studies can provide data that is directly applicab le to human popu lations, but 1 0 or more years follow-up may be needed to provide answers about some health ef fects, such as cancer . Thi s is because the interval between the ti me of exposure to a cancer-causing agent and the tim e tumors dev elop - if they do - may be many , many years. T he inte rpretatio n of e pidemio logical studies is ham pered by difficulties in me asuring actual RF exposure durin g day-to-day us e of wireless phones. Man y factors af fect this measurement, such as the angle at which the phone is held, or which m odel of phone i s used. 6.What is FDA do ing to f ind out mo re about th e possible health effects of wireless phone RF? FDA is working with the U.S. National T oxicology Program and with grou ps of investigato rs around the world to en sure that high priority an imal stud ies are conducted t o address important questio ns about the effects of exposure to radio frequency energy (RF). FDA has been a leading pa rticipant in the W orld Health Organization International E lectromagnetic Fields (EMF) Project since its inception in 1996. An influenti al result of this wo rk has been the development of a detailed agenda of research needs that has driven the est ablishment of new research programs around the world. The Project h as also he lped develop a series of p ublic information documents on EMF is sues. FDA and the Cellular T elecommunications & Internet Association (CTIA) have a formal Cooperative Research and Development Agreement (CRADA) to do research on wireless phone safety . FDA provides the scientific ove rsight, o btaining input from ex perts in government, ind ustry , and academic organizations. CTIA-funded research is conducted t hrough contracts to independent inv estigators. Th e initial research will include both laboratory studies and studies o f wireless phone users. The CRADA will also include a broad ass essment of additio nal research needs in the context of the latest research developments around the world. 7. How can I find out how much radio frequency energy exposu re I can get by using my wireless phone?
202 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. All phones so ld in the U nited States m ust comp ly with Federal Comm unication s Commission (FCC ) guidelines that limit radio frequency energy (RF) exposures. FCC established these gui delines in consultation with FDA and the other federal health and s afety agenci es. The FC C limit for R F exposure from wirele ss telephone s is set at a Spec ific Absorp tion Rate (S AR) of 1.6 watts per kilogram (1.6 W/ kg). The FC C limit is consiste nt with the safety st andards developed by the In stitute of Electrical and Electronic Engineering (IEEE) and the Nati onal Council on Radiatio n Protection and Measurement. The exposure limit take s into c onsideration the bodyâ s ability to remove heat from the tissu es that absorb energy from th e wireless phone and is set well bel ow levels known to have effects. Manufacturers of wireless phones must report the RF exposure level for each model of phone to the FCC. The FC C website (http://www .fcc.go v/oet/rfs afety) gives direction s for locating the FCC identification nu mber on your p hone so you can fi nd your phoneâ s RF exposur e level i n the onli ne listing. 8. What has FDA done to measu re the radio frequ ency energy comi ng from wireless phones? The Institute of Electrical and Electronic Eng in eers (IEEE) is developing a technical standard for measuring the radio frequen cy energy (RF) exposure from wireless ph ones and other wireless h andsets with the participat ion and leadership of FDA scie ntists and engineers. The s tandard, Recommended Practice for Determining the Spatia l-Peak Specific Absorpt ion Rate (SAR) in the Hu man Body Due to W i reless Commun ications De vices: Experim ental T echni ques, sets forth th e first consisten t test methodology for measuring the rate at which RF is de po sited in the heads of wireless phone users. The test method us es a tissue-sim ulating mod el of the hum an head. Standardized SAR test m ethodology i s expected to greatly improve the consist ency of meas urements made at di fferent laboratories on the same phone. SAR is th e measurement of the amount of energy absorbed in tissue, either by the whole body or a small part of th e body . It is measu red in watts/kg ( or milliwa tts/g) of mat ter . This measureme nt is used to dete rmine whether a wire less phone com plies with safet y guidelines. 9. What steps can I t ake to redu ce my exposure to radio frequency energ y from my wireless ph one? If there is a risk from these pr oducts--and at this point we do not know that there is--it is probably very small. But if you are concerned abou t avoiding even potentia l risks, you can tak e a few simple step s to minimize yo ur exposure to radio frequency energy (RF). Since time is a k ey factor in how m uch exposure a person receives, redu cing the amoun t of time spent u sing a wireless phone will reduce R F exposure. If you must conduct extend ed conversatio ns by wire less phon e every day , you could p lace more distance between your body and the source of th e RF , since the exposure level drops of f dramatically with distance. For exam ple, you could us e a headset and carry the wi reless phone aw ay from your b ody or use a wireless phone connected t o a remote antenna.
203 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Again, the scientifi c data do not d emonstrate that wireless ph ones are harmful. But if you are concerned about the RF expos ure from thes e products, you can use measures like those d escribed above to reduce your RF exposure from wirel ess phone use. 10. What about children using wireless phones ? The scientific evidence does not sh ow a danger to users of wirel ess phones, including children and teenagers. If you want to take st eps to low er exposu re to radi o frequency energy (RF), the measures described above would apply to children and teenag ers using wireless ph ones. Reducing th e time of wireless phone use and i ncreasing the dist ance betw een the user and the RF source will reduce RF exposure.So me groups sponso red by ot her national govern ment s have advised that children be discouraged from usin g wireless phones at all. For exampl e, the government in the United Kingdom distributed leaflets co ntaining such a recommendati on in December 2000. They noted that no eviden ce exists that using a wireless phone causes b rain tumo rs or other ill effects. Their recommendation to limit wireless phone use by childr en was strictly precautionary; it was not based on scientific evidence that an y health hazard exists. 1 1. What about wireless phone in terference with medical eq uipment? Radio frequency energy (RF) from wireless phones can in te ract with s ome elec tronic de vices. For this reason, FDA helped develop a deta iled test method to m easure elec trom agnetic interference (EMI) of implanted cardiac p acemakers and defibrillators from wi reless telepho nes. This test method is now part of a standard sponsored by the Associat ion for th e Adv ancem ent of Medi cal inst rument ation (AAMI) . The final draft, a joint effort by FDA, medical devi ce manufactur ers, and many other groups, was completed in late 2000. This standard will allow m a nufacturers to en sure that cardiac pacemakers and defibrillators are safe from wire less phone EM I. FDA has tested hearing aids for interference from handheld wireless phones and help ed develop a voluntary standard sp onsored by the Institute of Electrical and Elect ronic Engineers (IEEE). This standa rd specifies test me thods and performance requirements for hearing aids and wireless phon es so that no i nterference occurs when a person uses a compatible phone a nd a accompanied hearing ai d at th e same tim e. Th is standa rd was a pproved by the IEEE in 2000. FDA continues to moni tor the use of wireless ph ones for po ssible interactions wit h other medical devices. Should harmful int erference be found to occur, FDA will conduct testing to as sess the interference and work to resolve the problem . 12. Where can I find additional inform ation? For additional informatio n, please refer to the following resources: ⢠FDA web page on wireless phones http://www .fda.gov/cdrh/p hones/index.htm l
204 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. ⢠Federal Comm unications Commiss ion (FCC) RF Safety Program http://www .fcc.gov/ oet/rfsafety ⢠International Commissi on on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protect ion http://www .icni rp.de ⢠W orld Health Organization (WHO) International EMF Project http://www .who.int /emf ⢠National Radiol ogical Protect ion Board (UK) http://www .nrpb.org.uk/ July 18, 2001For upd ates: ht tp://www .fda.gov/cdrh/phon es
205 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Index A Access codes 149 Access points 141 Settings 144 Settings, Advanced 146 Alarms Alarm clock 118 Calendar alarms 59 Applications, Java 119, 120 Arena launcher Getting started 48 Registration and login 49 B Backing up and restorin g game data 133 Bluetooth Connection requests 163 Connecti on stat us indicators 164 Device address 162 Disconnecting 165 Factory set passcode 163 Pairing 163 Pairing re quests 163 Pairing, glossary explanati on 163 Passcode, glossary explanati on 163 Bookmark, glossary explanation 108 C Cache 111 Calendar Alarm 58 Sending entries 59 Stopping a calendar alar m 59 Using PC Suite 58 Call register See Log Calls Cost limit 157
206 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Dialed numbers 156 Duration 156 International 42 Received 156 Settings 140 Settings for call forwarding 134 Transferring 45 CD-ROM 166 Cell broadcast messa ges Certificates 151 Changing between applica tions 33 Clear screen See Standby mode Clock Alarm 118 Settings 118 Snooze 118 Computer connections 166 Connection ind icato rs Bluetooth 164 GPRS 36 GSM data call 36 Connection settings 141 Connection s sett ing s 48 Contact car ds Inserting picture s 52 Removing ringin g tones 54 Storing Touch tones 46 Copying Contacts between the SIM card and phone memor y 53 Text 84 Cutting Text 84 D Data connections Indicators 36 Date Settings 148 Defin ition of te rms 18 5 DNS, Domain Name Service, Glossary explanation 146
207 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. E E-mail 86 Offline 97 Remote mailbox 93 Retrieving from mailbox 94 Viewing attachments 95 F File formats SIS file 120 Fixed dialing 172 G Game card 32 Game file types 133 Game manager 131 Grouping and sorting files 132 Games Multiple players 33 Offline profile 135 Starting a gam e 31 Glossary 185 GPRS Data counter 159 Pric ing 143 Settings 148 H Handsfree See Loudspeaker I Idle state See Standb y mode Imag es Adding to a contact card 52 Indicators and icons in standby mode 36 Info service See Cell broadcast messages. Instant messaging (IM) chat sess ions 65 definition 61 group ch at 71 logout 77 settings 76
208 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Internet access po ints (IAP) See Access p oints IP address, glossary explanation 146 ISDN, glossary explanation 146 J Java See Applications. L Lock code 149 Log Erasing contents 159 Filtering 158 Loudspeaker 39 Activatin g 39 Turning off 39 M Mailbox 93 Manager Installing and removing Symbian so ftware 134 Memory card 32, 168 Passwor d 170 Unlocking 170 Memory low Viewing memory consumption 167 Menu Rearranging 36 Messaging Multimedia messages 85 Writing e-mail 86 Multimedia messages 85 Playing sounds 90 Re-playing soun ds 90 N N-Gage Arena 48 connecting to 47 P Pasting Text 84 PC Connecting 16 6 PC Suite Calendar data 58
209 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Pictures Viewing 113 PIN code 149 Prepaid SIM cards 157 R Recording voice ta gs 55 Reminder See Calendar, Alarm Remote mailbox 93 Ringing to nes Adding a personal ringi ng tone 53 Receiving in a smart m es- sage 91 Settings 135 S Safety 14 Safety information Video games 180 Services Access points, see Access points Settings Access codes 149 Access points 144 Applications (Javaâ¢) 122 Bluetooth 161 Calendar 59 Call forwarding 134 Call restrictio ns 173 Certificates 151 Data connections 141 Date and time 148 Display 140 Language 138 Lock code 149 Log 159 Original settings 139 Personalizing the game deck PIN code 149 Screen saver 140 Sounds 135 Short message service center 100 Shortcu ts
210 Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. in Favorites 129 in Images 114 in Standby mode 36 SIM card Copying names and numbers 53 Messages 98 Messages on SIM 171 Names and numbers 171 SIS file 120 SMS center 100 Snooze Alarm clock 118 Calendar alarm 59 Sounds Muting a ringin g tone 44 Recording sounds 123 Removing a personal ringing tone 54 Settings 135 Standby mode 35 T Text message service center Adding new 100 Thumbn ails In a contact card 52 Time Settings 148 U USSD commands 99 V Video recorder 116 Viewing images 113 Voice dialing 54 Voice mailbox 159 Forward ing calls to voice mailbox 134 Voice messages 159 Voice tags 54 Adding 55 Making calls 56 Volume control During a call 42 Loudspeaker 39